JP7456782B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing games.

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that variably displays a plurality of types of performance identification information including specific performance identification information, derives and displays display results, and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player.

Conventional gaming machines are capable of variably displaying decorative symbols (performance identification information), and are also capable of temporarily stopping and re-variably displaying pseudo-continuous symbols (specific performance identification information) during variable display of the decorative symbols. There are some that can execute a pseudo-continuous performance (specific performance) including (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-131876

However, in Patent Document 1, since no effect is performed when the pseudo-continuous symbols temporarily stop, not only is it not possible to increase the player's expectations for the pseudo-continuous symbols to temporarily stop; There is a problem in that it is not possible to increase the player's sense of excitement when the symbols temporarily stop.

The present invention has been made with attention to such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can increase the expectations of the players as well as the sense of exhilaration of the players. .

The gaming machine of means A is
A gaming machine that variably displays a plurality of types of performance identification information including specific performance identification information, derives and displays display results, and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
As a variable display, the specific performance identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the performance identification information to the derivation and display of the display result, and then the variable display is resumed after the specific performance can be executed. A performance execution means,
Suggestion performance execution means capable of executing a suggestion performance in which the specific performance identification information suggests that the specific performance identification information is temporarily stopped;
Notification performance execution means capable of executing a notification performance to notify that the specific performance identification information has temporarily stopped;
Special performance execution means capable of executing a special performance after execution of the notification performance,
As the suggested performance, the suggestive performance execution means increases the visibility of the specific performance identification information and performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information by displaying an effect display. Once the performance identification information different from the information is lowered to a first low visibility state in which visibility is visible, the specific performance identification information and the specific performance identification are lowered to a first low visibility state in which visibility is lower than the first low visibility state. It is possible to perform a performance that lowers the performance identification information different from the information to a second low visibility state that is a visibility state where the performance identification information is visible,
The notification performance execution means is capable of executing a performance that makes performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information invisible as the notification performance,
In the case where the specific performance identification information does not temporarily stop after the suggested performance is executed, the movement speed of the specific performance identification information before the predetermined timing is different from the movement speed of the specific performance identification information after the predetermined timing. ,
The special performance execution means displays a specific display corresponding to the resumption of the variable display, which is a performance different from the suggestion performance and the notification performance, and which is different from a predetermined display that was displayed before the variable display was restarted. The production can be performed as the special production,
The suggestive effect execution means is capable of continuously displaying the effect display for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing if the specific effect identification information does not temporarily stop ;
The display area of the effect display in the second low visibility state is larger than the display area of the effect display in the first low visibility state.
It is characterized by
Furthermore, the gaming machine is capable of variably displaying multiple types of performance identification information, deriving and displaying display results, and controlling the game machine to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
As a variable display, special identification information different from the performance identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the performance identification information until the display result is derived and displayed, and then the variable display is resumed. a specific performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance;
Suggestion performance execution means capable of executing a suggestion performance that suggests that the special identification information temporarily stops;
a notification effect execution means capable of executing a notification effect to notify that the special identification information has temporarily stopped;
Special performance execution means capable of executing a special performance after execution of the notification performance,
The suggestive effect execution means is in a visual state in which the special identification information and the effect identification information are visible by displaying an effect display as the suggestive effect, and the special identification information and the effect identification information are visible. After the first low visibility state is lowered, the visibility is lowered to a second low visibility state, which is a visibility state that is even lower in visibility than the first low visibility state, but in which the special identification information and the production identification information can be seen. It is possible to perform a production that
The notification performance execution means is capable of executing a performance that makes the performance identification information invisible as the notification performance,
In the case where the special identification information does not temporarily stop after the suggestive effect is executed, the moving speed of the special identification information before the predetermined timing is different from the moving speed of the special identification information after the predetermined timing,
The special performance execution means displays a specific display corresponding to the resumption of the variable display, which is a performance different from the suggestion performance and the notification performance, and which is different from a predetermined display that was displayed before the variable display was restarted. The production can be performed as the special production,
The suggestive effect execution means is capable of continuously displaying the effect display for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing if the special identification information does not temporarily stop ;
The display area of the effect display in the second low visibility state is larger than the display area of the effect display in the first low visibility state.
It is characterized by
Furthermore, the gaming machine of Means 1 variably displays multiple types of performance identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) including specific performance identification information (e.g., pseudo-continuous patterns), derives and displays display results, and is advantageous to the player. A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1, 75SG001) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Electronic components (for example, LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803) provided so as to be visible to the player;
a specific member (for example, base member 301, 401, 601, 801) provided around the electronic component and formed in a similar color to the electronic component;
a translucent member (e.g., cover member 302, 402, 602, 802) that is a translucent member and is provided so that a player can see the electronic component and the specific member through the member;
Predetermined electronic parts (for example, first starting port switch 22A, second starting port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.) that are difficult or invisible to the player;
A predetermined member provided around the predetermined electronic component (for example, a member for fixing the first starting port switch 22A, second starting port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.);
Equipped with
The light-transmitting member (e.g., cover member 302) has a decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern 331) formed across the electronic component (e.g., LED board 303) and the specific member (e.g., base member 301). ) (see Figure 10-12),
The predetermined member has a color that is not similar to that of the predetermined electronic component,
moreover,
As a variable display, a specific performance (for example, a pseudo continuous display) that temporarily stops the specific performance identification information at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the performance identification information until the derivation and display of the display result, and then restarts the variable display. a specific effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 7) capable of executing the effect (effect);
Suggestion performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable displaying performance process shown in FIG. 7 part) and
Notification performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable displaying performance process shown in FIG. 7 ) and
Equipped with
The suggestive performance execution means is configured to reduce the visibility of performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display as the suggestive performance, and then reduce the visibility of performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information to a first low visibility state. It is possible to perform an effect that lowers the visibility to a second low visibility state that is even lower than the current state (for example, as shown in FIGS. after reducing the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns by displaying them, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced by displaying concentrated lines at a density of D2),
The notification performance execution means is capable of executing, as the notification performance, a performance that makes performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information invisible (for example, as shown in FIGS. 16-34 and 16-35). , a portion where the left and right decorative patterns are made invisible by displaying an effect image for temporary stop notification in the entire display area of the image display device 5),
The suggestive effect execution means is capable of executing the suggestive effect even when the specific effect identification information does not temporarily stop, and when the specific effect identification information does not temporarily stop, displays the effect for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing. Continuous display is possible (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-44, if the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the pseudo-continuous pattern can be displayed after the pseudo-continuous pattern is hidden on the image display device 5. (areas where saturated lines are continuously displayed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the electronic parts are arranged so that they can be seen by the player, the decorative pattern makes the electronic parts less noticeable, so it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in design. Further, as for the predetermined electronic parts that are difficult or invisible to the player, general-purpose products can be used without considering the balance with the predetermined members, so that manufacturing costs can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the temporary stop through the suggestive effect, and by executing the notification effect, it is possible to increase the player's sense of elation over the temporary stop. By continuing to display the effect display even after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the temporary stop was not made, and the player's feeling of disappointment at the failure to make the temporary stop is alleviated. As a result, the player's enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 2 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko game) that can variably display multiple types of performance identification information (for example, decorative patterns), derive and display display results, and control the player to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) Machine 1, 75SG001),
Electronic components (for example, LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803) provided so as to be visible to the player;
a specific member (for example, base member 301, 401, 601, 801) provided around the electronic component and formed in a similar color to the electronic component;
a translucent member (e.g., cover member 302, 402, 602, 802) that is a translucent member and is provided so that a player can see the electronic component and the specific member through the member;
Predetermined electronic parts (for example, first starting port switch 22A, second starting port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.) that are difficult or invisible to the player;
A predetermined member provided around the predetermined electronic component (for example, a member for fixing the first starting port switch 22A, second starting port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.);
Equipped with
The light-transmitting member (e.g., cover member 302) has a decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern 331) formed across the electronic component (e.g., LED board 303) and the specific member (e.g., base member 301). ) (see Figure 10-12),
The predetermined member has a color that is not similar to that of the predetermined electronic component,
moreover,
As a variable display, special identification information (for example, a pseudo-continuous pattern) different from the performance identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the performance identification information until the display result is derived and displayed. A specific effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 7) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a pseudo continuous effect) that restarts the variable display later;
Suggestive effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable displaying effect process shown in FIG. 7 part) and
Notification performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable displaying performance process shown in FIG. 7 part) and
Equipped with
The suggestive performance execution means, as the suggestive performance, once reduces the visibility of the performance identification information to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display, and then lowers the visibility even further than the first low visibility state. It is possible to perform an effect that lowers the visibility to a low second low visibility state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 16-33 and 16-34, by displaying concentrated lines at the density D1 on the image display device 5, the left and right After reducing the visibility of the decorative pattern, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced by displaying concentrated lines at a density of D2),
The notification performance execution means is capable of executing a performance that makes the performance identification information invisible as the notification performance (for example, as shown in FIGS. 16-34 and 16-35, an effect image for temporary stop notification) (a portion in which the left and right decorative patterns are made invisible by displaying them in the entire display area of the image display device 5),
The suggestive effect execution means is capable of executing the suggestive effect even when the special identification information does not temporarily stop, and continues to display the effect for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing if the special identification information does not temporarily stop. (For example, as shown in FIG. 16-44, if the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the pseudo-continuous pattern can be displayed even after the pseudo-continuous pattern is hidden on the image display device 5. (parts where saturated lines are continuously displayed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the electronic parts are arranged so that they can be seen by the player, the decorative pattern makes the electronic parts less noticeable, so it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in design. Further, as for the predetermined electronic parts that are difficult or invisible to the player, general-purpose products can be used without considering the balance with the predetermined members, so that manufacturing costs can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the temporary stop through the suggestive effect, and by executing the notification effect, it is possible to increase the player's sense of elation over the temporary stop. By continuing to display the effect display even after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the temporary stop was not made, and the player's feeling of disappointment at the failure to make the temporary stop is alleviated. As a result, the player's enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include inventions related to gaming machines of means 3 and 4 below. Conventionally, in gaming machines, it has been possible to perform variable display of decorative patterns (performance identification information) as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2016-131876. There was one that was able to execute a pseudo continuous performance (specific performance) that included temporary stopping of (specific performance identification information) and variable display again. However, in such a gaming machine, since no effect is performed when the pseudo-continuous symbols temporarily stop, it is not possible to increase the player's expectations for the pseudo-continuous symbols to temporarily stop. There is a problem in that it is not possible to increase the player's sense of exhilaration when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped.In view of this, it is possible to increase the player's sense of anticipation, and also to increase the player's sense of elation. There is a demand for a gaming machine that can do this.

The gaming machine of means 3 is
Multiple types of performance identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) including specific performance identification information (e.g., pseudo-continuous patterns) are variably displayed, display results are derived and displayed, and an advantageous state advantageous to the player (e.g., jackpot game) is generated. A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled according to the state),
As a variable display, a specific performance (for example, a pseudo continuous display) that temporarily stops the specific performance identification information at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the performance identification information until the derivation and display of the display result, and then restarts the variable display. a specific effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 7) capable of executing the effect (effect);
Suggestion performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable displaying performance process shown in FIG. 7 part) and
Notification performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable displaying performance process shown in FIG. 7 part) and
Equipped with
The suggestive performance execution means is configured to reduce the visibility of performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display as the suggestive performance, and then reduce the visibility of performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information to a first low visibility state. It is possible to perform an effect that lowers the visibility to a second low visibility state that is even lower than the current state (for example, as shown in FIGS. after reducing the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns by displaying them, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced by displaying concentrated lines at a density of D2),
The notification performance execution means is capable of executing, as the notification performance, a performance that makes performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information invisible (for example, as shown in FIGS. 16-34 and 16-35). , a portion where the left and right decorative patterns are made invisible by displaying an effect image for temporary stop notification in the entire display area of the image display device 5),
The suggestive effect execution means is capable of executing the suggestive effect even when the specific effect identification information does not temporarily stop, and when the specific effect identification information does not temporarily stop, displays the effect for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing. Continuous display is possible (for example, as shown in FIG. (areas where saturated lines are continuously displayed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the temporary stop by the suggestive effect, and it is possible to increase the elation of the player for the temporary stop by executing the notification effect, and If the player does not make a temporary stop, the effect display continues to be displayed even after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop, making it easier for the player to recognize that the temporary stop was not made, and also reducing the player's disappointment at not making the temporary stop. Since the player's feelings can be alleviated, the player's enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 4 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko game) that can variably display multiple types of performance identification information (for example, decorative patterns), derive and display display results, and control the player to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) machine 1),
As a variable display, special identification information (for example, a pseudo-continuous pattern) different from the performance identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the performance identification information until the display result is derived and displayed. A specific effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 7) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a pseudo continuous effect) that restarts the variable display later;
Suggestive effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable displaying effect process shown in FIG. 7 part) and
Notification performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable displaying performance process shown in FIG. 7 part) and
Equipped with
The suggestive performance execution means, as the suggestive performance, once reduces the visibility of the performance identification information to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display, and then lowers the visibility even further than the first low visibility state. It is possible to perform an effect that lowers the visibility to a low second low visibility state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 16-33 and 16-34, by displaying concentrated lines at the density D1 on the image display device 5, the left and right After reducing the visibility of the decorative pattern, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced by displaying concentrated lines at a density of D2),
The notification performance execution means is capable of executing a performance that makes the performance identification information invisible as the notification performance (for example, as shown in FIGS. 16-34 and 16-35, an effect image for temporary stop notification) (a portion in which the left and right decorative patterns are made invisible by displaying them in the entire display area of the image display device 5),
The suggestive effect execution means is capable of executing the suggestive effect even when the special identification information does not temporarily stop, and continues to display the effect for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing if the special identification information does not temporarily stop. (For example, as shown in FIG. 16-44, if the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the pseudo-continuous pattern can be displayed even after the pseudo-continuous pattern is hidden on the image display device 5. (parts where saturated lines are continuously displayed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the temporary stop by the suggestive effect, and also to increase the player's sense of elation for the temporary stop by executing the notification effect. If the player does not make a temporary stop, the effect display continues to be displayed even after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop, making it easier for the player to recognize that the temporary stop was not made, and reducing the player's disappointment at not making the temporary stop. Since the player's feelings can be alleviated, the player's enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Note that the present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include configurations other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention. It may be something that you have.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a figure showing the example of composition of the production control board concerning feature parts 91AK and 92AK. It is a figure showing the example of composition of the storage area concerning feature parts 91AK and 92AK. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of determining moving image data and text display process tables related to characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the text display process table regarding characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. It is a figure which shows the example of text display control regarding characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the text display setting information regarding characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a text display regarding characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a text display regarding characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. A figure showing an example of text display related to characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a screen display relating to feature parts 01AK and 02AK. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing effect drawing commands related to characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a screen display related to characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an effect drawing synthesis process related to feature parts 01AK and 02AK. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of execution of image processing related to characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure which shows the example of an image display regarding characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure which shows the reach effect content and drawing processing pattern regarding the characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of determining drawing processing patterns related to characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure showing the production execution period concerning feature parts 01AK and 02AK. A figure showing an example of performance execution related to feature parts 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure which shows the example of performance execution concerning characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure which shows the example of performance execution concerning characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure which shows the example of performance execution concerning characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. It is a front view showing a pachinko game machine as a characteristic part 75SG. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine as a characteristic part 75SG. It is a front view showing a game board of a pachinko game machine as a characteristic part 75SG. FIG. 10-3 is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 10-3. It is a front view showing a light guide plate device. (A) is an enlarged front view showing the main parts of the light guide plate device, (B) is a sectional view taken along the line BB in (A), and (C) is an enlarged view showing the main parts in (B). (A) is a front view showing the first production unit, and (B) is a rear view. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing the configuration of the first production unit as viewed diagonally from the front. (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in Figure 10-7(A), (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in Figure 10-7(A), and (C) is a cross-sectional view taken along line E- in Figure 10-7(A). It is an E sectional view. (A) is a front view showing the base member, (B) is a front view showing the LED board, and (C) is a front view showing the cover member. (A) is a front view showing the first effect unit with the cover member removed, and (B) is a front view showing the first effect unit with the cover member attached. 10-11(B) is an enlarged view showing the main part of FIG. 10-11(B). FIG. (A) is a front view showing the variable winning ball unit, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line F-F of (A). (A) and (B) are cross-sectional views showing the main parts of the first production unit, and (C) and (D) are cross-sectional views showing the main parts of the variable winning ball unit. It is a diagram for comparing the first performance unit and the variable winning ball unit. It is a diagram for explaining similar colors. (A) is a front view showing the second performance unit, and (B) is a front view showing the second performance unit with the cover member removed. (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along line GG in FIG. 10-17(A), and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line H-H in FIG. 10-17(A). (A) is a diagram explaining the boundary between the base member and the LED board, and (B) is a diagram showing the configuration of the second presentation unit. (A) is a front view showing a third performance unit and a fourth performance unit. (A) is a sectional view taken along line II in FIG. 10-20, and (B) is a sectional view taken along line JJ in FIG. 10-20. 10-20 is a sectional view taken along line KK in FIG. 10-20. It is an explanatory diagram showing the visibility situation of the 3rd production unit and the 4th production unit. A diagram showing the configuration of the third performance unit and the fourth performance unit. It is a figure which shows the presentation mode when the 3rd presentation unit and the 4th presentation unit emit light. (A) is a schematic front view showing a state in which the third production unit is located at the origin position, and (B) is a schematic front view showing a state in which the third production unit is located in the production position. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. It is a diagram showing the numerical range of the jackpot and the numerical range of the loss with the time saving in the variable display of the first special figure in the normal state or the time saving state. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the operation|movement of a 2nd movable body. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data that constitutes a display on an image display device. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data that constitutes a display on an image display device. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing display result determination table 2. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing contents of various jackpots. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. It is an explanatory diagram showing a variable display result, a fluctuation pattern, and a relationship. 1A is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a data holding area for performance control, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a command buffer received at the time of start winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of starting prize winning determination processing. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of a winning random value determination process, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of a variable category command. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal special symbol processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command analysis processing. It is a part of a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prefetch notice setting process. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display pattern determination ratio for the pending memory of a jackpot, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of the display pattern determination ratio for the pending memory of a loss. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. It is a timing chart of the variable display which performs a pseudo continuous effect. It is a timing chart of the variable display which performs a pseudo continuous effect. This is a timing chart of a variable display that executes a pseudo consecutive performance. It is a timing chart of the variable display which performs a pseudo continuous effect. It is a timing chart of the variable display which performs a pseudo continuous effect. It is an explanatory diagram of each performance period and performance contents in a pseudo continuous performance. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of a preview performance determination process (for execution of a pseudo continuous performance), and (B) is a diagram showing whether or not to execute a preview performance and the determination ratio of the preview performance to be executed. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of a preview performance determination process (for when pseudo continuous performance is not executed), and (B) is a diagram showing whether or not a preview performance is to be executed and the determination ratio of the preview performance to be executed. (A) is a diagram showing the special temporary stop notification performance execution determination ratio, and (B) is a diagram showing the temporary stop notification performance period determination ratio. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an output mode of sound output from a speaker. It is a figure which shows the display mode of each image in the temporary stop suggestion production period when a pseudo continuous pattern is non-stop. It is a figure which shows the display mode of each image in the temporary stop suggestion production period when a pseudo continuous pattern temporarily stops. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which performs a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which performs a pseudo continuous effect. A figure showing the display mode of an image display device in variable display mode that executes pseudo consecutive performances. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which performs a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which performs a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which performs a pseudo continuous effect. A figure showing the display mode of an image display device in variable display mode that executes pseudo consecutive performances. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which performs a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which performs a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which performs a pseudo continuous effect. It is an explanatory diagram of the change in the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns during the temporary stop suggestion performance period and the temporary stop notification performance period. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which performs a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which performs a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which performs the pseudo continuous effect in a modification. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data forming a display on an image display device. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data that constitutes a display on an image display device. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data that constitutes a display on an image display device. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which performs a pseudo continuous effect. 13 is an explanatory diagram of image data constituting a display on an image display device in a modified example. FIG. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which performs the pseudo continuous effect in a modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which performs the pseudo continuous effect in a modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which performs the pseudo continuous effect in a modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which performs the pseudo continuous effect in a modification. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing the transparency of concentrated lines and effect images in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which performs the pseudo continuous effect in a modification.

DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS A mode for implementing a gaming machine according to the present invention will be explained below based on the drawings.

(form)
Type 1 gaming machine is
A gaming machine capable of playing games (for example, pachinko gaming machine 75SG001),
Electronic components (for example, LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803) provided so as to be visible to the player;
a specific member (for example, base member 301, 401, 601, 801) provided around the electronic component and formed in a similar color to the electronic component;
a translucent member (e.g., cover member 302, 402, 602, 802) that is a translucent member and is provided so that a player can see the electronic component and the specific member through the member;
It is characterized by having the following.
According to this feature, even if the electronic parts are arranged so that they can be seen by the player, the electronic parts become less noticeable due to the specific members having similar colors, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

The gaming machine of Form 2 is the gaming machine described in Form 1,
Predetermined electronic components (for example, first starting port switch 22A, second starting port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.) that are difficult or invisible to the player;
A predetermined member provided around the predetermined electronic component (for example, a member for fixing the first starting port switch 22A, second starting port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.);
Equipped with
The predetermined member is characterized in that it has a color that is not similar to the predetermined electronic component.
According to this feature, for the predetermined electronic parts that are difficult or invisible to the player, general-purpose products can be used without considering the balance with the predetermined members, so that manufacturing costs can be reduced.

The gaming machine of Form 3 is the gaming machine described in Form 1 or 2,
Comprising a display means (for example, an image display device 5),
The electronic component (for example, the LED board 303) is provided at a position farther from the display means than the specific member (for example, the upper part of the base member 301).
According to this feature, the electronic components are located away from the display means that attracts the attention of the player, so that they are less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 3,
A protruding portion (e.g., protruding portion 3A) provided above the electronic component (e.g., LED board 603, 803) and protruding toward the player side than the electronic component;
The protrusion is larger than the electronic component.
According to this feature, the electronic component is in the shadow of the protrusion and becomes less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 5 is the gaming machine described in Form 4,
The electronic component (e.g., LED board 603, 803) and the specific member (e.g., base member 601, 801) are dark colored (e.g., black) (modified example)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the electronic component can easily disappear into the shadow of the protrusion, making it less noticeable.

A gaming machine according to a sixth aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to fifth aspects,
The specific member has a higher color brightness or saturation than the electronic component.
According to this feature, the specific member is more visible than the electronic component, so that the electronic component can be made relatively less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 7 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 6,
The light-transmitting member (e.g., cover member 302) has a decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern 331) formed across the electronic component (e.g., LED board 303) and the specific member (e.g., base member 301). ) (see Figure 10-12)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the electronic components are arranged so that they can be seen by the player, the decorative pattern makes the electronic components less noticeable, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in design.

The gaming machine of Form 8 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 7,
The electronic component (for example, LED board 303) is a circuit board,
The specific member (e.g., base member 301) has a decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern 341) that has at least some aspects in common with the circuit pattern (e.g., printed wiring 320) formed on the circuit board. (See Figure 10-12)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the circuit pattern formed on the circuit board becomes less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 9 is the gaming machine according to Form 7 or 8,
The specific member (e.g., base member 301) has a predetermined area (e.g., rear wall portions 313A to 313D) that is visible from the player side without passing through the light-transmitting member (e.g., cover member 302). ,
A predetermined decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern 341) that is the same or similar in aspect to the decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern 331) of the transparent member is provided in the predetermined area (see FIG. 10-12).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it becomes difficult to understand that the specific member and the light-transmitting member are different members.

The gaming machine of Form 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 9,
A decorative portion (e.g., decorative portion 420) provided at a position corresponding to a boundary (e.g., boundary portion BD) between the electronic component (e.g., LED board 403) and the specific member (e.g., base member 401). (See Figure 10-19)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if electronic components are placed so that they can be seen by the player, the boundaries between the electronic components and specific components are obscured by the decorative parts, making the electronic components less noticeable, which increases the degree of freedom in design. can be increased.

The gaming machine of Form 11 is the gaming machine according to Form 10,
The decorative part includes a plurality of decorative parts,
A plurality of predetermined decorative parts are provided at positions that do not correspond to the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member,
The plurality of decorative parts are larger in number than the plurality of predetermined decorative parts.
According to this feature, the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member is made difficult to see by the plurality of decorative parts, so that the electronic component becomes less noticeable.

A gaming machine according to a twelfth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to eleventh aspects,
the light-transmitting member (e.g., cover member 402) has a boundary-corresponding region (e.g., convex portion 410) corresponding to a boundary (e.g., boundary portion BD) between the electronic component (e.g., LED board 403) and the specific member (e.g., base member 401) and a boundary non-corresponding region (e.g., a region other than convex portion 410) not corresponding to the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member,
The boundary-corresponding area has a lower light transmittance than the boundary non-corresponding area.
According to this feature, it becomes difficult for a player to see the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member through the boundary corresponding area, so that the electronic component becomes less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 13 is the gaming machine according to Form 11 or 12,
A logotype (for example, the letter "V") is displayed on the decoration part (for example, the decoration part 420) (see FIG. 10-19).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player focuses on the logotype and becomes less aware of the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member, so that the electronic component becomes less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 14 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 11 to 13,
The electronic component (for example, LED board 403) includes a light emitting means (for example, second presentation LED 404A) that can cause the decoration part (for example, decoration part 420) to emit light (see FIG. 10-18).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the decorative portion stands out due to the light emission, it becomes difficult for the player to be aware of the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member, so that the electronic component becomes less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 15 is the gaming machine described in Form 14,
The light emitting means (for example, the second effect LED 404A) is provided so that the decoration part (for example, the decoration part 420) can emit surface light (for example, the light from the second effect LED 404A is emitted from the inner lens). The entire front surface of the convex part 410 including the decoration part 420 emits light from the front surface of the convex part 410 by being emitted substantially uniformly forward from the entire front surface of the convex part 405 and incident on the area corresponding to the convex part 410.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the decorative portion stands out due to the surface emission, it becomes difficult for the player to be aware of the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member, so that the electronic component becomes less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 16 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 15,
Around the electronic component (for example, the LED board 803) and the specific member (for example, the base member 801), a presentation means (for example, the third presentation unit 600) having higher visibility than the electronic component and the specific member is provided. (See Figure 10-20)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if electronic components are placed so that they can be seen by players, the visibility of the presentation means is higher than the visibility of the electronic components, making the electronic components less noticeable, increasing the degree of freedom in design. be able to.

The gaming machine of Form 17 is the gaming machine described in Form 16,
The presentation means (for example, the third presentation unit 600) is provided closer to the player (front side) than the electronic component (for example, the LED board 803) (see FIG. 10-22).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the visibility of the presentation means can be easily improved.

The gaming machine of Form 18 is the gaming machine according to Form 16 or 17,
The presentation section (e.g., light emitting presentation section 630) provided so as to be visible to the player in the presentation means (e.g., third presentation unit 600) is larger than the electronic component (e.g., LED board 803) (FIG. 10). -20 reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the visibility of the presentation means can be easily improved.

The gaming machine of Form 19 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 16 to 18,
A presentation section (e.g., light emitting presentation section 630) provided in the presentation means (e.g., third presentation unit 600) so as to be visible to the player has better visibility than the color of the electronic component (e.g., LED board 803). It is characterized by being a color with a high level of color.
According to this feature, the visibility of the presentation means can be easily improved.

The gaming machine of Form 20 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 16 to 19,
The effect means (for example, the third effect unit 600) has a light emitting means (for example, third effect LEDs 604A, 604B) capable of emitting light toward the player (see FIG. 10-21(A)).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the visibility of the presentation means can be easily improved.

The gaming machine of Form 21 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 20,
It further includes a specific light-transmitting member (for example, the cover plate 702A of the variable winning ball unit 700) that is a member having light-transmitting properties and is provided at a different position from the light-transmitting member,
The transmittance (for example, XA%, XB%) of transmitting the light that has entered the light-transmitting member (for example, the cover member 302) in a predetermined direction (for example, the T direction) is higher than that of the light that has entered the specific light-transmitting member. Lower than the transmittance (for example, Y%) that transmits light in the predetermined direction (see Figure 10-14)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if electronic components are placed so that they can be seen by players, the electronic components become less noticeable because the translucency of the translucent member is lower than the translucency of the specific translucent member. The degree of freedom can be increased.

The gaming machine of Form 22 is the gaming machine according to Form 21,
The thickness of the light-transmitting member (for example, the front-to-back dimensions L1A, L1B of the cover member 302) is thicker than the thickness of the specific light-transmitting member (for example, the front-to-back dimension L2 of the cover plate 702A) (see FIG. 10-14). )
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the light transmittance of the light transmitting member is reduced, making the electronic components less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 23 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 22,
The light-transmitting member (for example, the cover member 302) is colored in a predetermined color,
The predetermined color is similar to the electronic component (for example, the LED board 303) and the specific member (for example, the base member 301).
According to this feature, the light-transmitting member blends in with the electronic component and the specific member, making the electronic component less noticeable.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be explained.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (the bottom left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a first special pattern display device 4A and a second special pattern display device 4B are provided that perform a variable display (also called a special pattern game) of special patterns (also called special patterns) as multiple types of special identification information. Each of these is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special patterns are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The special patterns may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". Note that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, decorative patterns are displayed variably (for example, vertically direction (scroll display and update display). Note that the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols that are executed synchronously are collectively referred to simply as variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. Further, the sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

Furthermore, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area). , the first suspension display 25A displays the first suspension storage number based on the number of LEDs lit, and the second suspension display 25B displays the second suspension storage number based on the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning port that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, a start winning port door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 81, and when the solenoid 81 is in an off state, the start winning port door is in a closed position, so that the second start winning port is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning port being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in an on state, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning port (also referred to as the second start winning port being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning port, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that have an electric tulip-type device with a pair of movable wings.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the left and right lower sides of the game area), general winning holes 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided below the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects, etc. are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are provided around the gaming area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), which operates according to the performance.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). A batted ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided below the upper tray from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
When the player rotates the ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, game balls are launched toward the game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, a normal pattern game using the normal pattern display 20 is started. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol losing". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting prize opening (wins) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when it is controlled in the jackpot game state or small winning game state described later (although the starting prize has occurred) If the special pattern game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special pattern game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Further, if a special symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the jackpot symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "loser".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, or the timing until the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can obtain a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

In addition, the jackpot type is set in "Jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and upper limit opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc., described later), and the jackpot can be adjusted accordingly. Type is set. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small winning gaming state, the opening mode is the same as the jackpot gaming state for some jackpot types (the number of openings of the big winning opening is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same). etc.), the big prize opening will be open. In addition, similar to the jackpot type, a small hit type may also be provided for "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability variable, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", is set to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after the power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable-probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the display result of the special figure game continues to be controlled to the previous game state when it became a "small win" (However, if a "small win" occurs) If the special figure game of the hour is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game does not need to be a "small win".

Note that the gaming state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are performed. It may be performed as an effect using lighting or extinguishing of the lights, movement of the movable body 32, or any effect device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "small win", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1 3 5" etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "small hit"). As an example, decorative symbols constituting a chance are displayed in a stopped state on predetermined active lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot" for some jackpot types (jackpot type in a jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state) and when it becomes a "small win". , a common determined decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special pattern game is a "lose", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, if the display result is a "lose", after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss") is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The fixed decorative pattern (also referred to as "decorative pattern") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "reach loss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a pre-reading preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small winning game state, a small winning performance for notifying the small winning gaming state is executed. In addition, the jackpot game during the small win game state and some jackpot types (jackpot type of the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state, for example, the jackpot type that makes the subsequent gaming state a high probability state). By performing a common performance depending on the state, the player may not be able to tell whether the player is currently in a small win game state or a jackpot game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small win gaming state and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state. It's okay.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 2, for example. In addition, various other boards are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, a power supply board, and the like.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, small winning gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 in the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process to clear the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a production control command instructing initialization to the production control board 12 (step S9). When receiving the performance control command, the performance control CPU 120 displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like (power outage), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes unable to operate due to the power supply stop. In this power supply stop processing, processing for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, data protection processing for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes adding error detection codes (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for proceeding with the game (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.), but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a data check on the backed up data (performed using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S4). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, for example, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be restored to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped, so an initialization process (step S8) is performed.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the gaming state is restored to the state at the time of power supply stoppage, and if the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols will be restarted from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. That will happen.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a production control command to the production control board 12 to instruct recovery from the power outage (step S7). In line with this, a performance control command that specifies the backed-up gaming state before the power outage, or a performance control command that specifies the display result of the special game that is currently being executed if the special game is being executed. A command may also be sent. These commands can be the same as the commands that are set to be sent in the special design process described later. When the performance control CPU 120 receives a performance control command specifying the time of recovery from a power outage, the performance control CPU 120 indicates, for example, that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power outage or is in the process of recovering from the power outage. , performs a screen display for notification. The performance control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the performance control command.

After completing the restoration process or initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the gaming control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number updating process is executed to update at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state, control of gaming state, etc. (For details, see (described later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

Figure 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 4. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, processing for pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and judgment results such as pre-reading judgment. be exposed. The performance control command at the time of start winning that is set to be transmitted is transferred from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random value for determining the display result, it is determined whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small win" and the type of jackpot when it is determined to be a "jackpot". is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (any of a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority consumption). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this fluctuation pattern setting process, based on the pre-determined result of whether the display result will be a "big hit" or "small hit", a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is used to select one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns. It includes the process of determining the In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (the presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off and the display result is a "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "lost", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time-saving state or the variable probability state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for setting the jackpot opening to start the execution of a round in the jackpot game state and to open the jackpot opening, based on the display result being "jackpot". When the jackpot opening is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for opening the jackpot opening and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5" and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit opening preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small win opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the large winning opening to be open in the small winning gaming state based on the display result being "small winning". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small win open processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "9". This small win open processing includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time. When the large prize opening is returned to a closed state and it is time to end the small win game state, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "10" and the small win open processing ends.

The small win end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "10". This small win end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which the presentation operation that notifies the end of the small win game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small win game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before the small win game state is entered is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small win game state has elapsed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the small win end process ends.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and checking a predetermined operation.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32. Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the content of control of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 7, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the production control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "3". In this special winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is received, if the command specifies the start of a big win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "6". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. Also, when a command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special game was "miss", and the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the performance process flag is updated, the special winning waiting process is terminated.

The small hit performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "4". In this small win performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small win game state, and executes various performance controls in the small win game state based on the set content. . In addition, in the small hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the small win game state, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small win ending production. It is updated to a certain "5" and the small hit performance process is ended.

The small hit end production process in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of the small win game state, and performs various performance controls at the end of the small win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end performance process is ended.

The jackpot performance process in step S176 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending presentation process of step S177 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Variation of basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of a winning, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a winning. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 on a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device etc. The software may be distributed by being installed on the storage device of the user. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing section, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. It may also be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of a performance (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a percentage of "0%". For example, it also includes one being a percentage of "0%" and the other being a percentage of "100%" or a percentage less than "100%".

(Explanation of characteristic parts regarding setting values)
Hereinafter, the characteristic parts regarding the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

Although not shown, the main board 11 of the pachinko game machine 1 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1 while being housed in a board case that is configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. ing. Although not shown in the drawings, the main board 11 also includes a lock switch for switching the pachinko game machine 1 to a setting value changing state in which the setting values can be changed, and a lock switch for changing the setting value changing state, which will be described later. A setting changeover switch that functions as a setting switch for changing setting values such as winning probability (ball output rate), and an opening sensor that detects opening of a slot for a gaming machine are provided. Note that the setting value change state in this embodiment is also a state (setting value confirmation state) in which a game parlor attendant or the like can check the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1.

The operation parts, such as the lock switch and the setting changeover switch, which can be operated by an attendant of the game parlor, etc., are provided in the setting changeover main body part, and are housed in the board case together with the main board 11. The lock switch and the setting changeover switch are exposed on the back side through an opening formed on the back side of the board case so that they can be operated without opening the board case.

A board case housing a lock switch and a setting changeover switch is provided on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Therefore, it is extremely difficult or impossible to operate the lock switch and setting changeover switch when the gaming machine frame is closed, but they can be operated by opening the gaming machine frame using a designated door key. . Furthermore, since the lock switch requires the operation of a setting key owned by an attendant of the game parlor, it can only be operated by an administrator who possesses the setting key. The lock switch is also a switch that can be turned on and off using a setting key. In this embodiment, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but a single key may be used for both.

A display monitor capable of displaying set values and base values is disposed on the board case. The display monitor is connected to the main board 11 and disposed on the top of the board case. In other words, the display monitor is disposed in front when the main board 11 in the board case is viewed. Since the main board 11 cannot be viewed when the gaming machine frame is not open, the front when viewing the main board 11 is the front when viewing the back side of the gaming board 2 with the gaming machine frame open, which is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this way, the display monitor is disposed in front when viewing the back side of the gaming board 2 with the gaming machine frame open. However, the front when viewing the main board 11 may be the same as the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The display monitor includes a first display section, a second display section, a third display section, and a fourth display section. The first to fourth display parts of the display monitor are each made up of 7 segments that are made up of 7 segments that form a figure 8, and dots placed at the bottom right side of the 7 segments. . The first to fourth display sections of the display monitor are capable of lighting up or blinking in various colors, such as red, blue, green, yellow, white, etc., respectively. It is also possible to display different colors or a so-called rainbow while changing these colors in extremely short cycles.

A game information display section may be provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1, for example, at the lower left position of the game area. In the game information display section, a round indicator, a right-handed lamp, a probability change lamp, and a time saving lamp are arranged all together. The round display device can display the number of rounds of the jackpot game and the type of jackpot during the jackpot game. The right-handed lamp lights up in a game state in which the game ball is launched toward the right game area, such as a low-accuracy/high-base state as a time-saving state or a jackpot game state. The variable probability lamp lights up when in a variable probability state. The time saving lamp lights up when the time is being saved. The round indicator consists of five segments (LEDs).

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a jackpot (ball payout rate) changes depending on a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the probability of winning the jackpot (ball payout rate) is changed by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. The set value has six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest ball payout rate and decreasing values in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the ball payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the setting value, it is the most advantageous for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. Further, as for the setting value, the largest value, 6, is the most disadvantageous value for the gaming parlor side, and as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the value becomes more advantageous for the gaming parlor side. Note that if the ball payout rate changes depending on the setting value, for example, the probability of jackpot may change depending on the setting value, or the jackpot probability may be constant but the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state may change depending on the setting value. Good too. In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side.

(Explanation regarding characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK)
FIG. 8-1 shows an example of the configuration of various circuits mounted on the production control board 12 regarding the characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 8-1, various circuits such as a production control microprocessor 91AK100, an input circuit 91AK121, a memory controller 91AK122, a production data memory 91AK123, a ROM91AK124, a RAM91AK125, and a watchdog timer 91AK126 are mounted on the production control board 12. ing. The production control microprocessor 91AK100 includes a CPU91AK131, a VDP91AK132, an audio processing circuit 91AK133, a lamp control circuit 91AK134, a motor control circuit 135, and a built-in memory 91AK136. The VDP91AK132 includes an instruction decoder 91AK141, a demultiplexer 91AK142, a video decoder 91AK143, a moving image renderer 91AK144, a character image renderer 91AK145, a text image renderer 91AK146, a VRAM 91AK147, and a display drive circuit 91AK148. The audio processing circuit 91AK133 includes an audio decoder 91AK151.

The performance control microprocessor 91AK100 executes data processing and signal processing based on the performance control command received from the main board 11, thereby controlling the image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamps 9, and other decorations. It is sufficient if it is an integrated processor in which a circuit that can control execution of a performance using some or all of a plurality of performance devices such as LEDs for use in production, movable members for performance such as the movable body 32, etc., is integrated into one chip. . The production control microprocessor 91AK100 includes a CPU 91AK131, a VDP91AK132, and a built-in memory 91AK136, while some or all of the audio processing circuit 91AK133, lamp control circuit 91AK134, and motor control circuit 91AK135 are included in the production control microprocessor. It may be provided outside the 91AK100.

The input circuit 91AK121 may include a buffer circuit or the like. The buffer circuit of the input circuit 91AK121 is used to receive the production control command transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The memory controller 91AK122 executes various processes on the data stored in the performance data memory 91AK123 in response to a request signal supplied from the performance control microprocessor 91AK100. The performance data memory 91AK123 stores in advance performance data that can be used to execute a performance using the performance device, such as various image data representing display images on the image display device 5, for example. The image data stored in the effect data memory 91AK123 only needs to include moving image data and still image data. As still image data, for example, character image data that is sprite image data that is a plurality of types of image element data corresponding to a plurality of types of effect images, such as a plurality of types of decorative patterns that are variably displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, is used. It's fine if it's prepared. The effect image corresponding to the decorative pattern may be included in the character image. In addition, image data of arbitrary character images displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, specifically, effect images showing people, figures, symbols, etc., and background images are stored in advance in the effect data memory 91AK123. All you have to do is stay there. As the still image data, for example, text image data that allows characters to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 may be prepared. In addition to the image data, the effect data memory 91AK123 may store part or all of the audio data used for audio output by the speakers 8L and 8R. The performance data memory 91AK123 may store part or all of the lamp drive data used to drive lighting of light emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs. The effect data memory 91AK123 may store part or all of motor drive data used for rotationally driving a drive motor that operates a movable member such as the movable body 32. The performance data memory 91AK123 may be any nonvolatile semiconductor memory that can be electrically erased, written, or rewritten, such as a NAND flash memory. However, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal use state where the progress of the performance is controlled, the performance data memory 91AK123 is used as a read-only storage device.

The ROM 91AK124 stores computer programs and fixed data for performance control. The RAM 91AK125 provides a work area for the CPU 91AK131 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK100. The watchdog timer 91AK126 has a counter circuit that counts up or down based on the settings of an internal register, and generates a timeout signal that signals the elapse of time when the measured time exceeds the start time (timeout time) and a timeout occurs. The timeout signal is input to the CPU 91AK131 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK100. When the timeout signal is generated, the CPU 91AK131 goes into a reset state, restarting the performance control microprocessor 91AK100.

The ROM91AK124 stores various table data used to control performance operations in addition to programs for performance control. For example, the ROM91AK124 contains table data constituting a plurality of judgment tables and decision tables prepared for the CPU91AK131 of the production control microprocessor 91AK100 to perform various judgments, decisions, and settings, and table data constituting various production control patterns. Pattern data etc. are stored. The performance control pattern includes, for example, performance control execution data (display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, motor control data, operation detection control data, etc.) associated with the performance control process timer judgment value, an end code, etc. It consists of process data. Part or all of the production control pattern and production control execution data may be configured as a display list. The display list is data of a group of commands in which a series of transfer commands and the like to be executed by the VDP91AK132 are written in accordance with the order of image processing. The display list may include a mixture of display control commands, audio control commands, lamp control commands, and motor control commands. By controlling the progress of the performance using such a display list, it is sufficient to be able to control the electric components for the performance in a coordinated manner. The RAM91AK125 stores programs and various data used to control the electric components for presentation. The CPU 91AK131 only needs to be able to read the programs and data stored in the RAM 91AK125 in a shorter reading time than the reading time of the programs and data stored in the ROM 91AK124.

The CPU91AK131 executes control processing according to a computer program for effect control. At this time, the CPU 91AK131 executes a performance control process for controlling the progress of the performance using the electric parts for the performance according to the program read from the ROM 91AK124. The production control processing includes, for example, a fixed data read processing in which the CPU 91AK131 reads fixed data from the ROM 91AK124, a variable data write processing in which the CPU 91AK131 writes various variable data to the RAM 91AK125 and temporarily stores it, and a variable data write processing in which the CPU 91AK131 temporarily stores various data in the RAM 91AK125. Variation data read processing for reading variation data of Good too.

The VDP91AK132 determines the content of control of image display in the image display device 5 based on display control commands and register settings from the CPU91AK131. For example, the VDP91AK132 controls the variable display of decorative patterns and various types of effect displays by determining the switching timing of effect images to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. The VDP91AK132 is an image processor that has image data processing functions such as a high-speed drawing function, a moving image data separation function, and a video decoding function. Note that the VDP91AK132 may be a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), a GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or an image processing microprocessor more generally referred to as a DSP (Digital Signal Processor).

The instruction decoder 91AK141 decodes the instruction part (instruction code) included in the display control command from the CPU 91AK131, and instructs image processing etc. according to the decoding result. For example, a group of instructions for display control included in the decoding result is supplied to the internal circuit of the VDP91AK132. The instruction decoder 91AK141 may generate a control signal according to the decoding result and supply it to the internal circuit of the VDP91AK132. The voice control command group included in the decoding result may be supplied to the voice processing circuit 91AK133. The lamp control command group included in the decoding result may be supplied to the lamp control circuit 91AK134. The motor control command group included in the decoding result may be supplied to the motor control circuit 91AK135.

The demultiplexer 91AK142 receives video data read from the performance data memory 91AK123 and the like, separates it into video data and audio data, and outputs it. The video data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 is input to the video decoder 91AK143. The audio data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 is input to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The video decoder 91AK143 expands and decodes the compressed and encoded video data and outputs it. The video data output from the video decoder 91AK143 is supplied to the video renderer 91AK144. The video decoder 91AK143 may read compressed and encoded character image data or text image data from the performance data memory 91AK123 and the like, expand and decode it, and then supply it to the character image renderer 91AK145 or the text image renderer 91AK146.

The moving image renderer 91AK144 writes and stores the video data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143 in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The moving image renderer 91AK144 executes image processing that can adjust the hue, saturation, and brightness of the image shown in the video data, or some or all of these, and temporarily stores the adjusted video data in the VRAM 91AK147. It's okay. The character image renderer 91AK145 receives character image data read from the performance data memory 91AK123 or the like and character image data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143, and writes and stores them in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The character image renderer 91AK145 may convert the vector format character image data into a bitmap format and temporarily store it in the VRAM 91AK147. The character image renderer 91AK145 performs image conversion processing to display the character image specified by the character image specification information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the character display setting information. good. The text image renderer 91AK146 receives text image data read from the performance data memory 91AK123 or the like and text image data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143, and writes and stores them in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The text image renderer 91AK146 may convert vector format text image data into a bitmap format and temporarily store it in the VRAM 91AK147. The text image renderer 91AK146 performs image conversion processing to display the text image specified by the text image specification information in the display mode including the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. good.

The VRAM91AK147 temporarily stores image data and provides a work area for image data processing by the VDP91AK132. The VRAM 91AK 147 may be provided with various areas such as a palette area where palette data is placed, a character buffer where character image data is stored, a text buffer where text image data is stored, and a CG buffer. The CG buffer temporarily stores palette data that defines the display colors of characters and text when drawing processing is executed by the VDP91AK132, and temporarily stores display data for effect images created by drawing processing. It is used for preservation. The display drive circuit 91AK148 is a circuit for outputting signals for displaying various images on the screen of the image display device 5. The display drive circuit 91AK148 outputs a predetermined clock signal (dot clock signal) and scanning signal (drive control signal) to the image display device 5 along with a color signal (gradation control signal) according to the display data created in the VDP91AK132. do it.

A frame buffer may be provided inside the VRAM91AK147 or in a memory module separate from the VRAM91AK147, such as the built-in memory 91AK136. The frame buffer provides a virtual display area in which the display data of the effect image created by the drawing process by the VDP91AK132 is expanded and stored. The display data stored in the frame buffer is bitmap format image data (pixel data, raster data) created by the VDP91AK132 based on vector format image data (vector data, vector data) such as points, lines, polygons, etc. data), etc. Note that the frame buffer includes, for example, an actual display area that stores display data of various images displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and a real display area that stores display data of various images that are not displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. A virtual display area may also be included. Alternatively, display data for displaying a screen of the same size as the display screen of the image display device 5 in the virtual display area of the frame buffer is created, and the display data in the virtual display area is supplied to the display drive circuit 91AK148. In this way, the image may be output to the image display device 5 side.

For example, an image display area and an image drawing area are allocated to the storage area of the frame buffer. Display data for displaying an effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 is stored in the image display area. The image drawing area stores display data of each effect image created by drawing processing. The image display area and the image drawing area may be switched each time a V blank occurs. The V blank is generated at a period when the image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 is updated. Each time a V blank is started, a V blank interrupt signal is output from the VDP91AK132 to the CPU91AK131, and various interrupt signals may also be output from the VDP91AK132 to the CPU91AK131. By switching between the image display area and the image drawing area every time a V blank occurs, display data for each effect image is created in the storage area allocated as the image drawing area in a certain V blank cycle (first drawing display period). At the same time, this storage area is switched to the image display area in the next V blank period (second drawing display period). Therefore, the display data created by the drawing process in the first drawing display period is output to the image display device 5 in the second drawing display period, and an image drawing area is allocated in the second drawing display period. Display data created in the drawing process is stored in the storage area.

The audio processing circuit 91AK133 generates an audio signal that enables audio output using the speakers 8L and 8R, based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and the VDP 91AK132. The audio data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 of the VDP 91AK132 is supplied to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The audio decoder 91AK151 decompresses and decodes compression-encoded audio data to generate an audio signal. Further, the audio processing circuit 91AK133 may include an audio data memory capable of storing audio data not included in the moving image data in advance. The audio data memory may be provided outside the audio processing circuit 91AK133 by being included in the performance data memory 91AK123, ROM91AK124, etc., for example. The audio processing circuit 91AK133 may generate an audio signal by decompressing and decoding the audio data read from the audio data memory based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and the VDP 91AK132.

The lamp control circuit 91AK134 controls lighting modes (light emission modes) such as lighting, extinguishing, and blinking of light emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs. The lamp control circuit 91AK134 generates lamp control data based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and the VDP91AK132, and outputs it to the lamp control board 14 and the lamp driver board. The motor control circuit 91AK135 controls operating states such as rotation, stop, rotation speed, and rotation angle (phase) of a drive motor that operably drives a movable member for performance such as the movable body 32. The motor control circuit 91AK135 generates motor control data based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and the VDP 132, and outputs it to the motor driver board. The built-in memory 91AK136 is a memory circuit built into the performance control microprocessor 91AK100, and is capable of storing various data used to control the progress of the performance.

FIG. 8-2 shows an example of the configuration of the storage area for effect control depending on the storage contents. In this embodiment, storage areas 91AKM01, 91AKM02, and 91AKM11 to 91AKM14 are provided as a plurality of storage areas. Each storage area may be provided, for example, so as to be included in the effect data memory 91AK123, ROM91AKM124, built-in memory 91AK136, or a part or all of these. The plurality of storage areas include a storage area 91AKM11 that stores data related to moving images, and a storage area 91AKM13 that stores data related to text images.

The storage area 91AKM01 stores performance control programs and performance control management data, and functions as a management area for performance control programs and the like. For example, table data that is the configuration data of various tables prepared for the CPU 91AK131 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK100 to perform various judgments, decisions, and settings, pattern data that constitutes the performance control pattern, etc. are stored in the storage area as management data. It is sufficient if it is stored in 91AKM01.

The storage area 91AKM02 stores display control programs and display control management data, and functions as a display control program management area. For example, an image processing program prepared for the VDP91AK132 of the production control microprocessor 91AK100 to perform various image processing, a display process table that defines procedures for displaying production images, etc. are stored in the storage area 91AKM02. All you have to do is stay there. The image processing program may include a program that converts vector format image data to bitmap format image data. The image processing program may include a program that generates a bitmap text image based on text written using character codes and font data.

The storage area 91AKM11 stores moving image related data including moving image data and its related data. For video data, compressed image information including reference images, predicted images, etc. is generated by compression encoding processing such as motion compensated predictive encoding using multiple frames of original images, and is multiplexed with audio data. Any multiplexed encoded stream may be used. The moving image related data stored in the storage area 91AKM11 may include table data and data files that constitute a moving image display process table. The moving image display process table performs a display control process that allows the display content and display mode of the moving image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 to be changed according to the elapsed time as the performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses. used. The display content of the moving image is the content of the moving image that is reproduced and displayed in correspondence with the moving image data. The display mode of a moving image is a mode or form when a moving image is played back and displayed, including a display style and a display layout of the moving image. Note that the table data and data files that constitute the moving image display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

The storage area 91AKM12 stores character image related data including character image data and its related data. The character image data may be still image data in which arbitrary character images representing a plurality of types of decorative designs, people, figures, symbols, etc. are described in a vector format or a bitmap format. The character image related data stored in the storage area 91AKM12 may include table data and data files that constitute a character display process table. The character display process table is used for display control processing that allows the display content and display mode of the character image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 to be changed according to the elapsed time as the performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses. It will be done. The display content of the character image is the content of the character image displayed corresponding to the character image data. The display mode of the character image is the mode and form when displaying the character image, including the display style and display layout of the character image. Note that the table data and data files that constitute the character display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

The storage area 91AKM13 stores text image related data including text image data and its related data. The text image related data may include outline font data. Outline font data is data that can be converted into the glyph shape of each character in bitmap format image data by specifying a combination of multiple vertex coordinates connecting the outline for each character used to display a text image. be. The text image related data may include vector font data or stroke font data instead of or together with the outline font data. Vector font data and stroke font data are data that can be converted into the glyph shape of each character in bitmap format image data by specifying straight line or curve parameters for each character used to display a text image. . Outline fonts and vector fonts are included in scalable fonts whose quality does not easily deteriorate even when the font is enlarged or reduced. Text image data indicates a text image that constitutes a character string that is a combination of multiple character images, and includes arbitrarily set words such as sentences, paragraphs, sentences, clauses, words, or a combination of some or all of these. It is sufficient that the unit is recognizable. Further, the text image data may represent a text image consisting of only a single character image. The text image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 using text image data may indicate subtitles, subtitles, or other information-conveying characters. It may also indicate decorative characters. Since the text image data is included in the effect data for displaying the text image, it may be stored in the effect data memory 91AK123. On the other hand, font data such as outline font data is used when the VDP91AK132 executes an image processing program, so it may be stored in either the ROM91AK124 or the built-in memory 91AK136. In this way, the storage area 91AKM13 may be provided in the effect data memory 91AK123, the ROM 91AK124, or the built-in memory 91AK136. Similarly, other storage areas may be provided in part or all of a plurality of memory devices such as the effect data memory 91AK123, ROM91AKM124, and built-in memory 91AK136.

The text image related data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 may include table data and data files that constitute the text display process table. The text display process table is used for display control processing that allows the display content and display mode of the text image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 to be changed according to the elapsed time as the performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses. It will be done. The display content of the text image is the content of the text image displayed corresponding to the text image data. The display mode of the text image is the mode and form when displaying the character image, including the display style and display layout of the text image. Note that the table data and data files that constitute the text display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

The storage area 91AKM14 stores audio-related data including audio data and its related data. The audio data stored in the storage area 91AKM14 is different from the audio that is played back and output in synchronization with the image in the performance using a moving image display, and can be played back and output as any audio as the performance progresses in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is fine as long as it is done. The audio-related data stored in the storage area 91AKM14 may include table data and data files that constitute the audio output process table. The audio output process table is used for audio control processing that can change the sounds such as sound effects and music output from the speakers 8L and 8R according to the elapsed time as the performance in the pachinko game machine 1 progresses. Note that table data and data files that constitute the audio output process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM01 as production control management data.

In the VDP91AK132 of the production control microprocessor 91AK100, the moving image data read from the storage area 91AKM11 is input to the demultiplexer 91AK142, and is separated into video data and audio data. The video data is input to the video decoder 91AK143, and the audio data is input to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The video decoder 91AK143 decompresses and decodes the compression-encoded video data and supplies it to the video renderer 91AK144. The moving image renderer 91AK144 executes conversion processing of video data according to the display mode including the display style and display layout of the moving image, and writes and stores the converted data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. In this way, the display of the moving image is controlled using the moving image data that is the data stored in the storage area 91AKM11.

In the VDP91AK132 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK100, the text image data read from the storage area 91AKM13 is input to the text image renderer 91AK146. If the text image data is compressed and encoded, it may be decompressed and decoded by the video decoder 91AK143 and then input to the text image renderer 91AK146. The text image renderer 91AK146 executes conversion processing of text image data according to the display mode including the display style and display layout of the text image, and writes and stores the converted data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. In this way, the display of the text image is controlled using the text image data that is the data stored in the storage area 91AKM13.

FIG. 8-3 shows an example of determining the moving image data and text display process table according to the contents of the reach effect. In the super reach reach effects such as SP reach A and SP reach B, it is possible to perform an effect by displaying a moving image using moving image data and an effect by displaying a text image using text image data. The period in which the effect by displaying the moving image is performed and the period in which the effect by displaying the text image is performed may be partly or completely the same period, or may include different periods. The text display process table is a table in which process data used for display control is set, for example, when displaying a text image that is a combination of a plurality of character images.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 8-3, one of the moving image data 91AKD01, 91AKD02, 91AKD11, and 91AKD12 is determined according to the content of the reach effect, and one of the text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, 91AKT11, and 91AKT12 is determined. be done. Among these, the moving image data is determined in one-to-one correspondence with the content of the reach effect. For example, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (jackpot)", the moving image data 91AKD01 is determined. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (jackpot)", the moving image data 91AKD02 is determined. When the reach effect content is "SP reach A (lose)", the moving image data 91AKD11 is determined. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (loss)", the moving image data 91AKD12 is determined. On the other hand, there are cases where the text display process table can be determined in common even for different reach effect contents, and cases where it cannot be determined. For example, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (jackpot)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 30/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 70/100. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (jackpot)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT11 is 20/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT12 is 80/100. When the reach effect content is "SP reach A (lose)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 80/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 20/100. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (lose)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT11 is 70/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT12 is 30/100.

Text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 can be determined when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (jackpot)" or "SP reach A (loss)", and when the reach effect content is "SP reach B (jackpot)" or In the case of "SP reach B (loss)", the decision cannot be made. The text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 can be determined when the reach effect content is "SP reach B (jackpot)" or "SP reach B (loss)", and when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (jackpot)" or In the case of "SP reach A (loss)", the decision cannot be made. In this way, the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 are used to control the display of text images when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed. The text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 are used to control the display of text images when the SP reach B reach effect is executed.

When the reach performance content is "SP reach A (jackpot)", a video display using video data 91AKD01 is executed, and when the reach performance content is "SP reach A (loss)", a video display is performed. An effect is performed by displaying a moving image using the data 91AKD11. A text image using either text display process table 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 is added to a moving image displayed using moving image data 91AKD01 and a moving image displayed using moving image data 91AKD11. Can be displayed. When the reach performance content is "SP reach B (jackpot)", a video display using video data 91AKD02 is executed, and when the reach performance content is "SP reach B (loss)", a video display is performed. An effect is performed by displaying a moving image using the data 91AKD12. A text image using either text display process table 91AKT11 or 91AKT12 is added to a moving image displayed using moving image data 91AKD02 and a moving image displayed using moving image data 91AKD12. Can be displayed. Therefore, a text image using a common text display process table can be added to and displayed on a plurality of moving images displayed using different moving image data.

FIG. 8-4 shows an example of the structure of the text display process table. Of these, FIG. 8-4 (A1) shows an example of the structure of the text display process table 91AKT01 that can be used in response to the reach effect of SP reach A, and FIG. 8-4 (A2) shows the reach effect of SP reach A. A configuration example of a text display process table 91AKT02 that can be used in accordance with the production is shown. FIG. 8-4(B) shows an example of the structure of the text display process table 91AKT11 that can be used in response to the SP reach B reach effect.

In each text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with each other for a plurality of text display periods. Note that the text display process table may include text image designation information and text display setting information that are set in association with each other in a single text display period. The text display period specifies, for each text image to be displayed, a start time to start displaying the text image and an end time to end the display. The start time and end time of the text display period may be specified using the elapsed time since the display of the moving image in the reach effect has started, or may be specified using the elapsed time since the variable display has started. It's okay. However, if the display content of the text image is highly related to the display content of the video image, the start and end times of the text display period are determined using the elapsed time since the video image display started. It is desirable to specify. The elapsed time from the start of the variable display includes, for example, the elapsed time before the variable display changed to the reach mode, so even if the video image is a common reach effect due to the variable display effect before the variable display changed to the reach mode, The timing at which the display starts may vary. Even in such a case, if the start time and end time of the text display period are specified using the elapsed time since the display of the moving image started, the timing at which a specific image in the moving image is displayed, The timing at which a specific text image is displayed can be easily synchronized, and the linkage between the display of the moving image and the display of the text image can be improved. The text image designation information specifies text image data used for displaying a text image in a specifiable manner. For example, the text image designation information may be any information that designates the storage address, readout address, data size, etc. of the text image data in the storage area 91AKM13. Alternatively, the text image specification information can be used to specify the content of the text image to be displayed using any character code, such as ASCII code, UNICODE (UTF-16 or UTF-8, etc.), or JIS code (Shift_JIS code, etc.). may be information that specifies. The text display setting information is information that specifies the display mode of the text image in a configurable manner based on display style information, display layout information, other metadata, etc. of the text image to be displayed. The text display process table may be written using a predetermined markup language such as TTML (Timed Text Markup Language). In addition, the text display process table only needs to be able to set text image designation information and text display setting information in association with each other in a text display period by using arbitrary table data.

FIG. 8-5 shows an example of text image display control using the text display process table. Of these, FIG. 8-5 (A1) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT01, and FIG. 8-5 (A2) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT02. . FIG. 8-5(B) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT11. In these display control examples, when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed, the display of the moving image is started at timing T00, and when the reach effect of SP reach B is executed, the display of the moving image is started at timing T10. Display of a moving image starts at a certain time.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A1), as shown in FIG. 8-5 (A1), in the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image designation information 91AKA01 Displays the specified text image. Also, during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 is displayed, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed. Display. Note that timings T02 to T04 are all included in the period from timing T01 to timing T05. After timing T05 has elapsed, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA04 is displayed during the text display period from timing T06 to timing T08, and the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA05 is displayed during the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09. Displays the specified text image. Note that timing T08 is a timing that arrives after timing T07.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A2), as shown in FIG. 8-5 (A2), in the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image designation information 91AKA01 Displays the specified text image. Furthermore, during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 is displayed, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed. Display. After the timing T05 has elapsed, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA14 is displayed during the text display period from timing T06 to timing T08, and the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA05 is displayed during the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09. Displays the specified text image.

In this way, the text image specified by the text image specification information can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in correspondence with the plurality of text display periods set by the text display process table. The first text display period included in the plurality of text display periods may include a period that is partially or entirely common to a second text display period that is different from the first text display period. For example, in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, and the second text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. 3 text display periods are included. In this case, the first text display period has a part in common with the second text display period, and a part in common with the third text display period. In this way, the first text display period includes a period that is partially common to the second text display period, and includes a period that is partially common to the third text display period. On the other hand, the entire period of the second text display period is common to the first text display period, and the entire period of the third text display period is common to the first text display period. Thus, the second text display period is entirely included in the first text display period, and the third text display period is entirely included in the first text display period. Further, the text display period from timing T06 to timing T08 and the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09 include a period in which a part is common to each other. In this way, a part of the first text display period may be included in the second text display period, and a part of the second text display period may be included in the first text display period. Alternatively, the entire first text display period may be included in the second text display period, and the entire second text display period may be included in the first text display period.

Depending on the settings in the text display process table, different text images specified by the text image specification information can be displayed in accordance with a plurality of text display periods. As a result, during the display period of the text image added to the video image, it is possible to change the first component related to the display content of the text image among the multiple components in the display of the text image according to the elapsed time. become. For example, according to the settings in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is displayed in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. As a second text display period included in the first text display period, a text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 is displayed in the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03. After the second text display period ends at timing T03, as a third text display period included in the first text display period, in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, text image designation information 91AKA03 or text The text image specified by the image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed. With such settings, only the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is displayed during the period from timing T01 to timing T02 and from timing T03 to timing T04 in the first text display period. . On the other hand, in the period from timing T02 to timing T03, which is common to the second text display period, in the first text display period, the text image specification is applied to the display of the first text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01. The display of the text image is changed so that the display of the second text image specified by the information 91AKA02 is added. On the other hand, during the period from timing T04 to timing T05, which is common to the third text display period, in the first text display period, the text image specification information is used to display the first text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01. The display of the text image is changed so that the display of the third text image specified by 91AKA03 or the display of the fourth text image specified by text image specification information 91AKA13 is added. In this case, the display of the text image added to the display of the first text image is changed so that either the third text image or the fourth text image is displayed according to the determination result of the text display process table. It becomes possible to change.

The text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02 display the text image specified by the common text image specification information 91AKA01 during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, and display the text image specified by the common text image specification information 91AKA01 from timing T02 to timing T03. The text image specified by the common text image specification information 91AKA02 is displayed during the display period. On the other hand, in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, in the case of the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed, and in the case of the text display process table 91AKT02, the text The text image specified by the image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed. The text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02 can be determined corresponding to the common moving image data 91AKD01 and 91AKD11. Therefore, even when moving images using common moving image data are displayed, the text images to be displayed are different in at least part of the plurality of text display periods, so that the display of the text images can be improved. Components can be changed. Note that when moving images using common moving image data are displayed, the text image serving as the display mode may be changed in all of the multiple text display periods depending on the determination result of the text display process table. good. When video images using common video data are displayed, some or all of the start time, end time, and period length may be different for multiple text display periods depending on the determination result of the text display process table. You can also let In this way, it may be possible to change part or all of the display period for displaying the text image added to one moving image, or it is possible to change part or all of the text image added to one moving image. You can also use it as

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT11 shown in FIG. 8-4(B), as shown in FIG. 8-5(B), in the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15, the text image designation information 91AKA21 Displays the specified text image. Furthermore, during the text display period from timing T11 to timing T12, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA22 is displayed, and during the text display period from timing T13 to timing T14, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA23 is displayed. Display. Note that timings T12 to T14 are all included in the period from timing T11 to timing T15. After timing T15 has elapsed, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA24 is displayed during the text display period from timing T16 to timing T17, and the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA25 is displayed during the text display period from timing T18 to timing T19. Displays the specified text image.

FIG. 8-6 shows a specific example of text display setting information. The text display setting information includes data corresponding to multiple fields, such as origin, fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, color, backgroundColor, fontStyle, textAlign, and textDecoration. The origin field can set the origin coordinates when displaying a text image. The fontFamily field allows setting of the font family, which is the font type, for the font of characters included in the text image. The fontSize field allows you to set the font size at which the text image will be displayed. The fontWeight field allows setting the thickness of characters included in the text image. The color field allows setting the display color of characters included in the text image. The backgroundColor field allows setting the display color of the background in the text image. The fontStyle field allows you to set the style of the characters in the text image, such as normal, italic, or italic. The textAlign field allows you to set the alignment of characters included in a text image, such as right alignment, center alignment, or left alignment. The textDecoration field can set decorative displays added to the text image, such as underlines, overlines, strikethroughs, and other effect images. In this way, the text display setting information allows the display mode of the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, to be set.

FIG. 8-6(A) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB01. FIG. 8-6(B) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB02. FIG. 8-6 (C1) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB03. FIG. 8-6 (C2) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB13. The text display setting information 91AKB01 is included in the text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, and 91AKT11. The text display setting information 91AKB02 is included in the text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, and 91AKT11. The text display setting information 91AKB03 is included in the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT11, but is not included in the text display process table 91AKT02. The text display setting information 91AKB13 is included in the text display process table 91AKT02, but not included in the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT11.

In the plurality of text display periods set by the text display process table, the text image specified by the text image specification information is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. can be displayed. As a result, during the display period of the text image added to the video image, it is possible to change the second component related to the display mode of the text image among the multiple components in the display of the text image according to the elapsed time. become. For example, due to the settings in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. Displayed in the specified display style and display layout. As a second text display period included in this first text display period, in the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 is set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. Displayed in display style and display layout. After the second text display period ends at timing T03, a third text display period included in the first text display period is specified by text image specification information 91AKA03 in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. The text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB03, and the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display style set by the text display setting information 91AKB13. It may be displayed in different display layouts. With such settings, only the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is displayed as text during the period from timing T01 to timing T02 and from timing T03 to timing T04 in the first text display period. It is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the setting information 91AKB01. On the other hand, in the period from timing T02 to timing T03, which is common to the second text display period, in the first text display period, the text image is added to the display of the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01. The display of the text image is changed so that the text image specified by the specification information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. On the other hand, during the period from timing T04 to timing T05, which is common to the third text display period, in the first text display period, the text image specification is added to the display of the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01. The text image specified by the information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB03, and the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed by the text display setting information 91AKB13. The display of the text image is changed so that it may be displayed in the specified display style and display layout.

In the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 is displayed in the text display setting information 91AKB02, which is different from the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. It can be displayed using the display style and display layout set by . In the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed in the text display setting information 91AKB03, which is different from the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. It may be displayed using the display style and display layout set by . Alternatively, in the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed in a text display setting different from the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. The information 91 may be displayed in the display style and display layout set by AKB13. In this way, in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, in the period common to the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is displayed as the first text display period. In addition to displaying the text image in one display mode, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02 can be displayed in a second display mode different from the first display mode. In the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, in a period common to the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is displayed in the first display mode. At the same time, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA03 may be displayed in a third display mode different from the first display mode and the second display mode. Alternatively, in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, in a period common to the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is first displayed. The text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA13 may be displayed in a fourth display mode different from the first to third display modes. Therefore, during the display period of text images added to a moving image, some text images can be displayed in a different display mode from other text images. Furthermore, after displaying the text image in the second display mode together with the text image in the first display mode, there are cases in which the text image in the second display mode is changed to a text image in the third display mode and then displayed. The display mode of the text image can be changed and displayed, as in the case where the text image of the mode is changed to the text image of the fourth display mode and displayed.

In the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A1) and the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A2), in the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, text The text image specified by the specification information 91AKA01 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. Further, during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. Thereby, a common text image can be displayed in a common display mode. On the other hand, in the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03, corresponding to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. Display. In the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13, corresponding to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. This allows different text images to be displayed in different display modes. On the other hand, in the text display process table 91AKT11, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA21 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01, corresponding to the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15. Display. Also, corresponding to the text display period from timing T11 to timing T12, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA22 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. In this case, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA21 can be displayed in the same display mode as the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01. Further, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA22 can be displayed in the same display mode as the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02. In this way, even different text images added to different moving images may be displayed in a common display mode according to setting data based on common text display setting information. Alternatively, in the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA05 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB05, corresponding to the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09. let In the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA05 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB15, corresponding to the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09. In this way, even a common text image may be displayed in different display modes depending on the text display setting information.

In the text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with multiple text display periods. In addition, in multiple text display process tables, at least some of the text image designation information and text display setting information set in association with multiple text display periods can be set as common information, and some or all of the information can be set as different information. These settings allow the first and second components related to the text image, such as the display content and display mode of the text image, to be individually changed and displayed.

In the text display setting information 91AKB01 shown in FIG. 8-6(A), the display color of the text image is set to change stepwise from #FF0040 to #4000FF using the color field. In the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A1) and the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A2), in the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, text display A text image in the display mode set by the setting information 91AKB01 is displayed. In the text display process table 91AKT11 shown in FIG. 8-4(B), a text image in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 is displayed during the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15. In these cases, when the text image in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 is displayed as a text image corresponding to the display content that is the common first component in the corresponding text display period, The display mode, which is a second component regarding the text image, such as the display color of the text image, can be changed depending on the elapsed time. Note that, for example, the display color of the text image set by the color field may be changeable depending on the reach effect content etc. even if the same text image is specified by the text image specification information. . In this case, for example, whether or not the display color of the text image is changed at different rates depending on whether the display result of the variable display is a "jackpot" or not is controlled to be in an advantageous state. may be determined, or may be determined to be one of a plurality of display colors. Furthermore, even if the same text image is specified by the text image specification information, the display color of the text image set by the color field, for example, can be changed depending on the execution result of the production control program by the CPU91AK131. It may be possible. In this case, the VDP91AK132 only needs to be able to change the display color of the text image set by the color field to a different display color based on display control commands from the CPU91AK131, register settings, and the like. In this way, the display mode such as the display style of the text image can be changed by simply changing some of the data related to the text image included in the text display process table, thereby preventing an increase in data volume and processing load. , it becomes possible to display a variety of text images. When changing the display color of a text image, other display styles may also be correspondingly changeable. For example, if the display color of the text image is white, the display of the text image will be easier for the player to visually recognize, and if the display color of the text image is red, the display of the text image will be difficult for the player to recognize. Tend. Therefore, when the display color of the text image is changed to red, the text image set by the fontSize field is displayed so that the font size is larger than when the display color of the text image is white. The size may be changed. As a specific example, a text image that is displayed with a font size of 10.5px when the display color is white will be displayed with a font size of 11px when the display color is changed to red. It would be good if it could be changed so that This makes it possible to display a text image that is easy for the player to visually recognize while suppressing the player's discomfort when displaying the text image.

FIG. 8-7 shows an example of performing an effect in which a text image is displayed using a text display process table. In this execution example, text images are displayed in accordance with a plurality of text display periods along with the moving image display when the SP reach A reach effect is executed. In the reach effect of SP Reach A, a moving image is displayed using moving image data 91AKD01 when the display result of the variable display is a "jackpot", and a moving image is displayed using the moving image data 91AKD01 when the display result of the variable display is a "loss". A moving image is displayed using the data 91AKD11. In the moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD01 and the moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD11, an effect display that is a battle effect in which a common ally character and an enemy character compete is performed, and for example, the battle result is displayed. It is sufficient that the contents of the effect display be the same until the timing of notification. In addition, when the display result of the variable display is a "jackpot", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 becomes high, and when the display result of the variable display is a "loss", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01. becomes higher. Therefore, in the reach effect of SP Reach A, even in the video display period which is the common effect display content, the jackpot expectation level can be varied depending on the display content of the text image according to the text display process table. Can be done.

The effect execution example 91AKD11 shown in FIG. 8-7(A) is the effect content common to the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02, and the text image designation information 91AKA01 corresponds to the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. The text image specified by is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. In this case, the text image indicating the reach name "SP reach A" specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 has the origin coordinates (300,30), for example, as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. The font family is AA_gothic, which is a Gothic typeface, the font size is 48px, the bold line width corresponds to the bold character thickness, and the text image display color changes gradually from #FF0040 to #4000FF. The components in the display of the text image are controlled so that the background display color is #CCF0F0, the character style is italic or italic corresponding to italic, the character arrangement is centered, and the character decoration is not set. In the performance control microprocessor 91AK100, the text image renderer 91AK146 of the VDP91AK132 executes image conversion processing to display the text image in the display mode including the display style and display layout specified by the text display specification information. good.

Further, in the production execution example 91AKD11 shown in FIG. 8-7(A), the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 is changed to the text display setting information 91AKB02 corresponding to the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03. It is displayed in the display mode set by . In this case, the text image indicating the line "If this character wins..." specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 has the origin coordinates (250,600 ), the font family is BB_mincho, which is classified as a Mincho font, the font size is 36px, the normal line width corresponds to normal character thickness, the text image display color is #FFFFFF, and the background display color is #220C0C. , the components in the display of the text image are controlled so that the character style is normal, the character arrangement is left justified, and the character decoration is not set.

The production execution example 91AKD21 shown in FIG. 8-7 (B1) includes production contents different from the text display process table 91AKT02 when the text display process table 91AKT01 is used, and is displayed in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. Correspondingly, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03. In this case, the text image indicating the line "Chance!!" specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 has, for example, the origin coordinates (250,600) and the font family as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03. CC_gothic typeface classified as Gothic, font size is 60px, normal line width corresponding to normal character thickness, text image display color is #000000, background display color is #FFFFFF, character style is normal Components in the text image are controlled so that the corresponding regular font, character arrangement is centered, and character decoration is not set. This text image has the same origin coordinates and character decoration as the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02, font family, font size, font thickness, text image display color, and background display. Colors, text styles, and text alignment have changed. In this way, when displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information, it may be possible to change and display part of the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information. .

The production execution example 91AKD22 shown in FIG. 8-7 (B2) includes production contents different from the text display process table 91AKT01 when the text display process table 91AKT02 is used, and is executed during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. Correspondingly, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13. In this case, the text image indicating the line "Super hot" specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 has the origin coordinates (250,600) and the font family DD_mincho as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13. The font size is 72px, the bold line width corresponds to bold, the text image display color is gold, corresponding to "gold", the background display color is #000000, The constituent elements in the text image are controlled so that the character style is normal, the character arrangement is centered, and the character decoration is effect_gold, which is the effect display setting for gold display. Compared to the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02, this text image has only the origin coordinates in common, font family, font size, character thickness, text image display color, background display color, Text style, text placement, and text decoration have been changed. In this way, when displaying a text image specified by text image specification information, among the data corresponding to multiple fields included in the text display setting information, data to be changed and data not to be changed can be individually set. It may be possible. When this text image is compared with the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01, all settings including the origin coordinates have been changed. In this manner, when displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information, it may be possible to change and display all of the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information. When displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information, if you want to change and display one data among the data corresponding to multiple fields included in the text display setting information, the first data and Other data associated in advance may also be changed and displayed. For example, when changing the display color of a text image to gold corresponding to "gold" and displaying it, it is only necessary to change the text decoration to the effect display setting for gold display using effect_gold.

The display color and background display color of the text image are for each display color of R (red), G (green), and B (blue), for example, when the brightness (gradation) is between "0" and "255". The level can be set in 256 steps. In text display setting information, the field data that makes up the color field and backgroundColor field has a common data format with the field data that makes up the color field and backgroundColor field, for example, in character display setting information used to display character images. All you have to do is stay there. Further, the coordinates of the origin when displaying a text image can be set by a combination of the x-coordinate in the horizontal direction and the y-coordinate in the vertical direction on the screen of the image display device 5. In the text display setting information, the field data forming the origin field may have a common data format with the field data forming the origin field in the character display setting information, for example. In this way, some or all of the field data included in the text display setting information can be shared with field data included in the setting information used to display a production image different from a text image, such as character display setting information. It may have a format. With such text display setting information, it is only necessary that the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, can be changed using information common to a production image different from the text image. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load of changing the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image.

Font families that can be set when displaying text images are not set when displaying character images. In the text display setting information, the field data forming the fontFamily field may be unique field data that is not included in the character display setting information. Furthermore, instead of the font size that can be set when displaying a text image, it is sufficient if the character size can be set when displaying a character image. In the text display setting information, the field data forming the fontSize field corresponds to the field data forming the characterSize field in the character display setting information, but may have a unique field format. In this way, some or all of the field data included in the text display setting information may be different from the field data included in the setting information used to display a production image different from a text image, such as character display setting information. It may have a data format. With such text display setting information, it is possible to change the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, using unique information that is not used in a production image different from the text image. Good too. Thereby, a variety of text images can be displayed by flexibly changing the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image.

For example, if a gold color corresponding to "gold" is set as the display color of the text image, the text decoration becomes the effect display setting for gold display using effect_gold. In the text display setting information, if "gold" is set in the color field, effect_gold is set in the textDecoration field to display a glossy text image and to display gold around the text image. It is possible to add and display a special effect image. In the production execution example 91AKD22 shown in FIG. 8-7 (B2), when the text image specification information 91A13 specifies a specific text image indicating the line "Super hot", the text display setting information 91AKB13 allows for gold display. By setting the display style, etc., a specific text image showing the line "Super hot" is displayed with gloss, and an effect image for golden display is displayed around the specific text image. . This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the text image display and improve the interest of the performance by displaying the text image.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when an effect is executed by displaying a moving image using moving image data, by adding an effect by displaying a text image using text image data, it is easier for the player to recognize the content of the effect. This makes it easier to provide information that is different from the content of the performance. In this case, if the data structure is such that text image data is compressed and encoded and multiplexed as video data included in the video data, the outline of the text image will be Problems such as blurring and deterioration of display quality may occur. Furthermore, if different video image data is prepared depending on the display content of the text image display added to the video image display, the data capacity of the video data tends to increase, and the processing load of the image data also increases. It becomes easier. If special compression encoding processing or decompression decoding processing is performed in order to prevent deterioration of display quality in text image display, there is a risk that the processing load of image data will further increase.

The characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK add a text image display effect using text image data read from the storage area 91AKM13 when a moving image display effect using the moving image data read from the storage area 91AKM11 is executed. By doing so, it becomes possible to display various text images easily and with high quality, and it becomes easier for the player to recognize the content of the performance. In addition, since text image display effects are added using text image data stored separately from the video data, it is possible to avoid an increase in the data capacity of the video data and an increase in the processing load of the image data. , it becomes possible to appropriately control the display so as to prevent it as much as possible.

A text image display added to a moving image display using moving image data is controlled using a text display process table. Similarly, moving image display is controlled using a moving image display process table, character image display is controlled using a character display process table, and audio output is controlled using audio output process data. In the text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with each other for a plurality of text display periods. The text image designation information, as a first component regarding the text image, designates the display content of the text image according to the text image data. The text display setting information sets the display mode of the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, as a second component related to the text image. In the VDP91AK132 of the production control microprocessor 91AK100, for example, the text image renderer 91AK146 displays the text image specified by the text image specification information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. It is possible to perform image conversion processing, etc. As a result, during the display period of the text image added to one video image, the display content of the text image as the first component and the display mode of the text image as the second component can be changed depending on the elapsed time, etc. Make it changeable. By making it possible to change the first and second components related to the text image added to the first video image, various text image displays can be easily executed with high quality, and data capacity and processing burden can be reduced. Appropriate display control becomes possible so that the increase is prevented.

When the reach effect content is "SP reach A (jackpot)", when the effect by displaying a moving image using the moving image data 91AKD01 is executed, either the text display process table 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 is used. It can be displayed with a text image added. If the reach effect content is "SP reach A (lose)", when the effect by displaying a moving image using the moving image data 91AKD11 is executed, either the text display process table 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 is used. It can be displayed with a text image added. In addition, when the reach effect content is "SP reach B (jackpot)", when the effect by displaying a moving image using the moving image data 91AKD02 is executed, either the text display process table 91AKT11 or 91AKT12 is displayed. It is possible to add and display the used text image. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (lose)", when the effect by displaying a moving image using the moving image data 91AKD12 is executed, either the text display process table 91AKT11 or 91AKT12 is used. It can be displayed with a text image added. In this way, a text image using data related to a common text image, such as a common text display process table, can be added to and displayed on a plurality of mutually different moving images. By making it possible to add and display text images using common data to multiple video images, it is possible to display a variety of text images easily and with high quality, while also preventing increases in data volume and processing load. This makes it possible to control the display appropriately.

In the text display process table 91AKT02, a plurality of text images showing the line "It's super hot" are displayed based on the text image designation information 91AKA13 and the text display setting information 91AKB13 that are set in association with the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. The display style and the like may be displayed in a changeable manner at the timing of . A text image that shows the line "Super hot" is a text image that corresponds to a specific first component group, such as a text image that is a display content that suggests that the display result of the variable display has a high probability of becoming a "jackpot". It only needs to be a text image. In this way, when displaying a specific text image corresponding to a specific first component group, the second component, such as the display mode regarding the specific text image, may be changeable at multiple timings.

FIG. 8-8 shows an example of display control in a case where the display style of a text image indicating the line "Super hot" can be changed at a plurality of timings. In this display control example, in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the display color is black and no text decoration is set during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T041, and the text display period from timing T041 to timing T042 is During the display period, the display color is gold and no text decoration is set, and during the text display period from timing T042 to timing T05, the display color is gold and the effect display setting is such that the text decoration is gold. Note that the text image display style common to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05 is a font whose font family is DD_mincho, which is classified as a Mincho font by the fontFamily field, and a font size of 72px by the fontSize field, respectively. It is set.

FIG. 8-8(A) shows a case where a text image with the line "Gekiatsu" is displayed during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T041. As the display style of the text image during this text display period, the color field sets the display color of the text image to black, which corresponds to #000000, and the textDecoration field sets the text decoration to no setting, which corresponds to none. As a result, the display mode, including the display style, of the text image showing the line "Super Hot" is controlled so that the display color is black and no text decoration is set.

FIG. 8-8(B) shows a case where a text image with the line "Gekiatsu" is displayed during the text display period from timing T041 to timing T042. As the display style of the text image during this text display period, the color field sets the display color of the text image to gold corresponding to "gold", and the textDecoration field sets the text decoration to no setting corresponding to none. As a result, the display mode, including the display style, of the text image showing the line "Super Hot" is controlled so that the display color is gold and the text decoration is not set. When the display color of the text image is set to gold, a glossy text image can be displayed, for example, by displaying a gradation of the text image. However, if the text image display is only glossy, it may be difficult for the player to recognize the golden display.

FIG. 8-8(C) shows a case where a text image with the line "Gekiatsu" is displayed during the text display period from timing T042 to timing T05. As the display style of the text image during this text display period, the color field sets the display color of the text image to gold corresponding to "gold", and the textDecoration field sets the text decoration to effect display settings for gold display corresponding to effect_gold. be done. As a result, the display mode, including the display style, of the text image showing the line "Super Hot" is controlled so that the display color is gold and the text decoration is set to effect display settings in gold. In addition to setting the display color of a text image to gold, if the character decoration of the text image is set to display an effect for gold display, in addition to the gradation display of the text image, for example, the border of the outline of the text image Effect images can be added and displayed around text images using display colors such as shading and shading, border display using bevels and embossing, layer styles that add glow, and combinations of some or all of these. As a result, in addition to giving the text image a glossy appearance, by adding and displaying an effect image around the text image, it becomes easier for players to recognize the golden display, and the game It can improve the impression of people.

In the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02, one part of the text image is distinguished from the other part by the text image designation information 91AKA02 and the text display setting information 91AKB02 that are set in association with the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03. It may be displayed in different display styles. The text image designation information 91AKA02 designates a text image with the line "If this character wins...". The text display setting information 91AKB02 sets a part of the text image called "Character" out of the text information indicating the line "If this character wins..." to display the display color and background of the text image differently from the other parts. All you have to do is set the color and font style.

FIGS. 8-9 show an example of a display in which a portion of a text image has a display style different from that of other portions. In this display example, a part of the text image "Character" is displayed with a white display color, a black background display color, and an italic text style, and the other part of the text image is displayed with a black display color. Display the background display color as white and the text style as normal. The text display setting information 91 AKB02 corresponds to a part of the text image called "Character", and the color field sets the display color of the text image to white corresponding to #FFFFFF, the backgroundColor field sets the background display color to black corresponding to #000000, Set the italics corresponding to the italic character style using the fontStyle field. In addition, the text display setting information 91AKB02 corresponds to other parts of the text image, with the color field setting the display color of the text image to black corresponding to #000000, the background display color to white corresponding to #FFFFFF, and the fontStyle field setting the display color of the text image to black corresponding to #000000, and the background display color to white corresponding to #FFFFFF. Set the normal font corresponding to the character style normal. Thereby, by displaying a portion of the text image in a display style different from that of other portions, it is possible to enhance the player's impression of the display of the text image.

In displaying a text image constituting a character string that is a combination of a plurality of character images, a portion that is displayed in a display style different from other portions may be changeable in accordance with the progress of the presentation by displaying the moving image. For example, when the performance of a song or the audio playback of dialogue progresses as a video image is displayed, a part of the text image that corresponds to the progress status is displayed in a display style that is different from other parts, such as display in a specific color or highlight display. You may let them. The display style may be changeable so that a portion of the text image is displayed as fade-in or fade-out in accordance with the progress of the performance of the music or the audio reproduction of the lines. This is not limited to the situation in which a song is played along with a video image or the audio of a line is being played, but a part of the text image that is displayed in a different display style from the other parts can be changed depending on the elapsed time in the execution of a given performance. It may be possible. Thereby, in displaying the text image, a portion displayed in a display style different from other portions is changed in accordance with the progress of the performance, thereby making it possible to enhance the player's impression of the display of the text image.

This invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 does not need to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiments, but it is possible to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may also include a part of the configuration.

As a specific example, during the display period of a text image added to one moving image, the display content of the text image that is the first component and the display mode of the text image that is the second component are changed depending on the elapsed time, etc. Execute either one of the following: display control that allows changes to be made depending on the content of the video, or display control that allows text images to be added and displayed using common text image data for multiple video images. It is also possible to do one without executing the other. The first component and the second component related to the text image may be arbitrary components that can be changed, for example, regarding the display content and display mode of the text image. In place of or in addition to part or all of the display content and display mode of the text image, it is possible to change any component related to the display of the text image. It's okay. For example, when moving and displaying a text image, the time interval and movement width for updating the display position, the enlargement and reduction ratios when displaying enlarged or reduced text images, and the enlargement and reduction ratios depending on the elapsed time. Any configuration element that can be set regarding the display of a text image may be changed as long as it is possible to change any component that can be set regarding the display of a text image, such as the time interval or amount of change for updating the enlargement ratio or reduction ratio when changing the enlargement ratio or reduction ratio.

When displaying text images corresponding to common display content, the display mode of the text images can be changed by changing the text image settings set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 shown in Figure 8-6(A). The present invention is not limited to changing the display color, but may be any display mode that can be changed such as an arbitrary display style or display layout. For example, a text image in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 may have origin coordinates, font family, etc. instead of or in addition to the display color of the text image during the corresponding text display period. Any display mode such as font size, character thickness, background display color, character style, character arrangement, decorative display, or a combination of some or all of these may be changed. A text image in a display mode set by text display setting information different from the text display setting information 91AKB01 may be able to change a display mode different from the text image in a display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. .

The text image data is not limited to being stored in memory area 91AKM13 as data separate from the video data, and at least a portion of the text image data may be included in the video data. For example, text image data for displaying highly designed characters, such as cursive or cursive writing, may be multiplexed or compression-encoded as part of the video data, and a text image of a specific form may be displayed by decompressing and decoding video data separated from the video data. In this case, data relating to the text image of a specific form is included in the video data and stored in memory area 91AKM11. In this way, data relating to the text image may include specific text image related data included in the video data and stored in memory area 91AKM11, and normal text image related data stored in memory area 91AKM13.

The text display setting information included in the text display process table consists of field data corresponding to part of origin, fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, color, backgroundColor, fontStyle, textAlign, and textDecoration as data corresponding to multiple fields. It may also be configured to include field data different from these. For example, when specifying the storage address, readout address, data size, etc. of text image data in the storage area 91AKM13 using text image specification information, the text image data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 is read out without using font data. , the corresponding text image can be displayed. In this case, the text display setting information does not require field data related to font settings, so it may be configured without including field data related to font settings, such as fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, and fontStyle. On the other hand, in this case, in order to set the display size of the text image, the text display setting information may be configured to include separate field data regarding the text display setting, such as textSize.

The scalable font data such as outline font data and vector font data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 may be prepared only with data corresponding to text images used in display effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or with, for example, general-purpose Japanese font data. Data corresponding to text images, such as word font data, which is not limited to text images used in display effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1, may be prepared. If only the font data corresponding to the text image used in the display effect is stored in the storage area 91AKM13, an increase in data capacity can be prevented when the text image used in the display effect is small. If general-purpose font data corresponding to text images, not limited to those used in display effects, is stored in the storage area 91AKM13, the font data can be easily reused, so it is easier to design effects for displaying text images. The burden can be reduced, and when a large amount of text images are used in display effects, an increase in data capacity can be prevented.

As a second component related to a text image, a specific text image whose display mode including the display style and display layout of the text image can be changed at multiple timings is not limited to a text image showing the line "Super hot". , any text image that is preset as a specific text image corresponding to a specific first component group may be used. For example, among the plurality of types of text images, a text image prepared in advance for displaying lyrics of a song or a text image prepared in advance for displaying subtitles of a moving image may be used as the specific text image. In this way, for a specific text image that corresponds to an audio production or a display production whose content changes depending on the elapsed time, such as the playback output of a song or the playback display of a moving image, the second component such as the display mode can be set in multiple ways. It may be possible to change the timing. Alternatively, a text image for which a specific display mode is set, such as a text image for rainbow display where the display color of the text image is rainbow colors, or a text image for motif display where the pattern or character decoration of the text image is a cherry blossom pattern. may be used as a specific text image. Alternatively, it is not limited to a text image of display content that suggests that the display result of the variable display has a high probability of being a "jackpot", but a text image of display content that suggests that the probability of being controlled to an arbitrary advantageous state is high. may be used as a specific text image. The advantageous state is not limited to a jackpot gaming state, but may include special gaming states such as a time saving state and a variable probability state. In addition, the upper limit of the number of round games that can be executed in the jackpot game state is the first round number (for example, "15") which is greater than the second round number (for example, "7"), and that it can be performed in the time-saving state. The upper limit number of times of variable display is the first number (e.g., "100") that is higher than the second number (e.g., "50"), and the jackpot probability in the probability variable state is higher than the second probability (e.g., 1/50). 1 probability (for example, 1/20), and the number of consecutive chances, which is the number of times the jackpot gaming state is repeatedly controlled without being controlled to the normal state, is greater than the second consecutive number of chances (for example, "5"). It may also include a part or all of the number of consecutive wins (for example, "10") resulting in a more advantageous gaming situation for the player.

A glossy text image is not limited to the case where the display color of the text image is set to gold, which corresponds to "gold"; for example, it may be silver, copper, other metallic colors, or any other color different from metallic colors. This may include a case where the display color is set. The present invention is not limited to the display color of the text image, and when displaying a preset specific text image, the specific text image may be displayed in a glossy display mode. When displaying an arbitrary text image with glossiness, settings should be made using the textDecoration field in the text display setting information so that an effect image can be added and displayed around the text image. Bye.

When displaying a text image as a rainbow, a plurality of display colors may be sequentially changed and displayed within a predetermined range such as intra-character coordinates or display time when displaying the text image. For example, if the display color of a text image is set to a rainbow color corresponding to "rainbow" by the color field in the text display setting information, the display color can be changed to a different display color for each character coordinate of the text image. , it would be good if rainbow display were possible. For example, for the coordinates in the character 1, depending on the elapsed time, the display color changes from red, then orange to yellow, then green, then light blue, then blue, and then from bluish-purple to reddish-purple. You can change multiple display colors one after another. At this time, the brightness corresponding to each display color in the rainbow display is adjusted and each The display color of the coordinates within the text may be changed in the following order: red, orange, yellow, green, water, blue, blue-violet, and red-violet. After red-purple, you can change the display color again by returning to red. This allows the player to smoothly and clearly recognize the change in display color. In this way, when a special element is set as a character image component, such as when the display color of a text image is set to a rainbow color corresponding to "rainbow" using the color field in the text display setting information, the text display process Even if it is possible to display a text image in which multiple display colors are sequentially changed within the range of character coordinates and display time of the text image specified by the text image specification information corresponding to the text display period included in the table. good. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the text image display and improve the interest of the performance by displaying the text image. Note that by sequentially changing different display colors according to the intra-character coordinates of the text image, the entire text image may be displayed in a rainbow manner. Alternatively, by sequentially changing a common display color for all intra-character coordinates, the display of the text image may be changed to a rainbow display according to the elapsed time. In this way, a text image may be displayed in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed within a predetermined range of either the intra-character coordinates or the display time.

The first component and the second component related to the text image may be changeable to different components depending on whether or not a specific movement of the player is detected, or multiple components may be changed at different rates. It may be possible to change either one. The specific actions of the player that enable the first component and the second component related to the text image to be changed include, for example, a push operation or a pull operation on the operation stick of the stick controller 31A, which is the V controller, and other operations such as a push operation or a pull operation on the operation stick of the stick controller 31A. It may be an arbitrary action of tilting the button 31b, or it may be an action of pressing down the push button 31b. The player's movements are not limited to those that can be detected, but are based on the detection results of any changes or differences in the detection target, such as the execution state of processing or control on the detection target, or changes in the shape, pattern, or color of the detection target. In addition, the first component and the second component related to the text image may be changeable. Detection devices capable of detecting movements, changes, differences, etc. in a detection target, such as infrared sensors, ultrasonic sensors, CCD sensors, and CMOS sensors, can detect the state of the detection target mechanically, electrically, electromagnetically, Any configuration that can be detected may be used. Alternatively, the state of the detection target may be detected by analyzing the result of photographing the detection target using a predetermined camera (video motion capture). As an example of detecting the state of a detection target using a camera, the screen display state of a mobile terminal may be detected, and the display content and display mode of the text image may be changed based on the detection result.

A part or all of the effect by displaying a text image using text image data may be executed as a setting suggestion effect capable of suggesting setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the reach performance content is "SP reach A (jackpot)", the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 may be determined at different ratios depending on the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In such a case, the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 35/100 (=35%) if the setting value is 1, and 30/100 (=30%) if the setting value is 2. Yes, if the setting value is 3, it is 25/100 (=25%), if the setting value is 4, it is 20/100 (=20%), and if the setting value is 5, it is 15/100 (= 15%), and if the setting value is 6, it may be set to 10/100 (=10%). Correspondingly, the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 65/100 (=65%) if the setting value is 1, and 70/100 (=70%) if the setting value is 2. Yes, if the setting value is 3, it is 75/100 (=75%), if the setting value is 4, it is 80/100 (=80%), and if the setting value is 5, it is 85/100 (= 85%), and if the setting value is 6, it may be set to 90/100 (=90%). According to these determination ratio settings, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (jackpot)", the rate at which the effect by text image display according to either text display process pattern 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 is executed. is made different depending on the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, when the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, it is easy to perform an effect by displaying a text image according to the text display process table 91AKT01, and as the setting value increases, the text according to the text display process table 91AKT02 is easily executed. The ratio of performance based on image display increases. Therefore, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (jackpot)" and the effect by text image display according to the text display process table 91AKT02 is executed, the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is advantageous to the player. The expectation level, which is a set value, increases.

In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, in the case of a specific setting value, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than in the case of a setting value other than the specific setting value. In this case, a limit is set such that in a range where the setting value is other than the specific setting value, the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in a range where the setting value is the specific setting value. A setting suggestion effect may be provided that can be executed at a predetermined rate when the setting value is a specific setting value, but is not executed when the setting value is other than the specific setting value. In this way, within a range where the setting value is a specific setting value, setting suggestion effects can be executed at a predetermined rate. On the other hand, in a range where the setting value is other than the specific setting value, a limit is set in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

It may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on whether or not it is a special period. For example, in the case of a special period, setting suggestion performance may be made executable at a higher rate than in a period other than the special period. In this case, a limit is set such that in a range that is a period other than the special period, the execution rate of the setting suggestion performance is lower than in a range that is a special period. A setting suggestion effect may be provided that can be executed at a predetermined rate during a special period, but is not executed during a period other than the special period. In this way, within the special period, setting suggestion effects can be executed at a predetermined rate. On the other hand, a limit is set in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed within a period other than the special period.

The present invention is not limited to whether or not it is a special period, and it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on whether or not an arbitrary special condition is satisfied. For example, when the special condition is met, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the special condition is not met. In this case, a limit is set in which the execution rate of the setting suggestion performance is lower in a range where the special condition is not met than in a range where the special condition is met. A setting suggestion effect may be provided that becomes executable at a predetermined rate when a special condition is met, but is not executed when the special condition is not met. In this way, within the range where the special condition is satisfied, setting suggestion effects can be executed at a predetermined rate. On the other hand, a limit is set in which the setting suggestion performance is not executed in a range where the special condition is not satisfied. The special condition may be any condition that can be established depending on the progress or history of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the result of the judgment or decision of the game, or the progress or history of the performance or the performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be any condition that can be established depending on the judgment or decision. Not limited to setting suggestion effects, any effect may be one that can be executed at different rates depending on whether or not a preset condition is met, or whether such a condition is met or not. The production mode may be determined at different rates depending on whether such conditions are met, or the execution timing may be determined at different rates depending on whether such conditions are satisfied. . In addition, a restriction may be set for an arbitrary performance such that a specific performance is not executed within a range where a preset restriction condition is met, or compared to a range where the restriction condition is not satisfied. A limit may be set such that the execution rate decreases and it is difficult to execute.

(Problem solving means and effects of characteristic part 91AK)
A gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine 1, which is capable of executing a game, and is capable of executing a specific effect of displaying a moving image to which a character image is added, such as a reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B, for example. For example, a performance execution means such as a microprocessor 91AK100 for performance control, a first storage area such as a storage area 91AKM11 that stores data related to moving images, and a second storage area such as a storage area 91AKM13 that stores data related to character images. A moving image control means, such as a video decoder 91AK143 or a moving image renderer 91AK144, which controls the display of a moving image using the data stored in the first storage area, and a moving image control means, such as a video decoder 91AK143 or a moving image renderer 91AK144, which controls the display of a character image using the data stored in the second storage area. It includes a character image control means such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a text image renderer 91AK146 for controlling display, and the data stored in the second storage area is a first component such as a text image specified by text image designation information. and a second component such as a display style set by text display setting information. During the display period, the first component and the second component can be changed, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-7. This makes it possible to display various character images easily and with high quality, and to appropriately control the display so as to prevent an increase in data volume and processing load.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-8, the character image control means is capable of changing the second component related to the character image when displaying the character image corresponding to the common first component during the display period. Good too. This enables appropriate display control so that a variety of character image displays can be performed.

The character image control means changes the second component related to the character image, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-6, using information common to a specific image different from the character image, such as field data configuring the color field. It may be possible. This enables appropriate display control to reduce the processing load.

The character image control means is capable of displaying a specific character image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image indicating "super hot", for example, as shown in FIG. The second component may be changeable at multiple timings. This enables appropriate display control so that a variety of character image displays can be performed.

The character image control means may be able to individually change and display the first component and the second component regarding the character image, as shown in FIG. 8-4, for example. This enables appropriate display control so that a variety of character image displays can be performed.

The data stored in the second storage area may include outline data that can be used to display character images, such as outline font data. This makes it possible to display various character images easily and with high quality, and to appropriately control display so as to prevent an increase in data volume and processing load.

When a specific element is set as a character image component, such as when the color field is "gold", for example, as shown in Figure 8-8, a glossy character image is displayed and the character image is It may also be possible to display an effect image added to the surrounding area. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the performance by the character image display.

When a special element is set as a character image component, for example when the color field is "rainbow", for example red, orange, yellow, green, It may be possible to display a character image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed, such as water, blue, bluish-purple, and red-purple in this order. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the performance by the character image display.

(Means for solving the problem and effects of characteristic part 92AK)
A gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine 1, capable of executing a game, comprising: a performance execution means, such as a performance control microprocessor 91AK100, capable of executing a specific performance that displays a moving image to which a text image is added, such as a reach performance of SP Reach A or SP Reach B; a first memory area, such as a memory area 91AKM11, for storing data relating to the moving image; a second memory area, such as a memory area 91AKM13, for storing data relating to the text image; a video control means, such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a video renderer 91AK144, for controlling the display of the moving image using the stored data of the first memory area; and a video decoder 91AK143 for controlling the display of the text image using the stored data of the second memory area. and a character image control means such as a text image renderer 91AK146, the storage data in the second storage area includes data on a plurality of character image components including a first component such as a text image designated by text image designation information and a second component such as a display style set by text display setting information, and the character image control means can add character images using data on common character images, such as text images according to text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02, to a first moving image such as a moving image using moving image data 91AKD01 and a second moving image different from the first moving image such as a moving image using moving image data 91AKD11, for example. This allows a variety of character image displays to be easily and with high quality, and enables appropriate display control to prevent increases in data capacity and processing load.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-8, the character image control means controls the character image when displaying the character image corresponding to the common first component during the display period of the character image added to one moving image. The second component may be changeable. This enables appropriate display control so that a variety of character image displays can be performed.

The character image control means changes the second component related to the character image, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-6, using information common to a specific image different from the character image, such as field data configuring the color field. It may be possible. This enables appropriate display control to reduce the processing load.

The character image control means is capable of displaying a specific character image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image indicating "super hot", for example, as shown in FIG. The second component may be changeable at multiple timings. This enables appropriate display control so that a variety of character image displays can be performed.

The character image control means may be able to individually change and display the first component and the second component regarding the character image, as shown in FIG. 8-4, for example. This enables appropriate display control so that a variety of character image displays can be performed.

The data stored in the second storage area may include outline data that can be used to display character images, such as outline font data. This makes it possible to display various character images easily and with high quality, and to appropriately control display so as to prevent an increase in data volume and processing load.

When a specific element is set as a character image component, for example, when the color field is "gold", a glossy character image is displayed as shown in Figure 8-8. It may also be possible to add an effect image to the surrounding area and display it. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the performance by the character image display.

When a special element, such as when the color field is set to "rainbow," is set as a character image component, it may be possible to display a character image in which multiple display colors are changed sequentially, for example, from red, orange, yellow, green, light blue, blue-purple, to red-purple, within a predetermined range, such as the range of intra-character coordinates or display time. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and increase the interest of the presentation produced by the character image display.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic parts)
The configuration regarding the characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK may be combined with part or all of the configuration regarding the characteristic part 60AK as appropriate. For example, an operation effect to be executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed can be executed as a setting suggestion effect, which is an operation effect in a suggestion effect mode, and in a display period of a character image added to one moving image, the first component and the second component may be changeable, or a character image using data regarding a common character image may be created for the first video image and a second video image different from the first video image. It may be possible to add and display it.

(Explanation regarding characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK)
9-1 shows a configuration example 01AKP0 of the screen display in the image display device 5 with respect to the characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. In the configuration example 01AKP0, an active display area 01AKA1, a first reserved display area 01AKB1, a second reserved display area 01AKB2, and a small symbol display area 01AKC1 are provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

In the active display area 01AKA1, active display is performed by displaying an effect image corresponding to the variable display being executed. In the first pending display area 01AKB1, a pending display is performed in accordance with the first pending storage number by displaying an effect image corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending. In the second pending display area 01AKB2, a pending display is performed in accordance with the second pending storage number by displaying an effect image corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending. In this way, in the active display area 01AKA1, the first pending display area 01AKB1, and the second pending display area 01AKB2, active display and pending display, which are specific displays, are possible based on information regarding variable display. The hold display in the first hold display area 01AKB1 is also referred to as a "first hold display," and the hold display in the second hold display area 01AKB2 is also referred to as a "second hold display."

For example, the first hold display area 01AKB1 can display holds that are associated with hold numbers "1", "2", "3", and "4" in order from the right end, and the first hold display is aligned to the right. It is only necessary that the display area is configured so that it can be performed. In the second hold display area 01AKB2, for example, hold displays can be displayed that are associated with hold numbers "1", "2", "3", and "4" in order from the left end, and the second hold display is aligned to the left. It is only necessary that the display area is configured so that it can be performed. In the active display area 01AKA1, an active display corresponding to the first pending display that was erased (digested) in the first pending display area 01AKB1 in response to the start of the first special figure game is started, and the second special figure game is started. In response to the start, an active display is started in accordance with the second pending display that was erased (expired) in the second pending display area 01AKB2. The active display that can be displayed in the active display area 01AKA1 may be one that has the same color and pattern as the first pending display and the second pending display.For example, the active display may be common to the first pending display and the second pending display. The effect image may be displayed larger than each pending display. The display mode of the active display may change to a display mode different from that of the first pending display or the second pending display by executing the active display change effect. Further, in the active display area 01AKA1, for example, an effect image showing a pedestal may be displayed below the active display, so that the active display can be distinguished from the first hold display and the second hold display.

A small symbol display area 01AKC1 is arranged at a predetermined position on the screen of the image display device 5. The small symbol display area 01AKC1 is smaller than the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and is provided at a predetermined position such as the right end of the screen of the image display device 5, for example. ing. In the small symbol display area 01AKC1, variable display of small symbols is performed in response to variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. The performance image showing the small design is smaller than the identification information image which is the performance image showing the decorative design, and can be displayed variably in a manner that is partially or completely common to each of the identification information images showing the decorative design. Any reduced identification information image may be used. For example, when the identification information image showing a decorative pattern includes a part showing a number and a part showing a character, the production image showing a small pattern corresponds to the same pattern number as the part showing the number included in the decorative pattern. Since it is an image showing the numbers given and does not include a part showing a character, it is sufficient if the small pattern can be displayed in a simpler manner than the effect image showing the decorative pattern. In the small symbol display area 01AKC1, by displaying the small symbols in a simple manner, it is sufficient to prevent the player from misrecognizing the display contents and display results of the small symbols. In the small symbol display area 01AKC1 provided on the screen of the image display device 5, variable display of small symbols serving as reduced identification information is performed, and a determined small symbol serving as a display result is derived. The effect image showing the small pattern may be displayed at a position where it can be visually recognized at all times.

FIG. 9-2 shows a configuration example of an effect drawing command. In this embodiment, commands 01AKG01 to 01AKG06 are prepared in advance as a plurality of effect drawing commands. Command 01AKG01 is a drawing command that commands color blending for blurring using bilinear sampling. Command 01AKG02 is a drawing command that instructs color blending to invert color information. Command 01AKG03 is a drawing command that commands color blending for blurring by changing magnification. Command 01AKG04 is a drawing command that commands color blending for monochrome conversion. Command 01AKG05 is a drawing command that commands color blending for blurring by rotation. Command 01AKG06 is a drawing command that instructs to change the offset amount of the image position.

The effect drawing command may be prepared as one drawing command or may be prepared as a display list. The display list is a group of commands for controlling drawing, and can be created by the CPU 91AK131 as a command string that is a combination of a plurality of commands for the VDP91AK132. The VDP91AK132 can execute drawing processing in the order of description in the display list. The effect drawing command may be composed of a combination of commands for setting a plurality of types of inter-pixel calculations. For example, a drawing command that commands color blending may function as a drawing command for each effect by setting parameters according to the effect to be applied. For example, the internal registers of the VDP91AK132 store control data that specifies calculation targets included in the display list, numerical data that specifies parameters, and other register values, and by storing register values according to execution commands, Drawing according to the display list starts.

When performing color blending for blurring using bilinear sampling in response to command 01AKG01, a reduced image is generated by texture mapping using bilinear interpolation on image data, for example. When generating this reduced image, a plurality of reduced images with different sampling point groups may be generated. Using the plurality of reduced images thus generated, a combined reduced image is generated by performing a color blending process such as alpha blending. Thereafter, by executing an enlargement process on the combined reduced image, it is possible to draw an image generated by changing the color information included in the image data so that the image is blurred.

When executing a color blend that inverts color information in response to command 01AKG02, for example, the maximum value (for example, 255) and the RGB value, which is the color information of each pixel (1 pixel) shown in the image data, are set. Execute the difference calculation process. For example, if the R value corresponding to "red" is "80", the color information can be inverted by obtaining 255-80=175. By executing the same difference calculation process for the G value corresponding to "green" and the B value corresponding to "blue", the color information contained in the image data is The generated image can be drawn by changing the .

When executing color blending for blurring by changing magnification in response to command 01AKG03, for example, a plurality of enlarged or reduced images are generated by scaling processing on image data. At this time, a plurality of enlarged images or reduced images having different magnifications such as image enlargement and reduction ratios are generated. For example, for an image with a display magnification of 100%, two types of enlarged images are generated, such as an image with a display magnification of 102% and an image with a display magnification of 104%. Using the multiple enlarged or reduced images generated in this way and the image corresponding to the original image data (original image), a color blending process such as alpha blending is performed to perform a blurring process. The generated image can be drawn by changing the color information included in the image data so that the image becomes the same.

When executing color blending for monochrome conversion in response to command 01AKG04, for example, execute monochrome conversion calculation processing for each pixel on RGB values, which are color information of each pixel (1 pixel) shown in image data. do. In the monochrome conversion calculation process, color information can be changed so that the image becomes monochrome by substituting RGB values into the calculation formula for color tone conversion. In this manner, by executing the monochrome conversion calculation process, it is possible to draw an image generated by changing the color information included in the image data so that the image is subjected to monochrome conversion.

When executing color blending for blurring by rotation in response to command 01AKG05, for example, a plurality of rotated images are generated by rotation calculation processing on image data. At this time, a plurality of rotated images with different image rotation angles are generated. For example, two types of rotated images are generated for an image with a rotation angle of 0 degrees, an image with a rotation angle of 2 degrees, and an image with a rotation angle of 4 degrees. Using the multiple rotated images generated in this way and an image corresponding to the original image data (original image), a color blending process such as alpha blending is performed to create a blurred image. An image generated by changing the color information included in the image data can be drawn so that

When changing the offset amount of the image position in response to the command 01AKG06, the image position information is changed by, for example, coordinate value conversion processing on the image data. In the coordinate value conversion process, position information, such as UV coordinate values, when drawing an image is changed in accordance with an offset amount set as a parameter. The UV coordinate value is given as a texture coordinate attribute value when mapping a texture to an object. By executing the coordinate value conversion process, it is possible to draw an image generated by changing the position information corresponding to the image data so that the texture arrangement is different.

In this way, the effect drawing commands may include commands such as commands 01AKG01 to 01AKG05 that change the color information included in the image data so that the generated image can be drawn. Furthermore, the effect drawing commands may include a command, such as command 01AKG06, that enables drawing of an image generated by changing position information corresponding to image data. In addition, the effect drawing command may include a command that changes arbitrary attribute information regarding image data to enable drawing of the generated image.

Unlike these effect drawing commands, the CPU 91AK131 can also generate normal display drawing commands. The normal display drawing command executes a process of drawing an image corresponding to the image data without changing the color information included in the image data by not executing a composition process using color blending or the like.

FIG. 9-3 shows a configuration example of a screen display including various effect images that can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. A plurality of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 are divided into a plurality of display layers and drawn. Different display priorities are set in advance for the plurality of display layers as display layers for effect images. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 9-3, layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 are provided as a plurality of display layers. Among these, the layer 01AKL1 is a display layer with the highest display priority, and displays an effect image showing a small symbol in the small symbol display area 01AKC1 in a displayable manner. Layer 01AKL2 is a display layer with the next highest display priority after layer 01AKL1, and renders an effect image corresponding to pending display or active display so as to be displayable. In addition, the layer 01AKL2 may draw an effect image showing a pedestal below the active display so that it can be displayed. Layer 01AKL3 is a display layer with the next highest display priority after layer 01AKL2, and displays an effect image used for a chance-up effect that increases the chance during reach. Layer 01AKL4 is a display layer with the next highest display priority after layer 01AKL3, and displays performance images showing decorative patterns in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Draw as possible. Layer 01AKL5 is a display layer with the lowest display priority, and draws an effect image, etc., which becomes a background image, so that it can be displayed.

The display layer in which the plurality of effect images are arranged is specified, for example, by display priority information included in the display list. In the display list, the effect image placed on layer 01AKL5 is specified as the first drawing target, and then the effect images placed on each display layer are specified as the drawing target in the order of layers 01AKL4, 01AKL3, 01AKL2, and 01AKL1. Good too. Further, for example, the image data of the effect images drawn on each of the layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 may be set with a Z value that is a depth value used when drawing the respective effect images in a superimposed manner. By setting the Z value using the Z value setting table, the Z value of the effect image drawn on each layer 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 may be a different value depending on the layer to which it is drawn. For example, a display layer to which a small Z value is assigned is placed closer (forward) in the Z-axis direction than a display layer to which a larger Z value is assigned, and has a higher image display priority. Just do it like this.

When the VDP91AK132 writes image data read from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like to a frame buffer provided in the VRAM91AK147 or the like, the display priority can be determined by performing a Z value comparison operation. At this time, for example, image data of a performance image with a small Z value is written to the frame buffer with priority over image data of a performance image with a large Z value. As a result, a presentation image drawn on a display layer to which a small Z value is assigned has a higher display priority than a presentation image drawn on a display layer to which a large Z value is assigned, and from the player's perspective. It can be placed on the near side (front side). On the other hand, a presentation image drawn on a display layer to which a large Z value is assigned will have a lower display priority than a presentation image drawn on a display layer to which a small Z value is assigned, and the player will It can be placed on the back side (rear side). Note that the relationship between the Z value and the display priority may be an inverse relationship, and a display layer to which a large value is assigned as a Z value has a higher Z value than a display layer to which a smaller value is assigned as a Z value. It may be arranged on the near side (front side) in the axial direction so that the display priority of the image is high.

In this way, the rendering process of the effect image according to the display layer is executed, and the display image 01AKD1 including a plurality of effect images is generated. The display image 01AKD1 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 after the images drawn on the layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 are combined in a superimposed manner as a plurality of display layers having different display priorities.

Among layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5, layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 are special layers, and layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 are specific layers. In layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 included in the specific layer, effect images can be drawn and displayed using a different drawing process from the effect images drawn in layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 included in the special layer.

FIG. 9-4 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect drawing synthesis process executed by the VDP91AK132. The effect drawing synthesis process is executed, for example, when a display list including effect drawing commands is transferred based on the result of decoding an instruction code by the instruction decoder 91AK141 of the VDP 91AK132. When the effect drawing synthesis process is started, image data to be subjected to the effect process is read out (step 01AKS01). For example, in the VDP91AK132, image data to be processed is read out from the effect data memory 91AK123, etc., and stored in the work area of the VRAM91AK147 for temporary storage. The data transfer circuit of the VDP91AK132 reads the image data to be processed from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the buffer area of the VRAM91AK147 by accessing the address of the image data specified by the drawing command, and transfers it to the work area of the VRAM91AK147. Just remember it. The image data to be subjected to the effect processing is designated by the drawing command as image data indicating an image to be drawn on one of the specific layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 among the plurality of display layers.

Thereafter, effect color blending is executed in accordance with the drawing command (step 01AKS02). For example, the VDP91AK132 uses some or all of the video renderer 91AK144, the character image renderer 91AK145, and the text image renderer 91AK146 to execute inter-pixel calculation processing specified by the drawing command, so that any of the commands 01AKG01 to 01AKG05, for example, All you have to do is perform color blending accordingly. In the case of command 01AKG06, coordinate value conversion processing may be executed to change the offset amount of the image position in texture mapping.

After step 01AKS02, images are combined and drawn in correspondence with the low priority display layer (step 01AKS03). At this time, the image for which effect color blending was performed in step 01AKS02 is drawn in the frame buffer for screen display of the VRAM91AK147. For example, the VDP91AK132 draws on layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 by executing inter-pixel arithmetic processing specified by a drawing command using some or all of the video renderer 91AK144, character image renderer 91AK145, and text image renderer 91AK146. It is sufficient to store the images in a frame buffer for screen display while composing them according to the display priority. As a result, images drawn on any of layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, can be drawn for screen display after changing the color information of the image data by executing effect color blending. can.

After step 01AKS03, images are combined and drawn in accordance with the high priority display layer (step 01AKS04). For example, in the VDP91AK132, image data to be drawn is read out from the effect data memory 91AK123, etc., and drawn in a frame buffer for screen display in the VRAM91AK147. An image in a low-priority display layer has already been drawn in this frame buffer in step 01AKS03. The data transfer circuit of the VDP91AK132 reads the image data to be drawn from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the buffer area of the VRAM91AK147 by accessing the address of the image data specified by the drawing command, and uses it for screen display in the VRAM91AK147. All you have to do is transfer it to the frame buffer and store it. At this time, some or all of the video image renderer 91AK144, character image renderer 91AK145, and text image renderer 91AK146 execute pixel-to-pixel arithmetic processing specified by the drawing command, thereby drawing on layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, respectively. Images may be stored in a frame buffer for screen display while being synthesized according to the display priority. The image data to be drawn in step 01AKS04 is specified by a drawing command as image data indicating an image to be drawn on either layer 01AKL1 or 01AKL2, which is a special layer among a plurality of display layers. As a result, images drawn on either layer 01AKL1 or 01AKL2, which are special layers, can be drawn for screen display without executing color blending for effects and without changing the color information of the image data. Can be done.

In this way, the VDP 91AK132 can execute drawing processes to display various images on the screen of the image display device 5, using image data stored in a specified area of the performance data memory 91AK123 or the VRAM 91AK147. Also, by executing an effect drawing synthesis process, on the one hand, it is possible to change the color information contained in the image data and draw an image drawn on any of layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, and on the other hand, it is possible to draw an image drawn on any of layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, in accordance with the image data.

When a display list including normal display drawing commands but not effect drawing commands is transferred, the VDP 91AK132 can execute normal drawing compositing processing, which is different from the effect drawing compositing processing. In the normal drawing compositing processing, the data transfer circuit of the VDP 91AK132 accesses the address of the image data specified by the drawing command to read the image data to be drawn from the performance data memory 91AK123 or the buffer area of the VRAM 91AK147, and transfers and stores the image data to the frame buffer for screen display in the VRAM 91AK147. At this time, the moving image renderer 91AK144, the character image renderer 91AK145, and the text image renderer 91AK146 execute pixel-to-pixel arithmetic processing specified by the drawing command, or some or all of them, to store the images drawn on the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 in the frame buffer for screen display while compositing them according to the display priority. In this case, images drawn on layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, and layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, can be drawn for screen display without performing effect color blending and without changing the color information of the image data.

FIG. 9-5 shows an example of execution of image processing using effect drawing and synthesis processing. In this case, in the display list including effect drawing commands, among the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 included in the specific layer, the image data 01AKD03 of the effect image placed in layer 01AKL3, the layer Image data 01AKD04 of the effect image placed in layer 01AKL4 and image data 01AKD05 of the effect image placed in layer 01AKL5 are respectively designated. When the VDP91AK132 reads out these image data in step 91AKS01 of the effect drawing and synthesis process, it stores it in the subframe buffer 01AKF01 provided in the work area of the VRAM91AK147 and stores it temporarily. As a result, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A1), the image data 01AKD03 of the effect image placed on layer 01AKL3, the image data 01AKD04 of the effect image placed on layer 01AKL4, and the image data 01AKD04 of the effect image placed on layer 01AKL5, Image data 01AKD05 of the image is stored in subframe buffer 01AKF01.

Subsequently, the VDP 91AK132 performs effect color blending on the image data stored in the subframe buffer 01AKF01 in step 91AKS02 of the effect drawing and synthesis process. For example, when a color blend for monochrome conversion is specified by command 01AKG04 as an effect drawing command, color information included in the image data is changed by executing monochrome conversion calculation processing. As a result, the color information of the image data 01AKD03 of the effect image arranged in the layer 01AKL3 is changed so that it becomes monochrome-converted image data 01AKD13 as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A2). The color information of the image data 01AKD04 of the effect image arranged in the layer 01AKL4 is changed so that it becomes monochrome-converted image data 01AKD14 as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A2). The color information of the image data 01AKD05 of the effect image arranged in the layer 01AKL5 is changed so that it becomes monochrome-converted image data 01AKD15 as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A2).

Thereafter, the VDP 91AK132 synthesizes images corresponding to the low-priority display layer in step 91AKS03 of effect drawing synthesis processing. For example, image data read from the subframe buffer 01AKF01 is written and stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 in order from the display layer with the lowest display priority. At this time, it is sufficient to overwrite the image data or erase hidden surfaces depending on the display priority. Among the image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 stored in the subframe buffer 01AKF01 shown in FIG. 9-5 (A2), the image data 01AKD15 of the effect image arranged in the layer 01AKL5 is read first and written to the main frame buffer 01AKF02. Let me remember it. The image data 01AKD14 of the effect image arranged in the layer 01AKL4 is read out second, and is written superimposed on the image data 01AKD15 stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 to be synthesized. The image data 01AKD13 of the effect image arranged in the layer 01AKL3 is read out third, and is written in a superimposed manner on the image data 01AKD14 and 01AKD15 stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 to be synthesized.

Then, the VDP 91AKD 132 synthesizes images corresponding to the high priority display layer in step 91AKS04 of the effect drawing synthesis process. At this time, for example, by a drawing command included in the display list, image data 01AKD02 of the effect image placed in layer 01AKL2 among layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 included in the special layer is specified first as the image data to be drawn. , image data 01AKD01 of the effect image arranged in layer 01AKL1 is specified next. Each time the VDP91AK132 reads these image data, it writes and stores them in the main frame buffer 01AKF02. That is, among the image data 01AKD01 and 01AKD02 to be drawn, the image data 01AKD02 of the effect image arranged in the layer 01AKL2 is read out first, and is superimposed on the image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02. Write and synthesize. The image data 01AKD01 of the effect image arranged in the layer 01AKL1 is finally read out and written in a superimposed manner on the image data 01AKD02, 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 to be synthesized.

In this way, the image data 01AKD03 to 01AKD05 temporarily stored in the subframe buffer 01AKF01 is converted to image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 with color information changed by effect color blending, and the converted image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 is given priority for display. are written to the main frame buffer 01AKF02 in the order according to the time. Thereafter, the image data 01AKD01 and 01AKD02 are written to the main frame buffer 01AKF02 in the order according to the display priority without changing the color information by not performing effect color blending. Therefore, 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, are drawn using a specific drawing process such as color blending for effects, and display various effects images such as background images, effects images showing decorative patterns, effects images that increase chances during reach. It is possible. On the other hand, the special layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 are drawn using normal drawing processing that does not perform color blending for effects, and are used to create effect images that show pending display, active display, and small symbols, etc., for the progress of the game. Related predetermined images can be displayed.

Figure 9-6 shows an example of an image displayed by executing the effect drawing compositing process. When a display list including effect drawing commands is transferred, the VDP91AK132 can execute the effect drawing compositing process to display an image for presentation drawn by modifying the color information, etc., contained in the image data.

FIG. 9-6(A) shows an image display example 01AKM01 in the case of monochrome conversion. When a display list including the command 01AKG04 is transferred as an effect drawing command, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, a production image drawn by monochrome conversion calculation processing etc. from the effect color blend is displayed. It is possible. The monochrome conversion calculation process is a process for drawing with fewer colors than the color information included in the image data. As a result, in the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers of the image display example 01AKM01, as specific drawing processing, drawing is performed using monochrome conversion calculation processing, etc., in which drawing is performed using fewer colors than the color information included in the image data. Images for presentation can be displayed. In the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers of the image display example 01AKM01, it is possible to display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game by performing normal drawing processing without changing the color information included in the image data.

FIG. 9-6(B) shows an image display example 01AKM02 in the case of color information inversion. When a display list including command 01AKG02 is transferred as an effect drawing command, it is possible to display a production image drawn by difference calculation processing among effect color blends in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. It is. Difference calculation processing is processing for converting and rendering the value of color information included in image data so as to be inverted by the difference from the maximum value. As a result, in the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers of the image display example 01AKM02, as a specific drawing process, drawing is performed by a difference calculation process that converts the value of color information included in the image data and draws the image for presentation. can be displayed. In the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers of the image display example 01AKM02, it is possible to display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game by performing normal drawing processing without converting the values of color information included in the image data.

In addition, when a display list including command 01AKG01 is transferred as an effect drawing command, layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, use a composition process that performs color blending for blurring using bilinear sampling as a specific drawing process. It is possible to display a presentation image drawn by changing the color information included in the image data. In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, need only be able to display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game by drawing without changing the color information included in the image data through normal drawing processing.

When a display list including command 01AKG03 is transferred as an effect drawing command, layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, can display an image for presentation drawn by modifying the color information contained in the image data through a compositing process that performs a color blend for blurring by changing the magnification as a specific drawing process. In this case, layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, can display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game by drawing without modifying the color information contained in the image data through normal drawing process.

When a display list including command 01AKG05 is transferred as an effect drawing command, layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, are combined with image data by a compositing process that performs color blending for blurring by rotation as a specific drawing process. It is possible to display a rendering image drawn with the included color information changed. In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, need only be able to display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game by drawing without changing the color information included in the image data through normal drawing processing.

When a display list including command 01AKG06 is transferred as an effect drawing command, layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, can display an image for presentation drawn by changing the position information corresponding to the image data using a coordinate value conversion process that changes the offset amount of the image position as a specific drawing process. In this case, layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, can display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game by drawing without changing the position information corresponding to the image data using a normal drawing process.

By using these effect drawing commands, you can draw a presentation image drawn by changing the color information included in the image data, or a presentation image drawn by changing the position information corresponding to the image data, on a specific layer. can be displayed. This makes it possible to perform different image processing depending on the effect drawing command, even for production images that are drawn using common image data, so that color information or position information can be changed and drawn. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the amount of image data from increasing and to perform various display effects to improve the interest in the game.

FIG. 9-7(A) shows an example of setting the jackpot reliability according to the contents of the reach effect. The jackpot reliability for each reach performance is the ratio of cases in which the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and the game is controlled to a jackpot game state among the cases in which each reach performance is executed. In this setting example, the jackpot reliability is set to be different depending on the reach effect that is a plurality of types of super reach, such as SP reach A1 to A3 or SP reach B. For example, in the variable display pattern determination table, the proportion of the variable display result becoming a "jackpot" is set to differ depending on multiple types of reach effects by assigning a determination value that is compared with the random value for determining the variable display pattern. All you have to do is stay there.

SP Reach A1 to A3 are reach effects of the Super Reach with a lower jackpot reliability than SP Reach B, and are also called "weak SP reach." SP Reach B is a reach effect of the Super Reach with a higher jackpot reliability than SP Reach A1 to A3, and is also called "strong SP reach." For example, the jackpot reliability of SP Reach A1 is 20%, the jackpot reliability of SP Reach A2 is 25%, the jackpot reliability of SP Reach A3 is 30%, and the jackpot reliability of SP Reach B is 80%. Therefore, when the reach performance of SP Reach A1 is executed, the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" about once in five times. In contrast, when the reach performance of SP Reach B is executed, the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" about four times in five times. The reach performance contents may include a performance mode that allows a part of the SP reach A1 to A3 to be recognized as being similar. For example, the SP reach A1 to A3 may have a common moving image played and displayed as a background image. Alternatively, the SP reach A1 to A3 may have a common character image displayed as an animation. The reach performance contents may include a performance mode that allows a difference from the SP reach A1 to A3 to be recognized in the case of SP reach B. For example, the SP reach B may have a moving image different from the SP reach A1 to A3 played and displayed as a background image. Alternatively, the SP reach B may have a character image different from the SP reach A1 to A3 displayed as an animation. The reach performance contents may include a performance mode that allows a difference from the other cases to be recognized in any of the SP reach A1 to A3. For example, the SP reach A1 to A3 may have a different moving image played and displayed as a background image. Alternatively, the SP reach A1 to A3 may have a character image different from the SP reach A1 to A3 displayed as an animation. Other presentation modes that allow the difference to be recognized may be any display on the screen of the image display device 5, any sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, any light emitted using light-emitting components such as the game effect lamp 9 or decorative LEDs, any action using a movable component for presentation, or any combination of some or all of these.

When a super reach effect such as SP reach A1 to A3 is executed, a case where a drawing effect is executed by displaying an image drawn in response to an effect drawing command is included. As the drawing effect, it may be possible to select and execute one of a plurality of types of display effects that can display images drawn by different drawing processes according to the effect drawing command. As a drawing effect, an image drawn in response to an effect drawing command is not displayed, but even if it is possible to execute a display effect that can display an image drawn in response to a drawing command different from the effect drawing command. good. When a reach effect that becomes a super reach is executed, even if it includes a case where an effect is executed by displaying an image drawn only in response to a normal display drawing command without executing a specific drawing effect. good.

FIG. 9-7(B) shows an example of setting the drawing effect contents according to the drawing effect pattern. In this setting example, drawing effect patterns 02AKA01, 02AKA02, 02AKB01, 02AKB02, 02AKB11, and 02AKB12 are prepared in advance as a plurality of drawing effect patterns. Depending on the plurality of drawing effect patterns, some or all of the drawing effect contents are different. The content of the drawing effect includes the presence or absence and type of the drawing effect by effect display, and the presence or absence of the drawing effect by strobe display. A drawing effect that does not include effect display or strobe display is also referred to as a normal drawing effect. A drawing effect using an effect display or a strobe display is also referred to as a specific drawing effect.

The effect display is an effect display in which color information included in image data is changed and drawn when an effect drawing command is generated and transferred. The types of effect display include a monochrome conversion effect and a color information inversion effect. The monochrome conversion effect uses command 01AKG04 among the effect drawing commands to draw and display a monochrome-converted effect image. The color information inversion effect uses command 02 of the effect drawing commands to draw and display an effect image with color information inverted. In this way, the effect display may be performed as long as it can display an effect image drawn by changing the color information included in the image data. Note that the effect display may be capable of displaying an effect image drawn by changing the position information corresponding to the image data using, for example, command 01AKG06 among the effect drawing commands.

A strobe display is an effect display that alternately and repeatedly displays an image drawn using image data and a single-color image (for example, black or white) with settings different from the image data, every predetermined number of frames. It is. Strobe display may be performed on images drawn on layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, when a drawing command different from the effect drawing command is generated and transferred. On the other hand, strobe display may not be performed on images drawn on layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers. In this way, while strobe display can be executed within the range of images drawn on a specific layer, a limit may be set such that strobe display cannot be executed within the range of images drawn on a special layer. A temporary stop display may be performed together with the strobe display. The pause display is an effect display that gives the impression that the progress of the effect by displaying the image has been temporarily stopped by continuously displaying the same image over a predetermined number of consecutive frames. Note that when strobe display is not performed, temporary stop display may be performed.

FIG. 9-8 shows an example of determining a drawing effect pattern. For example, in the effect control process processing in step S76, when the variable display start setting process is executed in step S171, multiple drawings are performed at a ratio according to the variable display result and the content of the reach effect as shown in FIG. 9-8. It is sufficient if one of the performance patterns can be determined. When a variable display pattern corresponding to the reach effect of Super Reach is specified, the CPU91AK131 extracts a random number value for determining a drawing effect pattern, and based on the random number value, depending on the variable display result and the content of the reach effect, The drawing effect pattern may be determined by referring to the drawing effect pattern determination table.

In the determination example shown in Figure 9-8, if the variable display result is "lose" and the reach effect content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, it will be drawn at a rate of 60% (=60/100). The rendering effect pattern 02AKA01 is determined, the rendering effect pattern 02AKA02 is determined at a rate of 10% (=10/100), the rendering effect pattern 02AKB01 is determined at a rate of 10% (=10/100), and the rendering effect pattern 02AKB01 is determined at a rate of 10% (=5 /100), the drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is determined, the proportion of 10% (=10/100) determines the drawing effect pattern 02AKB11, and the proportion of 5% (5/100) determines the drawing effect pattern 02AKB12. be done. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "Jackpot" and the reach effect content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is determined at a rate of 5% (=5/100). , the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02 is determined at a rate of 10% (=10/100), the drawing effect pattern 02AKB01 is determined at a rate of 15% (=15/100), and the rate of 20% (=20/100) The drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is determined, the drawing effect pattern 02AKB11 is determined at a rate of 20% (=20/100), and the drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is determined at a rate of 30% (=30/100). Due to such determination ratios, the ratio at which the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and is controlled to a jackpot game state is different between the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 and the drawing effect patterns other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01.

The drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is a pattern in which a specific drawing effect, which is a drawing effect using an effect display or a strobe display, is not executed. On the other hand, drawing effect patterns 02AKA02, 02AKB01, 02AKB02, 02AKB11, and 02AKB12 are patterns for executing specific drawing effects using one or both of effect display and strobe display. When the reach effect content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is more effective than when the variable display result is a "loss". The proportion of drawing performance patterns other than those determined is high. Therefore, when the reach effect content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, when a specific drawing effect is executed, which is a drawing effect using an effect display or a strobe display, the content is higher than when the specific drawing effect is not executed. , the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and the ratio of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state increases. In addition, the determination ratio of the drawing performance patterns other than the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01 is set according to the variable display result so that the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than that of the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01.

When the ready-to-reach effect content is SP reach-B, only drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 can be determined, and a restriction is set so that drawing effect pattern other than 02AKA01 cannot be determined. When the reach effect content is SP reach B, a super reach effect is executed which is a "strong SP reach" with higher jackpot reliability than in the case of SP reach A1 to A3. In such a case, if a specific drawing effect using an effect display or a strobe display is executed, it will be difficult for the player to visually recognize the super reach effect, which has a high probability of hitting the jackpot, and this may reduce the player's enjoyment of the game. be. Therefore, within the range where the reach effect content is SP reach B, a limit is set in which a specific drawing effect by effect display or strobe display is not executed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player's attention from being obstructed from the player's attention to the reach performance of the super reach with high jackpot reliability, and to appropriately improve the game interest.

When the reach effect content is one of SP reach A1 to A3, it is possible to determine one of the drawing effect patterns 02AKA01, 02AKA02, 02AKB01, 02AKB02, 02AKB11, and 02AKB12 at different ratios depending on the variable display result. . When the reach performance content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, a super reach reach performance is executed, which is a "weak SP reach" with a lower jackpot reliability than in the case of SP reach B. In such a case, when a specific drawing performance using an effect display or a strobe display is executed, the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and the percentage of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state increases. In this way, when the reach performance content is one of SP reach A1 to A3, the specific drawing performance is executed and the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state increases, so the super reach with low jackpot reliability Even if it is a reach effect, the execution of the specific drawing effect can increase the player's expectations and appropriately improve the interest in the game.

Note that even when the ready-to-reach effect content is SP reach-B, it may be possible to determine a drawing effect pattern other than 02AKA01 at a predetermined ratio. However, when the ready-to-reach presentation content is SP ready-to-win B, it may be possible to determine a drawing presentation pattern other than 02AKA01 at a lower rate than when the ready-to-reach presentation content is SP ready-to-reach A1 to A3. In this way, in the range where the reach effect content is SP reach B, there is a limit that specific drawing effects using effect display and strobe display can be executed at a lower rate than in the range where the reach effect content is SP reach A1 to A3. Restrictions may be set as follows.

FIG. 9-9(A) shows the effect execution period in the variable display of super reach. When the super reach variable display is executed, the period from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable display can be divided into a plurality of performance execution periods such as performance execution periods D0 to D4. The effect execution period D0 is a period from the start of the variable display until execution of the ready-to-win effect is started after the ready-to-win effect is established. The performance execution period D1 is a period from the start of the ready-to-reach performance execution period in which the super reach performance is executed until the start of the chance-up performance execution period in which the chance-up performance can be executed. The performance execution period D2 is a period from the start of the chance up performance execution period to the end of the chance up performance execution period until the start of the result notification performance execution period in which the result notification performance can be executed. The result notification performance may be any performance as long as it notifies the performance result corresponding to the display result of the variable display in the reach performance that becomes super reach. The performance execution period D3 is a period from the start to the end of the result notification performance execution period. The performance execution period D4 is a period from the end of the result notification performance execution period to the end of the variable display.

FIG. 9-9(B) shows performance control example 02AKC01 in each performance execution period. Among the multiple performance execution periods D0 to D4, in the performance execution period D2 from the start of the chance-up performance execution period to the start of the result notification performance execution period, if the drawing performance pattern is other than 02AKA01, the specific drawing performance SPE is executed. become executable. In the case of the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed, so even in the effect execution period D2, the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed and the normal drawing effect NOR becomes executable.

Among the multiple performance execution periods D0 to D4, in the performance execution period D0 from the start of variable display to the start of the super reach reach performance, regardless of whether it is the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01 or a drawing performance pattern other than 02AKA01. , the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed and the normal drawing effect NOR becomes executable. For example, in the production execution period D0, if it is possible to perform a light emission production using the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs in response to the BGM and sound effect output when the variable display of decorative symbols starts. good. In addition, during the production execution period D0, decorative symbols may be stopped (temporarily stopped) displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and ” When the decorative symbols constituting the pseudo-continuous eye are stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs are activated in response to the BGM and sound effect output. It may also be possible to perform a light emitting effect using. In addition, during the entire performance execution period D0, the normal drawing performance NOR is executed, and in response to the BGM and sound effect output during the execution of the variable display, the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs are used to emit light. It may also be possible to perform the performance.

During the performance execution periods D1 to D4 in which reach performances such as the super reach are performed during the execution of the variable display, in the performance execution period D1 following the performance execution period D0, the specific drawing performance SPE is not executed and the normal drawing performance NOR can be executed regardless of whether the drawing performance pattern is 02AKA01 or other than the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01. In the performance execution period D2 following the performance execution period D1, the normal drawing performance NOR can be executed when the drawing performance pattern is 02AKA01, and the specific drawing performance SPE can be executed when the drawing performance pattern is other than 02AKA01. In the normal drawing performance NOR by the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01, an image drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed. In the specific drawing performance SPE by other than the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01, for example, an image drawn by the specific drawing process can be displayed in 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers. Note that even when a specific drawing effect SPE other than drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is executed, it is sufficient if images drawn by normal drawing processing can be displayed on layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, for example.

In the performance execution period D3 and the performance execution period D4 after the performance execution period D2, the specific drawing performance SPE is not executed and the normal drawing performance NOR is performed, regardless of whether it is the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01 or a drawing performance pattern other than 02AKA01. becomes executable. In addition, in the effect execution period D3, as in the effect execution period D2, the normal drawing effect NOR can be executed when the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is used, and the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed when the drawing effect pattern is other than 02AKA01. It may be. If the specific drawing effect SPE is made executable in the effect execution period D3, the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE is changed to normal drawing in the effect execution period D4 for notifying the finalized decorative design etc. that is a variable display result. What is necessary is to return to the execution of the effect NOR. Further, the specific drawing effect SPE may be made executable during all of the plurality of effect execution periods D1 to D4. Prior to the variable display in which the reach effect of super reach is executed, execution of the specific drawing effect SPE can be started based on the determination result that the reach effect of super reach will be executed as a determination result at the time of starting winning. You can do it like this. Even if the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed in a period other than the effect execution period D2, in the same way as when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed in the effect execution period D2, for example, in the specific layer 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, It is only necessary that an image drawn by specific drawing processing can be displayed, and for example, layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, can display images drawn by normal drawing processing.

Among the plurality of performance execution periods D0 to D4, when the normal drawing performance NOR is executed even in a period other than the performance execution period D0, a light emitting performance using light emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs is performed. It is doable. On the other hand, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed in the effect execution period D2 or the like, the light emission effect is controlled not to be executed. For example, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the light emitting effect may be prevented from being executed by turning off the light emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs. In this way, when the normal drawing effect NOR that can display images drawn by the normal drawing process is executed, it is possible to execute a light emitting effect using a light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9. On the other hand, when a specific drawing effect SPE capable of displaying an image drawn by specific drawing processing is executed, a light emission effect by a light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 is not executed. Therefore, within the range of the performance execution period in which the normal drawing effect NOR that can display images drawn by the normal drawing process is executed, it is possible to execute the light emission effect by emitting light from the light emitting member, while the image drawn by the specific drawing process is In the range of the performance execution period in which the specific drawing performance SPE capable of displaying is executed, a restriction is set as a limit that the light emission performance by light emission of the light emitting member is not performed. When a specific drawing effect SPE using effect display or strobe display is executed, by not executing the light emitting effect, an appropriate image that allows the player to easily recognize the image drawn by the specific drawing process is created. The display can improve the interest in the game.

In addition, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed in the effect execution period D2 etc., the restriction is not limited to not executing the light emission effect by light emission of the light emitting member, for example, the normal drawing effect NOR is executed. Restrictions may be placed on the presentation mode of the light emission effect, such as reducing the amount of light emission effect compared to when the light emission effect is used. When the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, a restriction is applied to reduce the amount of effect by lowering the amount of light emitted from the light emitting member (brightness) in the light emitting effect than when the normal drawing effect NOR is executed. may be provided. Alternatively, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the amount of effect is reduced by reducing the number of light-emitting members that can emit light in the light emission effect than when the normal drawing effect NOR is executed. may be provided. Alternatively, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the amount of effect is reduced by reducing the luminous color used in the light emitting effect (for example, monochrome light emission) than when the normal drawing process NOR is executed. Limits may be set as follows.

FIGS. 9-10 to 9-13 show examples of execution of reach effects and drawing effects. FIG. 9-10 shows an example of execution of an effect when the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is determined among cases where a reach effect that becomes a super reach is executed. FIG. 9-11 shows an example of performance execution in the performance execution period D2 when the drawing performance pattern 02AKA02 is determined. FIG. 9-12 shows an example of performance execution in the performance execution period D2 when the drawing performance pattern 02AKB02 is determined. FIG. 9-13 shows an example of performance execution in the performance execution period D2 when the drawing performance pattern 02AKB12 is determined.

FIG. 9-10(A) shows an example of production execution 02AKM01 in which the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a ready-to-win mode and a ready-to-win is established. At this time, a reach is established when the common decorative symbols corresponding to the number "7" are all stopped and displayed (temporary stopped display) in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. , the normal reach reach effect is executed. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM01, the normal drawing effect NOR accompanied by the light emission effect can be executed as appropriate in response to the effect execution period D0. For example, it is only necessary that it is possible to perform a light-emitting effect using light-emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs in response to BGM and sound effect output from the reach establishment to the super reach development.

FIG. 9-10(B) shows a performance execution example 02AKM02 in a case where the normal reach reach performance changes to the super reach reach performance in response to the start of the performance execution period D1. 9-10(C) and FIG. 9-10(D) show performance execution examples 02AKM03 and 02AKM04 when the super reach reach performance progresses during the performance execution period D1. In the case of production execution examples 02AKM02 to 02AKM04, corresponding to the production execution period D1, the normal drawing production NOR with light emission production can be executed regardless of the determination result of the drawing production pattern, and the specific drawing production Do not run SPE.

FIG. 9-10(E) shows performance execution example 02AKM05 when the chance-up performance during reach is executed in the performance execution period D2. FIG. 9-10(F) shows performance execution example 02AKM06 when a reach performance is executed after the chance up performance in the performance execution period D2. In the case of the effect execution examples 02AKM05 and 02AKM06, the normal drawing effect NOR with the light emission effect based on the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is executed in response to the effect execution period D2. At this time, since the drawing effect pattern is 02AKA01, the specific drawing effect SPE by effect display or strobe display is not executed.

FIG. 9-10 (G) shows a performance execution example 02AKM07 when the result notification performance is executed during the performance execution period D3. At this time, as a super reach effect, a reach effect with different effect contents depending on the variable display result is executed, and also in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, the finalized decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed by oscillating display or the like. In the case of production execution example 02AKM07, corresponding to the production execution period D3, the normal drawing production NOR with light emission production can be executed regardless of the determination result of the drawing production pattern, and the specific drawing production SPE can be executed. Not executed.

FIG. 9-10 (H) shows a performance execution example 02AKM08 in which a final notification of the variable display result is executed during the performance execution period D4. At this time, as the reach effect of super reach ends, the determined decorative pattern is completely stopped and displayed. In the case of effect execution example 02AKM08, corresponding to the effect execution period D4, the normal drawing effect NOR with light emitting effect can be executed regardless of the determination result of the drawing effect pattern, and the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed. Not executed.

FIG. 9-11(A) shows a performance execution example 02AKM11 when a chance-up performance during reach is executed in response to the start of the performance execution period D2. The effect display at this time may be the same as the effect display in effect execution example 02AKM05. However, the temporary stop display may be started in response to the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02. For example, images drawn in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, may be copied to a copy area provided in the VRAM91AK147 and stored in a reusable manner. Further, in response to execution of the specific drawing effect SPE using strobe display, control is performed so as not to execute the light emission effect.

FIG. 9-11(B) shows effect execution example 02AKM12 in which strobe display is executed following effect execution example 02AKM11. In the case of production execution example 02AKM12, an entirely black image is drawn and displayed as a single color image in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. At this time, it is sufficient that the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, can display images drawn by normal drawing processing.

FIG. 9-11(C) shows an effect execution example 02AKM13 in which, following the effect execution example 02AKM12, an effect display that becomes a pause display during strobe display is executed. In the case of performance execution example 02AKM13, it is sufficient if the pause display can be executed during strobe display by repeating the pause display started in performance execution example 02AKM11. For example, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, by drawing the image read from the copy area of the VRAM91AK147, the same image as in the production execution example 02AKM11 may be temporarily stopped and repeatedly displayed.

FIG. 9-11(D) shows an effect execution example 02AKM14 in which, following effect execution example 02AKM13, images similar to effect execution example 02AKM12 are repeatedly displayed. FIG. 9-11(E) shows effect execution example 02AKM15 in which, following effect execution example 02AKM14, images similar to effect execution examples 02AKM11 and 02AKM13 are repeatedly displayed. FIG. 9-11(F) shows effect execution example 02AKM16 in which, following effect execution example 02AKM15, images similar to effect execution examples 02AKM12 and 02AKM14 are repeatedly displayed. FIG. 9-11 (G) shows effect execution example 02AKM17 in which, following effect execution example 02AKM16, images similar to effect execution examples 02AKM11, 02AKM13, and 02AKM15 are repeatedly displayed. FIG. 9-11 (H) shows effect execution example 02AKM18 in which, following effect execution example 02AKM17, images similar to effect execution examples 02AKM12, 02AKM14, and 02AKM16 are repeatedly displayed. In this way, by alternately and repeatedly displaying an image drawn using image data and a single-color image with settings different from the image data, it is possible to perform pause display as well as strobe display. . After the strobe display of effect execution example 02 AKM18 is completed, the execution returns to the normal drawing effect NOR, and control is performed to execute the light emission effect.

This type of strobe display can be performed without dedicated image data, using an image with settings different from the image data, in response to a drawing command transferred from the CPU91AK131 to the VDP91AK132. As a result, even if the image for the effect is drawn using common image data, by making it possible to execute a specific drawing effect SPE with a strobe display in response to a drawing command, it is possible to give the player a different impression from the normal drawing effect NOR, and it is possible to prevent the amount of image data from increasing while executing a variety of display effects, thereby increasing interest in the game.

FIG. 9-12 (A) shows that when the reach chance up effect is executed in response to the start of the effect execution period D2, a specific drawing effect SPE with a monochrome conversion effect according to the drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is executed. This shows a production execution example 02AKM21. The effect display at this time is different from the effect display in effect execution example 02AKM05 in that in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, images drawn by monochrome conversion calculation processing, etc., which are specific drawing processing, are displayed. are doing.

FIG. 9-12(B) shows effect execution example 02AKM22 in which a strobe display is executed following effect execution example 02AKM21. In the case of performance execution example 02AKM22, similarly to performance execution example 02AKM12, an entirely black image is drawn and displayed as a single color image in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. At this time, it is sufficient that the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, can display images drawn by normal drawing processing.

FIG. 9-12 (C) shows effect execution example 02AKM23 in which, following effect execution example 02AKM22, a specific drawing effect SPE with a monochrome conversion effect according to drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is executed during execution of the chance-up effect during reach. It shows. In the case of performance execution example 02AKM23, it is sufficient if the chance-up performance during reach that was started in performance execution example 02AKM21 can be continued. Note that a temporary stop display may be executed as a chance-up effect during strobe display. Alternatively, in the specific drawing effect SPE using the monochrome conversion effect, even when strobe display is executed, by displaying an image drawn using image data read out according to the elapsed time, as in the case of effect execution example 02AKM05, The temporary stop display of the chance-up effect may not be executed.

Figure 9-12 (D) shows performance execution example 02AKM24, which displays the same image as performance execution example 02AKM22 repeatedly, following performance execution example 02AKM23. Figure 9-12 (E) shows performance execution example 02AKM25, which displays a reach performance after the chance up performance in performance execution period D2, following performance execution example 02AKM24. The performance display at this time differs from the performance display in performance execution example 02AKM06 in that layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, display images drawn by monochrome conversion calculation processing, which is a specific drawing process.

FIG. 9-12(F) shows effect execution example 02AKM26 in which images similar to effect execution examples 02AKM22 and 02AKM24 are repeatedly displayed following effect execution example 02AKM25. FIG. 9-12 (G) shows a performance execution example 02AKM27 in which a ready-to-win performance after the performance execution example 02AKM25 in the performance execution period D2 is executed following the performance execution example 02AKM26. In the case of performance execution example 02AKM27, it is sufficient if the ready-to-win performance executed in performance execution example 02AKM25 can be continued. Note that a temporary stop display may be executed as a reach effect during strobe display, or a temporary stop display may not be executed as a specific drawing effect SPE using a color information conversion effect. FIG. 9-12(H) shows an effect execution example 02AKM28 in which, following effect execution example 02AKM27, images similar to effect execution examples 02AKM22, 02AKM24, and 02AKM26 are repeatedly displayed. In this way, a monochrome-converted image drawn by reducing the number of colors in the color information through monochrome conversion calculation processing using image data, and a single-color image with settings different from the image data are alternately and repeatedly switched. By displaying this, it is possible to execute a specific drawing effect SPE using a monochrome conversion effect in addition to strobe display.

The effect display, which is a monochrome conversion effect, uses a dedicated image using an image drawn with fewer colors than the color information included in the image data, in response to the effect drawing command transferred from the CPU91AK131 to the VDP91AK132. It is executable regardless of data. As a result, even for effect images drawn using common image data, it is possible to execute a specific drawing effect SPE using a monochrome conversion effect according to the effect drawing command, which is different from the normal drawing effect NOR. Since the impression given to the player can be made different, it is possible to prevent the amount of image data from increasing and to perform various display effects to improve the game's interest. In addition, by combining the effect display, which is a monochrome conversion effect, and the strobe display, the player can easily recognize the color change of the displayed image, and while preventing the amount of image data from increasing, the display effect It is possible to enhance the impression of the player and improve the interest in the game.

In FIG. 9-13(A), when the on-reach chance up effect is executed in response to the start of the effect execution period D2, a specific drawing effect SPE with a color information inversion effect according to the drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is executed. The effect execution example 02AKM31 is shown. In comparison with the effect display in effect execution example 02AKM05, the effect display at this time is an image drawn by converting the color information value by a difference calculation process, which is a specific drawing process, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. The difference is that is displayed.

FIG. 9-13(B) shows effect execution example 02AKM32 in which strobe display is executed following effect execution example 02AKM31. In the case of effect execution example 02AKM32, similarly to effect execution examples 02AKM12, 02AKM22, etc., an entirely black image is drawn and displayed as a single color image in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. At this time, it is sufficient that the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, can display images drawn by normal drawing processing.

FIG. 9-13 (C) is an example of performance execution in which, following performance execution example 02AKM32, a specific drawing effect SPE with a color information inversion effect according to drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is executed during the execution of the reach chance up effect. 02AKM33 is shown. In the case of performance execution example 02AKM33, it is only necessary to continue executing the chance up performance during reach that was started in performance execution example 02AKM31. Note that a temporary stop display may be executed as a chance-up effect during strobe display. Alternatively, in the specific drawing effect SPE using the color information inversion effect, even when strobe display is executed, as in the case of effect execution example 02AKM05, by displaying an image drawn using image data read out according to the elapsed time. , the temporary stop display of the chance-up effect may not be executed.

FIG. 9-13(D) shows an effect execution example 02AKM34 in which, following the effect execution example 02AKM33, images similar to the effect execution example 02AKM32 are repeatedly displayed. FIG. 9-13(E) shows performance execution example 02AKM35 in which, following performance execution example 02AKM34, a ready-to-win performance after a chance-up performance is executed in performance execution period D2. In comparison with the effect display in effect execution example 02AKM06, the effect display at this time is an image rendered by converting the color information value by a difference calculation process, which is a specific drawing process, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. The difference is that is displayed.

FIG. 9-13(F) shows effect execution example 02AKM36, which repeatedly displays images similar to effect execution examples 02AKM32 and 02AKM034, following effect execution example 02AKM35. FIG. 9-13 (G) shows performance execution example 02AKM37 when a ready-to-win performance after performance execution example 02AKM35 in the performance execution period D2 is executed following performance execution example 02AKM36. In the case of performance execution example 02AKM37, it is sufficient if the ready-to-win performance executed in performance execution example 02AKM35 can be continued. Note that the temporary stop display may be executed as a reach effect during strobe display, or the temporary stop display may not be executed as a specific drawing effect SPE using a color information conversion effect. FIG. 9-13 (H) shows effect execution example 02AKM38, which repeatedly displays images similar to effect execution examples 02AKM32, 02AKM34, and 02AKM36, following effect execution example 02AKM37. In this way, an image with inverted color information, which is drawn by converting color information values through differential calculation processing using image data, and a single-color image with settings different from the image data are alternately and repeatedly switched. By displaying this, it is possible to perform a strobe display and a specific drawing effect SPE using a color information inversion effect.

The effect display, which is a color information inversion effect, uses dedicated image data using an image drawn by converting the color information included in the image data in accordance with the effect drawing command transferred from the CPU91AK131 to the VDP91AK132. It is executable regardless of the situation. As a result, even for effect images drawn using common image data, by making it possible to execute a specific drawing effect SPE using a color information inversion effect in response to an effect drawing command, it is possible to perform a specific drawing effect SPE with a color information inversion effect, which is different from the normal drawing effect NOR. Since the impressions given to the player can be made different, it is possible to prevent the amount of image data from increasing and to perform various display effects to improve the game's interest. In addition, by combining the effect display, which is a color information inversion effect, and the strobe display, players can easily recognize color changes in the displayed image. It is possible to enhance the impression of the performance and improve the interest in the game.

By executing the specific drawing performance SPE using effect display or strobe display, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort due to the display performance, which is not present in the normal drawing performance NOR. When the reach performance content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, a super reach reach performance is executed, which is a "weak SP reach" with a lower jackpot reliability than when it is SP reach B. It is possible to execute a specific drawing effect SPE that gives a sense of discomfort in the display effect, which is not present in the normal drawing effect NOR. Then, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the rate of being controlled to a jackpot game state increases, so that the player's expectation can be increased and the game interest can be appropriately improved.

The invention regarding the characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 does not need to have all the technical features regarding the feature parts 01AK and 02AK, but may have the configuration shown in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the conventional technology. It may also include a part of it.

The strobe display has been described as being executed by repeatedly switching and displaying an image drawn using image data and a single-color image with settings different from the image data. In such strobe display, part or all of a single color image may be replaced with a specific image prepared in advance. For example, when inserting and displaying a performance image that becomes a character image as a specific image, the display result of the variable display becomes a "jackpot" and is controlled to a jackpot game state, rather than when a single color image is repeatedly displayed. The drawing effect content and determination ratio of the drawing effect pattern may be set so that the ratio becomes high.

The description has been made assuming that when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the light emission effect using the light emitting member is not executed. The light emitting effect using such a light emitting member may include a light emitting display effect by causing the display portion of the light guide plate to emit light. For example, a light guide plate as a transparent light guide member having light transmittance is provided on the near side (front side) of a part or all of the display screen of the image display device 5. Furthermore, a light-emitting member such as a light-guide plate LED is provided near the light-guide plate, and light from the light-emitting member is introduced through the end face of the light-guide plate and reflected by a reflection portion formed in advance inside the light-guide plate. In this case, a light emitting display effect that displays a predetermined pattern or the like may be executed. In the performance execution period in which the normal drawing performance NOR is executed in accordance with the drawing performance pattern, it is sufficient if the light emission display performance can be executed based on the determination result of the light emission display performance pattern. On the other hand, in response to a drawing effect pattern or the like, the light emitting display effect may be controlled not to be executed during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed.

Furthermore, light emission effects using such light-emitting members may include button light emission effects produced by illuminating a button light-emitting section attached inside the push button 31B. In this case, during a performance execution period in which a normal drawing performance NOR is executed in response to a drawing performance pattern, etc., it is sufficient that a button light emission effect can be executed based on the result of determining the button light emission performance pattern, etc. In contrast, during a performance execution period in which a specific drawing performance SPE is executed in response to a drawing performance pattern, etc., it is sufficient to control so that the button light emission effect is not executed.

When multiple display layers are provided, the setting of whether each display layer is a special layer or a specific layer can be arbitrarily changed based on the specifications of the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the layer 01AKL2 that draws the performance image corresponding to the reserved display or active display so that it can be displayed may be included in the specific layer rather than the special layer. In a setting in which the layer 01AKL2 is included in the specific layer, when the specific drawing performance SPE is executed, the performance image corresponding to the reserved display or active display may be drawn and displayed by the specific drawing process, and color information, etc. may be changed. Then, when the specific drawing performance SPE is executed by the monochrome conversion effect, it is sufficient that the performance image corresponding to the reserved display or active display can be changed to a monochrome image with a small number of colors and displayed. While enabling such a monochrome display of the reserved display or active display, when a change performance that changes the display color of the specific display related to the variable display such as the reserved display or active display can be executed, when a change performance is executed during the execution of the specific drawing performance SPE, the execution of the specific drawing performance SPE may be terminated when the display color of the specific display is changed, and the execution of the normal drawing performance NOR may be started or resumed. The display color of the specific display may be different depending on the expectation controlled in the jackpot game state. In the case where the change performance has a success pattern in which the display color of the specific display is changed and a failure pattern in which the display color of the specific display is not changed, the change performance of the success pattern is executed during the execution of the specific drawing performance SPE, and when the display color of the specific display changes to a specific color, the execution of the specific drawing performance SPE may be terminated, and the execution of the normal drawing performance NOR may be started or resumed. The execution of the specific drawing performance SPE may be started when the reserved display is displayed, and after the variable display and active display corresponding to the reserved display are performed, the change performance of the success pattern is executed, and when the display color of the active display changes to a specific color, the execution of the specific drawing performance SPE may be terminated, and the execution of the normal drawing performance NOR may be started or resumed.

As a display layer included in the special layer, a direction display layer may be included in which an effect image or the like indicating the direction in which the game ball is launched can be displayed. For example, in the direction display layer, when a firing promotion performance is executed as an operation promotion performance for a left-handed performance or a right-handed performance, a performance image that urges the game ball to be fired towards the left side game area or the right side game area is displayed. It is sufficient if it can be drawn and displayed. In the pachinko game machine 1, games can be played by firing game balls as game media, and a first route and a second route are provided as movement routes along which the game balls can flow. The first route may be a right-handed route that becomes the right-hand game area in the gaming area, and the second route may be a left-handed area that becomes the left-hand game area in the game area. Then, when the first state is such that it is advantageous to let the game ball flow down the first path, a first promotion image that urges the game medium to be launched toward the first path can be drawn and displayed on the direction display layer. That's fine. In addition, when the second state is such that it is advantageous to let the game ball flow down the second path, a second promotion image is displayed that urges the game medium to be launched toward the second path based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. It may be possible to draw and display on the direction display layer. In this way, by including the direction display layer in the special layer, during the effect execution period when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the specific layer can display an image drawn by the specific drawing process, whereas the direction display layer can display the image drawn by the specific drawing process. The display layer only needs to be able to display images drawn by normal drawing processing. Therefore, the effect image that prompts the player to shoot the game ball toward the left side game area or the right side game area may be drawn and displayed on a special layer using normal drawing processing as a predetermined image related to the game. By being able to draw and display images that prompt the firing of game media using normal rendering processing rather than specific rendering processing, a variety of display effects can be performed while ensuring appropriate visibility of the images that prompt the firing of gaming media. Thus, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

As the operation promotion effect, it may be possible to draw and display an effect image that shows a changeable effect output amount, such as a part or all of the volume, screen brightness, and light emission amount. As a display layer included in the special layer, an operation display layer may be included in which an effect image or the like in such an operation promotion effect is drawn in a displayable manner.

The display layer included in the special layer may include a warning display layer that displays a warning image or the like to notify the occurrence of an abnormality in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, in the warning display layer, detection is performed by various sensors connected to the main board 11 in the pachinko game machine 1, such as a magnetic sensor, a radio wave sensor, a vibration sensor, a door open sensor, a big winning opening door sensor, a full tank sensor, and a ball out sensor. If it is determined that various errors have occurred based on the state, the state of the payout board, the state of detection of game balls by the start port switch, count switch, etc., a warning image will be drawn and displayed according to the error that has occurred. Good if possible. The warning display layer may be set to the display layer with the highest display priority among the plurality of display layers. In this way, by including the warning display layer in the special layer, during the effect execution period when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the image drawn by the specific drawing process can be displayed in the specific layer, whereas the warning display layer can display the image drawn by the specific drawing process. The display layer only needs to be able to display images drawn by normal drawing processing. Therefore, the warning image for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality may be displayed as a predetermined image related to the game, as long as it can be drawn and displayed on a special layer using normal drawing processing. By being able to draw and display a warning image that notifies the occurrence of an abnormality using normal drawing processing rather than specific drawing processing, it is possible to appropriately ensure the visibility of the image that notifies the occurrence of an abnormality while providing a variety of display effects. By doing so, you can increase your enjoyment of the game. When notifying the occurrence of an abnormality, the abnormality light emission notification may be performed by causing the light emitting member to emit light even during execution of the specific drawing effect SPE in which no light emission effect is executed. In this way, notification regarding the occurrence of an abnormality may be performed with higher priority than other effects.

As a display layer included in the special layer, a suggestion display layer that displays a presentation image in a setting suggestion presentation may be included. For example, the suggestion display layer only needs to be able to draw and display setting suggestion images determined at different rates depending on the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player, and as a suggestion regarding the setting of the setting value, it is possible to decide whether to execute or not and the mode of performance depending on the setting value. It is sufficient if it is possible to execute setting suggestion performances with different determination ratios. For example, it may be possible to select one of a plurality of setting suggestion images at different rates depending on the setting value, and to draw and display the selected setting suggestion image on the suggestion display layer. In this way, by including the suggestion display layer in the special layer, during the performance execution period when the specific drawing performance SPE is executed, the specific layer can display the image drawn by the specific drawing process, whereas the suggestion display layer can display the image drawn by the specific drawing process. The display layer only needs to be able to display images drawn by normal drawing processing. By being able to draw and display images that suggest setting values in the pachinko game machine 1 on a special layer using normal drawing processing rather than specific drawing processing, it is possible to display images that suggest setting values that have different advantages for players. It is possible to perform various display effects while appropriately ensuring visibility, thereby improving the interest in the game. Alternatively, the suggestion display layer may be included in a specific layer instead of a special layer. In this way, by including the suggestion display layer in the specific layer, during the production execution period when the specific drawing production SPE is executed, the special layer can display images drawn by normal drawing processing, whereas the suggestion display layer can display images drawn by normal drawing processing. The display layer only needs to be able to display images drawn by specific drawing processing. By being able to draw and display images that suggest setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 on a specific layer using specific drawing processing, it is possible to diversify the display of images that suggest setting values that have different advantages for players. , it is possible to improve the game's interest.

At least some of the features of the pachinko game machine 1 can be applied not only to the pachinko game machine 1 but also to slot machines and the like. As an example of application to this slot machine, when it is possible to control the navigation notification that notifies the player of the stop order that is advantageous to the player according to the internal lottery result at an assist time (also referred to as AT) that is an executable notification period. As the navigation notification, an effect image that informs the stopping order in a recognizable manner may be displayed on the screen of the image display device. In this case, the display layer included in the special layer may include a notification display layer that displays an effect image used for navigation notification. For example, in the notification display layer, if you want to notify the order in which to stop the variable display by each reel on the left center right, if it is possible to draw and display a stop order image showing the order of stop operations using the stop switch on the notification display layer. good. In this way, by including the notification display layer in the special layer, during the performance execution period when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the specific layer can display images drawn by specific drawing processing, whereas the notification display layer can display images drawn by specific drawing processing. The display layer only needs to be able to display images drawn by normal drawing processing. The visibility of the image that informs the operation mode when stopping the variable display in a slot machine can be drawn and displayed on a special layer using normal drawing processing instead of specific drawing processing. It is possible to improve the game's interest by performing various display performances while appropriately ensuring the following.

(Problem solving means and effects of characteristic part 01AK)
This embodiment includes the following inventions. In other words, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine that can execute a game, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-171129, an effect image can be displayed based on instructions from a display list. Techniques for making it possible to display images by tilting them, and techniques for gaming machines that draw processed images in which a plurality of deformed images generated using inverted images are arranged, such as those described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open Publication No. 2012-29947, etc. was also proposed. In the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent publication, there was a risk that the visibility of important images would be reduced because the entire image was changed. Therefore, our aim is to provide a gaming machine that improves gaming enjoyment while ensuring appropriate image visibility.
The gaming machine related to the feature section 01AK is a gaming machine such as the pachinko gaming machine 1 that can execute games, and uses a storage means for storing image data, such as a performance data memory 91AK123 or a VRAM91AK147, and the image data. An image processing means, such as VDP91AK132, capable of executing drawing processing, and the image processing means performs normal drawing processing such as drawing processing in response to a normal display drawing command, which draws in accordance with image data, and At least, it is possible to perform specific drawing processing such as drawing by changing the color information included in image data, for example, drawing processing according to an effect drawing command, and it is possible to execute a specific drawing process such as drawing by changing the color information included in image data, and it is possible to execute a specific drawing process such as drawing processing that changes color information included in image data, for example, drawing processing according to an effect drawing command. Images in each layer can be displayed, and the plurality of layers include specific layers such as layers AKL03 to AKL05, and special layers such as layers AKL01 and AKL02 that have a higher priority than the specific layers, for example. With steps 01AKS01 to 01AKS03, it is possible to display an image for effect by drawing with a specific drawing process in a specific layer, and for example, with step 01AKS04, with a special layer, it is possible to draw with a normal drawing process and display images related to the progress of the game. A predetermined image can be displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in data capacity, appropriately ensure the visibility of images, and make it possible to perform performances using a variety of displays, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The specific drawing process may include drawing using fewer colors than the color information included in the image data (for example, monochrome conversion). Thereby, while preventing an increase in data capacity, it is possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The specific drawing process may include drawing by converting the value of color information included in the image data (for example, color information inversion). Thereby, while preventing an increase in data capacity, it is possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

For example, as in production control example 02AKC01, there is a first period (for example, production execution period D1, etc.) in which specific drawing processing is not executed, such as production execution period D1, and a second period in which specific drawing processing is executed, such as production execution period D2. Among a plurality of periods including a period (for example, the performance execution period D2, etc.), the light emitting means may be allowed to emit light during the first period, and the light emitting means may not be allowed to emit light during the second period. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

Alternatively, a first period (such as a performance execution period D1) in which a specific drawing process is not executed, such as a performance execution period D1, and a second period (for example, a performance execution period D2) during which a specific drawing process is executed, such as a performance execution period D2. etc.), in the first period it is possible to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a normal manner, and in the second period, the light emission of the light emitting means may be restricted more than in the normal manner. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

For example, the setting value changing process S6A can be set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, values from 1 to 6) that have different advantages for the player. It is equipped with a setting means such as a CPU 103 (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the setting value change process S6A), and provides a suggestion regarding the settings of the setting means by displaying a specific mode, for example, settings such as effects using effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12. It is possible to execute a suggestive effect (for example, the effect according to the effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12), and an image drawn by specific drawing processing may not be displayed as an image displayed by the setting suggestive effect. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

For example, the setting value changing process S6A can be set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, values from 1 to 6) that have different advantages for the player. The system is equipped with a setting means such as a CPU 103 (for example, a CPU 103 that executes a setting value change process S6A), and provides a suggestion regarding the setting of the setting means by displaying a specific mode, for example, a setting suggestion such as an effect using effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12. It is possible to execute a performance (for example, a performance using the performance execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12), and it may be possible to display an image drawn by a specific drawing process as an image displayed by the setting suggestion performance. As a result, it is possible to appropriately ensure the visibility of images, and to make it possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby improving the interest in the game.

For example, it may be possible to execute a specific rendering performance that causes the image to be temporarily stopped and displayed, such as a specific rendering performance using the rendering performance pattern 02AKA02 (for example, a specific rendering performance using the rendering performance pattern 02AKA02). Thereby, while preventing an increase in data capacity, it is possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

For example, as in the effect execution examples 02AKM21 to 02AKM28, it may be possible to alternately display an image drawn using image data and a monochromatic image in a specific layer (for example, see effect execution examples 02AKM21 to 02AKM28). Thereby, while preventing an increase in data capacity, it is possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

For example, the variable display of decorative patterns in the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R (for example, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, Variable display of the identification information image, such as the variable display of decorative patterns in 5R), and reduction in a mode that is smaller than the identification information image, such as the variable display of the small pattern in the small pattern display area 01AKC1. It is possible to perform variable display of the identification information image (for example, variable display of small symbols in the small symbol display area 01AKC1), and for example, as shown in FIG. 9-5, the identification information image is drawn and displayed using a specific drawing process. Yes, the reduced identification information image may be drawn and displayed using normal drawing processing. As a result, it is possible to appropriately ensure the visibility of the image, and to make it possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby improving the interest in the game.

(Problem solving means and effects of characteristic part 02AK)
The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 02AK is a gaming machine such as the pachinko gaming machine 1 that can execute games, and uses a storage means for storing image data, such as a performance data memory 91AK123 and a VRAM91AK147, and the image data. It is equipped with an image processing means, such as VDP91AK132, capable of executing drawing processing, and is equipped with a specific performance such as a super reach performance that suggests control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, such as a jackpot game state. can be executed during variable display, and the performance patterns of the specific performance are a first pattern such as a drawing performance pattern 02AKA01, for example, and a second pattern such as a drawing performance pattern 02AKA02, which have different rates of being controlled to an advantageous state. Among the performance periods in which the specific performance is executed, at least during the first period, such as the performance execution period D1, regardless of whether it is the first pattern or the second pattern, for example, during the normal drawing performance. It is possible to display an image drawn by normal drawing processing such as drawing processing according to the drawing command of In the second period, it is possible to display an image drawn by normal drawing processing in the case of the first pattern, and to display a specific drawing process such as drawing processing according to a drawing command during a specific drawing performance, for example, in the case of the second pattern. It is possible to display images drawn by . As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in data capacity, make it possible to perform performances using a variety of displays, appropriately raise the player's expectations, and improve his/her interest in the game.

The specific drawing process may include drawing using fewer colors than the color information included in the image data, such as monochrome conversion. Thereby, while preventing an increase in data capacity, it is possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The specific drawing process may be performed by converting the value of color information included in the image data, such as color information inversion, for example. Thereby, while preventing an increase in data capacity, it is possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

For example, as in presentation control example 02AKC01, a light-emitting presentation by a light-emitting means can be executed in response to the display of an image drawn by the normal drawing process in a specific presentation, and a light-emitting presentation may not be executed in response to the display of an image drawn by the specific drawing process in a specific presentation. This can increase interest in the game while ensuring appropriate visibility of the image.

Alternatively, in response to the display of an image drawn by the normal drawing process in a specific effect, it is possible to perform a light emission effect by the light emitting means in a normal mode, and in response to the display of the image drawn by the specific drawing process in the specific effect, The light emitting effect may be more limited than in the normal mode. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

A setting means such as a CPU 103 that executes a setting value change process S6A that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values, such as values from 1 to 6, which have different advantages for the player, is provided, It is possible to perform a setting suggestion performance such as a presentation using production execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12, in which a suggestion regarding the setting of the setting means is displayed in a specific manner, and the image displayed by the setting suggestion performance is drawn by a specific drawing process. The image may not be displayed. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

A setting means such as a CPU 103 that executes a setting value change process S6A, which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values, such as values from 1 to 6, which have different advantages for the player, is provided. It is possible to perform a setting suggestion performance such as a presentation using production execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12, in which a suggestion regarding the setting of the means is displayed in a specific manner, and the image displayed by the setting suggestion performance is drawn by a specific drawing process. It may also be possible to display images. As a result, it is possible to appropriately ensure the visibility of the image, and to make it possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In the second period, it may be possible to perform an effect in which the image is temporarily stopped and displayed in the case of the second pattern, such as a specific drawing effect using the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02. Thereby, while preventing an increase in data capacity, it is possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In the second period, it may be possible to alternately display an image drawn using image data and a monochrome image in the case of the second pattern, as in the production execution examples 02AKM21 to 02AKM28. Thereby, while preventing an increase in data capacity, it is possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

For example, the variable display of the identification information image, such as the variable display of decorative patterns in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the small pattern in the small pattern display area 01AKC1, for example. It is possible to variably display a reduced identification information image in a form that is smaller than the identification information image, for example, as shown in Figure 9-5, the identification information image can be displayed by specific drawing processing. The reduced identification information image may be drawn and displayed using normal drawing processing. As a result, it is possible to appropriately ensure the visibility of the image, and to make it possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The configuration regarding the characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK may be combined with some or all of the configurations regarding the characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK, the configuration regarding the characteristic portion 60AK, etc., as appropriate. For example, in a configuration in which an operation performance to be executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed can be executed as a setting suggestion performance that is an operation performance in a suggestion performance mode, in a display period of a character image added to one moving image, the first component and the second component can be changed, or a character image using data regarding a common character image is added to the first video image and a second video image different from the first video image. In a configuration in which images can be displayed using a specific layer, a special layer can be drawn using a specific drawing process to display an effect image, and a special layer with a higher priority than the specific layer may be drawn using a normal drawing process. It may be possible to display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game, and in a second period after the first period, it is possible to display an image drawn by normal drawing processing in the case of the first pattern, It may be possible to display an image drawn by specific drawing processing when the second pattern has a different ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state than the first pattern.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 75SG)
Next, the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001 having the feature section 75SG in this embodiment will be described based on FIGS. 10-1 to 10-26. FIG. 10-1 is a front view showing the pachinko game machine as the feature part 75SG. FIG. 10-2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine as the feature section 75SG. FIG. 10-3 is a front view showing the game board of the pachinko game machine as the feature section 75SG. FIG. 10-4 is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 10-3. In the following description, the direction in which the player is located is defined as the front of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001, and the opposite direction is defined as the rear. Further, the explanation will be made based on the up, down, left and right directions as seen from the player located in front of the pachinko game machine 75SG001. Furthermore, the same reference numerals are given to the same parts as in the embodiment described above, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4, the pachinko game machine 75SG001 includes a game board 2 (also referred to as a gauge board 2) that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame 3 (also referred to as a gauge board 2) that supports and fixes the game board 2. (also referred to as underframe 3). A game area Y is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired and hit into this game area Y from a predetermined ball launcher. In addition, a glass door frame 50 having a glass window 50a is rotatably provided on the gaming machine frame 3 around the left side, and the gaming area Y can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 50. When the glass door frame 50 is closed, the game area Y can be seen through the glass window 50a.

The game board 2 is made of a transparent (transparent) synthetic resin material such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, or methacrylic resin, and has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has obstacle nails (not shown) on the front surface of the game board. , a guide rail 211, an outer rail decoration 212, etc. are provided, and a spacer member 201 is integrally attached to the back side of the board 200. The game board 2 is made of a non-transparent material such as a plywood board and has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. It may be configured as follows.

An opening 2c is formed in the board 200 and spacer member 201 of the game board 2, and the display area of the image display device 5 provided at a position away from the game board 2 on the back side can be viewed from the player's side through the opening 2c. It can be viewed from the front side. Further, an area in the display area of the image display device 5 that overlaps with the board 200 is made visible through the board 200.

In addition, a center decorative frame 51 is attached to the opening 2c of the board 200, and the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51, the guide rail 211, and the outer rail decoration 212 is the downstream area of the game ball in the game area Y. has been done. Furthermore, a light guide plate device 500, which will be described later, is provided at a position corresponding to the opening 2c surrounded by the center decorative frame 51.

A first presentation unit 300 is provided at the lower position on the back side of the board 200, i.e., below the image display device 5. A second presentation unit 400 is provided to the right of the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51, i.e., at a position corresponding to the right side of the display area of the image display device 5. A third presentation unit 600 is provided at the top of the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51, i.e., at a position corresponding to the top of the display area of the image display device 5. A fourth presentation unit 800 is provided at the upper left position on the back side of the board 200, i.e., at the upper left position of the image display device 5. In addition, a variable winning ball unit 700 is provided at the lower right position of the board 200, where game balls flowing down the game area Y can win a prize.

The first production unit 300 and the fourth production unit 800 are provided on the back side of the board 200, so that they can be seen through the board 200 from the player side (the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001). ing. On the other hand, the second presentation unit 400 and the third presentation unit 600 are located at least in front of the game board surface, which is the front surface of the board board 200, and are arranged in the opening 2c, so that the light guide plate device It is visible from the player side through the light guide plate 501 of 500.

(Light guide plate device 500)
Next, the light guide plate device 500 will be explained based on FIGS. 10-5 and 10-6. FIG. 10-5 is a front view showing the light guide plate device. 10-6, (A) is an enlarged front view showing the main parts of the light guide plate device, (B) is a BB sectional view of (A), and (C) is an enlarged view showing the main parts of (B). It is. Note that here, to aid understanding, the light-emitting region 506 is shown in dots (halftone dots), and the non-light-emitting region 507 without dots (halftone dots) is shown in white.

As shown in FIGS. 10-5 and 10-6, the light guide plate device 500 includes a light guide plate 501 that is provided so as to be closed except for the right side and lower area of the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51; An LED board 503 on which a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 502 are mounted for inputting light into the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501, and a condenser for condensing the light from the light guide plate LEDs 502 toward the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501. It mainly has an optical lens 504. Note that the light guide plate device 500 is supported by a base member (not shown) fixed to the back surface of the game board 2 and the center decorative frame 51.

The light guide plate 501 is a plate member made of a material such as transparent synthetic resin such as acrylic or polycarbonate and has a predetermined front-to-back width dimension (plate thickness = approximately 5 mm), and as shown in FIG. 10-4, It is arranged in front of the third presentation unit 600 and close to the glass window 50a.

The light guide plate 501 also includes a light emitting region 506 as a first region that forms a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects the light from the light guide plate LED 502 that is incident inside from the right end surface 501a forward and emits it from the front surface. , a light-emitting region that emits light by light that is incident inside from the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501 (see the halftone dot area in FIGS. 10-5 and 10-6 (A)), and A non-light emitting region 507 as a second region that does not form a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects the light from the light guide plate LED 502 forward and emits it from the front surface, that is, it does not emit light due to the light incident inside the light guide plate 501. and a non-emissive region (see the white region in FIGS. 10-5 and 10-6(A)).

The light emitting region 506 is formed so that a figure with a radial edge appears at approximately the center of the light guide plate 501. When light enters the inside of the light guide plate 501, the light emitting region 506 reflects the light and directs it forward. By emitting light, a predetermined image is displayed on the light guide plate 501 by emitting light.

As shown in FIGS. 10-6(B) and (C), the light emitting region 506 has a fine unevenness state so that the incident light from the light guide plate LED 502, which is incident inside from the right end surface 501a, is guided and emitted from the front surface. It is formed on the back side (rough surface). Specifically, the light emitting region 506 is formed into an uneven state (rough surface) having a substantially semicircular shape with a constant pitch in a cross-sectional view when viewed from the side in the direction in which light travels. In FIG. 10-6(C), the uneven state (rough surface) is enlarged to help understanding, but the actual light-emitting region 506 is so small that it is difficult to see it with the naked eye. The surface is uneven.

When light enters the inside from the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501, a predetermined image (still image) is displayed on the light guide plate 501 by a dot pattern consisting of a plurality of recesses 510 formed in the light emitting area 506 (see FIG. (See halftone area in 10-5). In other words, the light emitting region 506 as a first region that forms a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects the light from the light guide plate LED 502 that enters the inside from the right end surface 501a forward and emits it from the front surface is formed from the plurality of recesses 510. This is a region where a dot pattern is formed, and is a non-second region where a predetermined light guide pattern is not formed, in which the light from the light guide plate LED 502 that enters inside from the right end surface 501a is reflected forward and emitted from the front surface. The light emitting area 507 is an area where a dot pattern consisting of a plurality of recesses 510 is not formed. Further, in the characteristic portion 75SG, a predetermined image (figure) is exemplified as display information that can be displayed by the light guide plate 501, but in addition to these, decorations such as pictures, characters, symbols, designs, or patterns are also used. It may also be possible to display other display information.

When no light is incident on the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501, the entire light guide plate 501, including the light emitting area 506, is colorless and transparent, and the image displayed on the rear image display device 5, as well as the second performance unit 400 and the third performance unit 600, can be seen (see-through) from the front of the light guide plate 501. When light is incident on the right end surface 501a, the light emitting area 506 emits light, but the areas other than the light emitting area 506 remain colorless and transparent.

Note that in the characteristic portion 75SG, the light emitting region 506 is formed in an uneven state having a substantially semicircular shape, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the light emitting region 506 is formed on a light guide plate by a stamper or injection 501 may be constructed using a molding method in which an uneven portion is formed on the back surface (rear surface). In addition, the reflective part can be constructed using a silk printing method in which reflective dots are printed with white ink on an acrylic plate, an adhesive dot method in which an acrylic plate and a reflective plate are attached with dot-shaped adhesive material, or a groove processing method. It's okay.

Note that in the characteristic portion 75SG, the shape of each unevenness of the light emitting region 506 on the back surface (rear surface) of the light guide plate 501 is approximately semicircular in cross-sectional view, but the present invention is not limited to this. The cross-sectional shape of each unevenness of the light emitting region 506 can be modified in various ways, such as a substantially triangular shape, as long as it constitutes a reflective surface that can reflect light toward the front (front surface).

The condensing lens 504 is formed of a light-transmitting member such as acrylic or polycarbonate into a long plate shape extending in the vertical direction. On the surface of the light guide plate 501 side of the condenser lens 504, a plurality of semicircular convex portions 504A that bulge toward the light guide plate 501 side when viewed from the front are formed continuously in the vertical direction. The condenser lens 504 is composed of a single member integrally provided with a plurality of convex portions 504A. One convex portion 504A is formed corresponding to each of the light guide plate LEDs 502.

Note that the convex portions 504A are not limited to one-to-one correspondence to the light guide plate LEDs 502, and for example, one convex portion 504A may correspond to two or more light guide plate LEDs 502. Furthermore, the condenser lens 504 is not limited to being composed of a single member in which a plurality of convex portions 504A are integrally provided. May be used.

As shown in FIG. 10-6(C), the longitudinal width of the condenser lens 504 on the light guide plate 501 side is smaller than the longitudinal width of the condenser lens 504 on the light guide plate LED 502 side. Furthermore, the front-rear width of the light guide plate 501 side of the condenser lens 504 is approximately the same as the front-rear width of the light-receiving surface of the light guide plate 501, so that the light emitted from the condenser lens 504 is diffused in the front-rear direction. The light is incident on the light guide plate 501 without any light leakage.

The front surface of the condensing lens 504 is a flat inclined surface that gradually inclines rearward from the light guide plate LED 502 side toward the light guide plate 501 side, and the rear surface of the condensing lens 504 is formed from the light guide plate LED 502 side to the light guide plate 501 side. It is a flat slope that gradually slopes forward toward the 501 side. That is, the condensing lens 504 is formed in a tapered shape whose thickness gradually decreases from the light guide plate LED 502 side toward the light guide plate 501 side.

Further, a slight gap is provided between the condenser lens 504 and the light guide plate 501. For example, the distance between the gaps is large enough to prevent the condenser lens 504 and the light guide plate 501 from coming into contact even if vibration occurs during transportation or use of the pachinko game machine 75SG001. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the condenser lens 504 and the light guide plate 501 from being damaged by vibrations that occur during transportation or use of the pachinko game machine 75SG001.

Next, the light guide state of the light emitted from the light guide plate LED 502 will be explained. The light emitted from each light guide plate LED 502 is incident on a condenser lens 504 . Here, since the incident surface of the condenser lens 504 is formed in a curved shape to form a lens surface, even if the light emitted from the light guide plate LED 502 has high directivity, it enters the condenser lens 504. The light is radially diffused in the left-right direction within the condenser lens 504. Then, when the light incident on the condenser lens 504 passes through the inner curved lens surface, it is refracted toward the right and exits.

As a result, even if the light emitted from the light guide plate LEDs 502 has high directivity, the light emitted from the light guide plate LEDs 502 can be diffused radially to some extent by the condenser lens 504, making it possible to expand the light-emitting area in the light guide plate 501. In addition, since the light emitted from the condenser lens 504 is guided in the horizontal direction (since the light is prevented from spreading radially), only the parts corresponding to each light guide plate LED 502 can be made to emit light. In addition, the light incident on the condenser lens 504 from the light guide plate LEDs 502 is condensed toward approximately the center position in the front-to-back direction while repeatedly undergoing total reflection in the front-to-back direction, and is finally emitted from the end face of the condenser lens 504 on the light guide plate 501 side (the part with the smallest front-to-back width).

With such a configuration, the light from the light guide plate LED 502 can be focused and guided to the light guide plate 501 without being diffused in the front-back direction. In particular, even if the front-to-back width of the light-emitting surface of the light guide plate LED 502 is larger than the front-to-back width of the light guide plate LED 502 side of the condenser lens 504, the light guide plate can be used without diffusing the light from the light guide plate LED 502 in the front-back direction. 501, it is possible to prevent the light from the light guide plate LED 502 from being diffused to the surroundings.

When the light from the condenser lens 504 is guided into the light guide plate 501 and reaches the light emitting region 506, the light is reflected toward the front side (the player's side) at the light emitting region 506. As a result, when viewed from the player, the light emitting region 506 of the light guide plate 501 emits light due to the reflected light, so that the area represented by halftone dots in FIG. 10-5 emits light from the front surface of the light guide plate 501. The shape will now be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 10-4, when viewed from the player (in the front-back direction), the image display device 5 is placed at the back, and the light guide plate device 500 is placed at the front. When viewed from the player, the image display device 5 has a horizontally long rectangular shape. For example, the image display device 5 uses a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal panel. Note that the image display device 5 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be an EL display device such as an organic EL display device or an inorganic EL display device.

(First performance unit 300)
Next, the first performance unit 300 will be described based on Fig. 10-7 to Fig. 10-12. Fig. 10-7 (A) is a front view showing the first performance unit, and (B) is a rear view. Fig. 10-8 is an exploded perspective view showing the configuration of the first performance unit as seen from the diagonal front. Fig. 10-9 (A) is a CC cross-sectional view of Fig. 10-7 (A), (B) is a D-D cross-sectional view of Fig. 10-7 (A), and (C) is an E-E cross-sectional view of Fig. 10-7 (A). Fig. 10-10 (A) is a front view showing the base member, (B) is a front view showing the LED board, and (C) is a front view showing the cover member. Fig. 10-11 (A) is a front view showing the first performance unit with the cover member removed, and (B) is a front view showing the first performance unit with the cover member attached. Fig. 10-12 is an enlarged view showing the main part of Fig. 10-11 (B).

As shown in Figures 10-7 to 10-9, the first performance unit 300 is mainly composed of a base member 301, a cover member 302 that is arranged to cover the front side of the base member 301 and is attached to the base member 301 with multiple screws N1, and an LED board 303 that is attached to the front side of the base member 301 with multiple screws N2, and is arranged so that it can be seen through the glass window 50a and the panel panel 200 from the front of the pachinko game machine 75SG001, that is, from the player side facing the pachinko game machine 75SG001.

The base member 301 is made of a non-transparent synthetic resin material and has a horizontally elongated shape when viewed from the front, and its surfaces (front and rear surfaces and peripheral surfaces) are black. The front surface of the base member 301 includes a flat part 311 made of a flat surface, a recessed part 312 formed at the lower part of the flat part 311 and having a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a rear wall part 313A located slightly behind the flat part 311. 313D.

On the upper part of the flat part 311, a plurality of trapezoidal convex parts 314A to 314E, which form part of a decorative pattern 331 to be described later, are formed in the longitudinal direction. The parts 313A to 313D can be visually recognized. Note that the rear wall portions 313A to 313D are formed so as to be inclined upward and rearward (see FIG. 10-9(B)). Furthermore, a predetermined decorative pattern 341 is engraved on the front surface of the rear wall portions 313A to 313D.

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the recess 312 has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, has a depth sufficient to accommodate the LED board 303, and is formed so that it is surrounded by the flat portion 311 when viewed from the front. When the LED board 303 is attached, the front surface of the LED board 303 and the flat portion 311 are substantially flush with each other, and only the first performance LED 304 described below is located forward of the flat portion 311. The recess 312 also has a number of vertically long heat dissipation holes 315 and an opening 316 for routing a cable (not shown) connected to the LED board 303 to the back side.

As shown in FIGS. 10-8 and 10-9, the front surface of the LED board 303 is equipped with a plurality of first performance LEDs 304 that can emit light forward and a plurality of other electronic components (not shown). At the same time, a plurality of printed wirings 320 are formed (see the enlarged view of FIG. 10-10(B)). On the other hand, on the back side of the LED board 303, a board-side connector CN for connecting a cable (not shown) to the LED board 303 and electronic components (not shown) are mounted. Further, the surface of the LED board 303 (the insulating portion excluding the printed wiring 320 on the front and back surfaces) is black.

The cover member 302 is formed of a translucent (transparent) synthetic resin material in a horizontally elongated shape when viewed from the front, and includes a first translucent portion 321 corresponding to a part of the flat portion 311 and the recessed portion 312 of the base member 301; It mainly has second light-transmitting parts 322A and 322B corresponding to the first performance LED 304. Furthermore, a plurality of trapezoidal protrusions 324A to 324E are formed in the longitudinal direction at positions corresponding to the protrusions 314A to 314E of the base member 301.

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the front surfaces of the second transparent parts 322A and 322B protrude forward from the front surface of the first transparent part 321, and a recessed part 322D is formed on the back surface. It is possible to accommodate the first performance LED 304. In addition, a light diffusing part 322C consisting of a fine uneven part is formed on the back surface of the second light-transmitting part 322A, 322B, and can diffuse the light from the first LED 304 for effect at the rear and emit it forward. ing. Note that the uneven portion may be formed by, for example, sandblasting or diamond cutting, and the forming method, shape, etc. can be changed in various ways.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-10(C), the first light-transmitting portion 321 is provided with a plurality of decorative patterns 331 each having a hexagonal shape when viewed from the front. Specifically, one decorative pattern 331 has a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, with a decorative portion 331A consisting of a plurality of horizontal lines extending in the left-right direction, and decorative portions 331B and 331C consisting of inclined lines extending diagonally to the left and diagonally to the right. It has a decorative part 331D and a decorative part 331E having a triangular shape when viewed from the front, and by sharing the decorative parts 331A to 331C with adjacent decorative patterns 331, a plurality of decorative patterns 331 are continuously provided. .

In addition, each of these decorative parts 331A to 331E can be formed by, for example, performing sandblasting on the back (or front) of the cover member 302 to form fine irregularities, or pasting a translucent sticker or the like. As a result, each of the decorative parts 331A to 331E appears milky white or translucent when viewed from the player's side.

As shown in FIG. 10-11(A), an LED board 303 as an electronic component having a first presentation LED 304 is placed on the front side of the base member 301, and the front side is covered with a cover member 302. ing. However, since the cover member 302 is made of a transparent synthetic resin material, it is not possible for the player to see the front surface of the base member 301 and the LED board 303 through the cover member 302. be.

Here, by disposing the same black base member 301 around (around) the black LED board 303, the LED board 303 is assimilated with the surrounding base member 301, and the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 The boundary part BD with BD is difficult to understand. In other words, it becomes difficult to see that the LED board 303 is provided on a part of the front surface of the base member 301, so that the LED board 303, which is an electronic component, becomes less noticeable.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-11(B), when the cover member 302 is attached to the front side of the base member 301 with the LED board 303 placed in the recess 312 of the base member 301, the base member 301 and the LED board The cover member 302 is in a high position so as to cover the front surface of the base member 301 and the LED board 303, and the front surface of the base member 301 and the LED board 303 can be easily seen from the player side through the first light-transmitting part 321. As for the first performance LED 304, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it through the second light-transmitting portions 322A, 322B. In addition, by placing the milky white or translucent decorative parts 331A to 331E on the cover member 302 on the front side of the base member 301 and the LED board 303, the milky white or semitransparent decorative parts 331A to 331E applied to the cover member 302 are arranged on the front side of the base member 301 and the LED board 303, so that the milky white or semitransparent decorative parts 331A to 331E applied to the cover member 302 are arranged on the front side of the base member 301 and the LED board 303. The decorative pattern 331 can be visually recognized.

As shown in FIG. 10-12, when the cover member 302 is placed on the front side of the base member 301, a specific decorative pattern 331 (for example, decorative patterns 331J to 331M in FIG. 10-12) among the multiple decorative patterns 331 is formed (provided) so as to straddle the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 when viewed from the player's side. In more detail, the decorative parts 331B and 331C consisting of inclined lines are arranged so as to intersect with the boundary part BD between the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 facing in the left-right direction, and one decorative pattern 331 is provided across two members (the LED board 303 and the cover member 302). As the one decorative pattern 331 appears to be provided on one member, it becomes difficult to recognize that the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 on the back side are separate members.

In addition, part of the boundary BD between the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 is difficult for the player to see due to the decorative parts 331B, 331C that overlap the front side, making the LED board 303 less noticeable. Note that because the decorative parts 331B, 331C are linear, even if they are positioned to overlap the front side of the boundary BD, the area that overlaps with the boundary BD is small. However, because the decorative pattern 331 is formed over almost the entire front area of the LED board 303 and the cover member 302, it becomes difficult to recognize that the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 are separate members.

In addition, the decorative part 331A of each decorative pattern 331 is arranged substantially parallel to the boundary part BD, so that it is difficult to distinguish because the aspect is similar to the boundary part BD. If the LED board 303 is milky white and has a brightness higher than black, it will be noticeable, and the LED board 303 will be less noticeable. Note that by arranging the decorative portions 331A so as to overlap along the boundary portion BD, a part of the boundary portion BD may be made difficult to be visually recognized from the player side by the decorative portions 331A.

In addition, these decorative parts 331A to 331C are formed in a linear shape in the same way as the printed wiring 320 provided on the LED board 303, and are arranged substantially parallel to a part of the printed wiring 320, so that the printed wiring Since the wiring pattern 320 and the wiring pattern 320 are similar (or common), it becomes difficult to tell them apart, so that the LED board 303 becomes difficult to stand out.

Furthermore, although the decorative parts 331D and 331E are different in appearance from the printed wiring 320 and the boundary part BD, they are thicker and larger in area than the printed wiring 320 and the boundary part BD, so they are more noticeable than the printed wiring 320 and the boundary part BD. In addition, a portion of the printed wiring 320 is overlapped with the front side of the printed wiring 320, making it difficult to visually recognize the printed wiring 320, thereby making the LED board 303 less noticeable.

Furthermore, on the front surface of each of the rear wall sections 313A to 313D of the base member 301, a decorative pattern 341 consisting of vertically flat hexagonal linear protrusions is provided so as to be visible from the player side. The decorative pattern 341 is similar (or common) in aspect to the wiring pattern of the printed wiring 320, so that the aspect is similar to the wiring pattern of the printed wiring 320 even in an area of the base member 301 that is not covered with the cover member 302. Since the decorative pattern 341 can be formed, the LED board 303 becomes less noticeable.

Further, the base member 301 has rear wall portions 313A to 313D as predetermined areas that can be viewed from the player side without seeing through the cover member 302. By providing the decorative pattern 341 as a predetermined decorative pattern that is the same or similar in aspect to the decorative pattern 331, it becomes difficult to tell that the base member 301 and the cover member 302 are different members. 303 becomes less noticeable.

Further, since the LED board 303 is disposed in the recess 312 formed at the lower part of the base member 301, the LED board 303 is located below the upper region of the recess 312 in the base member 301, that is, at a position spaced apart from the image display device 5. This makes it less noticeable since it is located away from the image display device 5, which is the focus of the player's attention.

In this way, a predetermined decorative pattern 331 (for example, decorative patterns 331J to 331M in FIG. 10-12) among the plurality of decorative patterns 331 is connected to the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 when viewed from the player side. By straddling the LED board 303, which is an electronic component, it becomes less noticeable. Therefore, even electronic components such as the LED board 303 that you would not normally want to show to the player from the perspective of appearance and design, can be placed on the front side where they can be seen by the player, increasing the degree of design freedom. can be increased.

(Variable winning ball unit 700)
Next, the variable winning ball unit 700 will be briefly explained based on FIGS. 10-13. 10-13, (A) is a front view showing the variable winning ball unit, and (B) is a FF sectional view of (A).

As shown in FIG. 10-13, the variable winning ball unit 700 has a base member 701 attached to the board 200 from the front side, and a cover member 702 provided on the front side of the base member 701. The device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 are configured as an integrated unit.

A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided at the upper right of the variable winning ball unit 700, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided at the lower left. In between, there is a game ball path 705A that allows a game ball (game ball P) to enter the big winning hole of the special variable winning ball device 7, and a game ball (game ball P) that can enter the second starting winning hole of the variable winning ball device 6B. A game ball path 705B through which players P) can enter is provided. Further, below the special variable winning ball device 7, an LED board 703 is provided with a plurality of performance LEDs 704 that can emit light forward.

The base member 701 and the cover member 702 are made of a synthetic resin material having translucency. Therefore, the game balls passing through the game ball paths 705A, 705B can be visually recognized from the player side through the cover plate 702A.

(First performance unit 300 and variable winning ball unit 700)
Next, the first performance unit 300 and the variable winning ball unit 700 will be explained based on Fig. 10-14 to Fig. 10-16. Fig. 10-14 (A) and (B) are cross-sectional views showing the main parts of the first performance unit, and (C) and (D) are cross-sectional views showing the main parts of the variable winning ball unit. Fig. 10-15 is a diagram for comparing the first performance unit and the variable winning ball unit. Fig. 10-16 is a diagram for explaining similar colors.

First, as shown in FIG. 10-3, the first production unit 300 and the variable winning ball unit 700 are arranged side by side below the image display device 5, and when viewed from the player's side, The right end of the one performance unit 300 is provided so as to overlap or be close to the left end of the variable winning ball unit 700. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-4 and 10-13(B), the front part of the variable winning ball unit 700 is placed on the front side of the board 200, while the first production unit 300 is located on the front side of the board 200. It is located on the back side of.

As shown in FIGS. 10-14(A) and (B), the front-rear dimension L1A, which is the plate thickness dimension of the cover member 302 in the first transparent part 321 of the first presentation unit 300, is the second transparent part 322A, 322B. It is longer than the front-rear dimension L1B, which is the plate thickness dimension of the cover member 302 (L1A>L1B).

In the first light transmitting portion 321 of the cover member 302, among the light that enters from the front in a direction (T direction) perpendicular to the front surface of the first light transmitting portion 321, the transmittance of light transmitted in the T direction is XA %. In addition, in the second light transmitting portions 322A and 322B of the cover member 302, among the light that enters from the front in a direction (T direction) orthogonal to the front surface of the second light transmitting portions 322A and 322B, light that is transmitted in the T direction is transmitted. The light transmittance is XB%. In other words, not all (100%) of the light that enters the first transparent section 321 and the second transparent sections 322A, 322B from the front is transmitted in the T direction, and some light may be reflected at the front surface. , is emitted at the rear in a direction different from the T direction (so that it spreads out to the surroundings). In particular, the second light transmitting parts 322A and 322B have a light diffusing part 322C made of uneven parts formed on the back surface, so that light can more easily transmit in a direction different from the T direction than the first light transmitting part 321. , the transmittance of light in the T direction is lower than the transmittance of the first light transmitting portion 321 (low transmittance; XA%>XB%).

As shown in FIGS. 10-14(C) and (D), in the cover plate 702A, among the light that enters from the front in the direction perpendicular to the front surface (T direction), the transmittance of the light transmitted in the T direction is Y %. Here, the front-to-back dimension L2 of the cover plate 702A is shorter than the front-to-back dimensions L1A, L1B of the first light-transmitting part 321 and the second light-transmitting parts 322A, 322B of the cover member 302 (L2<L1A, L2<L1B), the light incident from the front is guided in the T direction inside and difficult to be diffused to the surroundings before being emitted from the back, and there is no light diffusing part like the second light transmitting part 322A, 322B. Since it is a flat plate, the light transmittance of the cover plate 702A in the T direction is higher than the light transmittance of the cover member 302 in the T direction (Y%>XA%, Y%>XB%).

In other words, since the light transmittance of the cover member 302 is lower than that of the cover plate 702A, a predetermined portion on the back side of the cover plate 702A (for example, When viewing a predetermined portion (for example, the first performance LED 304 or LED board 303) on the back side of the cover member 302 from the player side through the cover member 302, than when viewing the ball P). Since the visibility is low, the LED board 303 including the first presentation LED 304, which is an electronic component, becomes less noticeable.

As shown in FIG. 10-15, the first effect unit 300 has the same color (black) as the LED board 303 including the first effect LED 304, which is an electronic component, and the base member 301 arranged around it. , the LED board 303 is less noticeable. Further, the front and rear dimensions L1A and L1B of the cover member 302 of the first production unit 300 are longer than the front and rear dimension L2 of the cover plate 702A of the variable winning ball unit 700 (L1A, L1B>L2), and the first production unit The light transmittance (XA%, XA%) of the cover member 302 of 300 in the T direction is lower than the light transmittance (Y%) of the cover member 702 of the variable winning ball unit 700 in the T direction. (Y%>XA%, Y%>XB%), the LED board 303 is less noticeable.

Therefore, when the first production unit 300 and the variable winning ball unit 700 provided at a different position (on the right side) from the first production unit 300 are viewed from the player side, the player can see through the cover member 702. Since the visibility when viewing the LED board 303 through the cover member 302 is lower than the visibility when viewing the game ball P, the variable winning ball unit 700 located near the first production unit 300 Compared to this, the LED board 303 placed on the back side of the cover member 302, which is a light-transmitting member, appears to be more difficult to see. Further, since the cover member 302 is arranged closer to the back side than the cover plate 702A, and the base member 301 and the LED board 303 are dark black, the LED board 303 becomes more inconspicuous.

Further, in the characteristic part 75SG of the present embodiment, the LED board 303, which is an electronic component, and the base member 301, which is a specific member disposed around it, are of the same color (black), but the present invention The electronic component and the specific member do not have to be of the same color; for example, the electronic component and the specific member may have the same color or similar color.

Colors have three attributes: hue (color), lightness (brightness), and saturation (vividness). A combination of colors that have the same tone (hue group with the same brightness and saturation) and are adjacent in hue (adjacent colors); 2. A combination of different tones but the same hue; 3. Includes combinations of colors that differ only in brightness or saturation.

Here, an example of "1. Combination of colors (adjacent colors) that have the same tone (hue group with the same brightness (brightness) and saturation (vividness)) and are adjacent in terms of hue" is shown in Figure 10-16. To explain based on this, when the three primary colors of colorants, cyan (C), magenta (M), and yellow (Y), are arranged at angular intervals of 120 degrees on a hue wheel of a predetermined number (here, 24 colors), Each of the three colors is a non-similar color to each other. Colors that have a hue difference within the angle range of 30 to 60 degrees on the hue wheel are "similar colors," and are not limited to combinations of adjacent colors on the hue wheel.

For example, if cyan (C) is used as the standard color, colors that belong to the range of 30 degrees to the magenta (M) side and 30 degrees to the yellow (Y) side (60 degrees in total) are similar to cyan (C), When magenta (M) is used as the reference color, colors that belong to the range of 30 degrees to the cyan (C) side and 30 degrees to the yellow (Y) side (60 degrees in total) are similar colors to magenta (M), and yellow ( When Y) is used as a reference color, colors belonging to a range of 30 degrees to the cyan (C) side and 30 degrees to the magenta (M) side (60 degrees in total) are similar colors to yellow (Y). Therefore, even if the number of colors on the hue wheel is less than 24 or more than 24, a combination of colors that have a hue difference within the angle range of 30 to 60 degrees on the hue wheel may be regarded as "similar colors."

Similar colors are combinations of warm colors such as red and yellow, which are chromatic colors that make you feel warm, and cool colors, which are chromatic colors that make you feel cold, such as blue and purple, as well as colors such as green and purple. It is preferable to include a combination of colors included in neutral colors, which are chromatic colors located between warm colors and cool colors.

(Second production unit 400)
Next, the second effect unit 400 will be explained based on FIGS. 10-17 to 10-19. 10-17, (A) is a front view showing the second presentation unit, and (B) is a front view showing the second presentation unit with the cover member removed. In FIGS. 10-18, (A) is a GG sectional view of FIG. 10-17(A), and (B) is a HH sectional view of FIG. 10-17(A). 10-19, (A) is a diagram explaining the boundary between the base member and the LED board, and (B) is a diagram showing the configuration of the second effect unit.

As shown in FIGS. 10-17 and 10-18, the second effect unit 400 includes a base member 401, a cover member 402 arranged to cover the front side of the base member 401, and a front surface of the base member 401. It mainly consists of an LED board 403 attached to the LED board 403 and an inner lens 405 arranged on the front side of the LED board 403.As shown in FIG. It is provided so that it can be seen through the glass window 50a and the light guide plate 501 from the front of the pachinko game machine 75SG001, that is, from the player's side facing the pachinko game machine 75SG001.

The base member 401 is made of a non-transparent synthetic resin material and has a substantially half-moon shape when viewed from the front, and its surfaces (front and rear surfaces and circumferential surface) are white.

The LED board 403 has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front end of a boss protruding from the front surface of the base member 401. A plurality of second performance LEDs 404A, 404B and other electronic components (not shown) are mounted on the front surface of the LED board 403. Further, on the back side of the LED board 403, there are a plurality of second effect LEDs 404C that can emit light upward, a plurality of second effect LEDs 404D that can emit light downward, and other electronic components (not shown). ) are installed. The second presentation LEDs 404A to 404D are angle-type LEDs that can emit light parallel or substantially parallel to the mounting surface of the LED board 403. Further, the surface of the LED board 403 (the insulating portion excluding the printed wiring on the front and back surfaces) is white.

The inner lens 405 is made of a synthetic resin material having translucency, is formed in substantially the same shape as the LED board 403, and includes a plurality of second performance LEDs 404A arranged along the upper side of the front surface of the LED board 403; It is arranged between a plurality of second performance LEDs 404B arranged along the lower side of the front surface of the LED board 403, and the light from the second performance LEDs 404A is incident on the front end surface, and the light from the second performance LEDs 404B is The light is made incident on the rear end surface.

As shown in FIG. 10-18(A), on the back side of the inner lens 405, the light incident from the second performance LEDs 404A and 404B is reflected forward by a reflecting portion 406. The light is emitted substantially uniformly forward from the entire front surface of the inner lens 405. Since the front surface of the inner lens 405 is a flat surface, it emits light from the surface like a light guide plate.

The reflecting portion 406 is formed into an uneven state (rough surface) in which a cross-sectional view in the traveling direction of the light guided inside the inner lens 405 has a substantially triangular wave shape with a constant pitch. Specifically, the inner lens 405 is constructed using a molding method in which uneven parts are created on the back surface of the inner lens 405 using a stamper or injection. The reflective portion may be constructed by an adhesive dot method in which a dot-shaped adhesive material is attached to the plate, a groove processing method, or the like.

The cover member 402 is made of a light-transmitting (transparent) synthetic resin material and has a box shape with an open back, and is formed to be able to cover the front sides of the base member 401 and the LED board 403. At a position corresponding to the LED board 403 on the front surface of the cover member 402, a convex portion 410 having a shape that is a slightly enlarged version of the LED board 403 when viewed from the front is provided to protrude forward.

On the front surface of the convex portion 410, a decorative portion 420 consisting of the letter “V” (logotype) is printed with a colored paint having a translucent property, or a translucent sheet on which letters are printed is pasted. Due to this, etc., it is provided to be able to transmit light. Furthermore, a light diffusing section 402A consisting of a concave and convex section is formed on the back surface of the convex section 410, so that the light from the inner lens 405 can be diffused and emitted forward.

In an area above the convex portion 410 on the back surface of the cover member 402, a plurality of convex stripes 421A protruding toward the back side are provided to extend in the vertical direction at positions corresponding to the respective second performance LEDs 404C. Further, in the lower region of the convex portion 410 on the back surface of the cover member 402, a plurality of convex stripes 421B protruding toward the back side are provided to extend in the vertical direction at positions corresponding to the respective second presentation LEDs 404D. Note that a light diffusing portion made of an uneven portion may also be formed in a portion of the back surface of the cover member 402 where the protruding stripes 421A and 421B are not formed. Further, the cover member 402 is formed so as to be inclined rearward upwardly and downwardly from the convex portion 410.

The plurality of protrusions 421A, 421B have uneven parts continuously formed on the rear end surface, and a stepped part 421C is formed at a midway position in the longitudinal direction, and extends upward and downward from the protrusion 410. By extending so as to be inclined to the rear side, the light emitted upward and downward from the second presentation LEDs 404C and 404D can enter from these uneven parts and the stepped part 421C, and also The emitted light is diffused by the uneven portion and emitted forward.

In this way, in the second effect unit 400, when the second effect LEDs 404A and 404B emit light, the light emitted from the second effect LEDs 404A and 404B is emitted forward by the inner lens 405, and the light is emitted from the convex portion of the cover member 402. By being incident on the region corresponding to the portion 410, the entire front surface of the convex portion 410 including the decorative portion 420 emits surface light.

As shown in FIG. 10-19(A), an LED board 403 as an electronic component having second presentation LEDs 404A to 404D is arranged on the front side of the base member 401, and the front side is covered with a cover member 402. Covered. However, since the cover member 402 is made of a synthetic resin material having translucency, it is assumed from the player's side that a light diffusing portion is formed in the cover member 402 at a portion other than the protruding stripes 421A and 421B. However, it is possible to visually recognize the front surface of the base member 401 and the LED board 403 through the parts other than the protrusions 421A and 421B.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-19(B), by disposing the same white base member 401 around (periphery) the white LED board 403, the LED board 403 is connected to the surrounding base member 401. As a result, the boundary BD between the LED board 403 and the cover member 402 becomes difficult to see. In other words, it becomes difficult to see that the LED board 403 is provided on a part of the front surface of the base member 401, so that the LED board 403, which is an electronic component, becomes less noticeable.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-19(A), the decorative portion 420 provided on the front surface of the convex portion 410 forms the boundary between the LED board 403, which is an electronic component, and the base member 401 when viewed from the player side. It is provided at a position corresponding to a part of the upper side and lower side of the portion BD. In other words, a part of the decorative part 420 is arranged so as to overlap (overlap) a part of the boundary part BD on the front side of the boundary part BD, so that a part of the boundary part BD is covered by the decorative part 420. By becoming less visible, the LED board 403 becomes less noticeable. Therefore, even electronic components such as the LED board 403 that you would not normally want to show to the player from the perspective of appearance and design, can be placed on the front side where the player can see them, which increases the degree of design freedom. can be increased.

Further, the decoration part 420 is provided so that the area covering (overlapping) the front side of the boundary part BD is larger than that of the decoration pattern 331 described above, and by making the boundary part BD difficult to see, the LED board 403 It makes it less noticeable.

In addition, in this embodiment, the decoration part 420 partially hangs (overlaps) at a position corresponding to a part of the upper side and a part of the lower side of the boundary part BD when viewed from the player side. The present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative portions 420 may be arranged at positions corresponding to all portions of the boundary portion BD. In addition, it is preferable to provide so that it may overlap about 1/3 or more of the boundary part BD.

Furthermore, since the letter “V” is displayed as a logotype on the decorative portion 420, it becomes difficult for the player to pay attention to the logotype and become aware of the boundary portion BD between the LED board 403 and the base member 401. Therefore, the LED board 403 becomes less noticeable.

In addition, in this embodiment, a form in which the letter "V" indicating a jackpot is applied as a logo type is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. ”, characters indicating a variable display result, characters indicating a jackpot such as “heat”, “fierce heat”, and “!!”, characters such as the model name of a game machine, a title, the name of a character appearing, etc. may also be used. Furthermore, in addition to characters, decorations such as characters, symbols, designs, pictures, patterns, etc. may be displayed as the decoration portion.

In addition, the LED board 403 has a second effect LED 404A as a light emitting means that can cause the decoration part 420 to emit light, so that the decoration part 420 stands out due to the light emission, so that the player can see the LED board 403 and the base member 401. Since it becomes difficult to be aware of the boundary portion BD with the LED board 403, the LED board 403 becomes less noticeable.

In addition, the second performance LED 404A is provided so that the decorative portion 420 can emit surface light through the inner lens 405, so that the player can see the LED board 403 because the decorative portion 420 stands out due to the surface emitted light. Since it becomes difficult to notice the boundary portion BD between the base member 401 and the LED board 403, the LED board 403 becomes less noticeable.

Further, in the present embodiment, the decorative portion 420 is a single decorative portion consisting of the letter “V”, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the convex portion 410 of the cover member 402 In the case where a plurality of decorative parts 420 are provided in a region of the cover member 402 and a plurality of predetermined decorative parts (for example, a pattern, etc.) different in form from the decorative part 420 are provided in a region other than the convex part 410 of the cover member 402, the plurality of decorative parts It is preferable that the number of decorative parts is larger than the plurality of predetermined decorative parts. By doing so, the boundary portion BD between the LED board 403 and the base member 401 is made difficult to see due to the plurality of decorative portions, and is more conspicuous than the plurality of predetermined decorative portions provided in other areas. Therefore, the LED board 403 becomes less noticeable.

In this case, it is sufficient that the plurality of decorative parts and the plurality of predetermined decorative parts are different in form; for example, the predetermined decorative part may be an enlarged form or a reduced form of the decorative part, or the external shape, shape, Any one of the colors, sizes, etc. may be different.

The cover member 402 also includes a convex portion 410 that is a boundary corresponding region corresponding to the boundary portion BD between the LED board 403 and the base member 401, and a convex portion 410 that does not correspond to the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 403 and the base member 401. The light transmittance of the convex portion 410 may be lower than the light transmittance of the region other than the convex portion 410. By doing so, the boundary BD between the LED board 403 and the base member 401 becomes difficult to see through the convex part 410 from the player, so that the LED board 403 becomes less noticeable.

(Third production unit 600 and fourth production unit 800)
Next, the third effect unit 600 and the fourth effect unit 800 will be explained based on FIGS. 10-20 to 10-26. 10-20, (A) is a front view showing the third presentation unit and the fourth presentation unit. 10-21, (A) is a sectional view taken along line II in FIG. 10-20, and (B) is a sectional view taken along line JJ in FIG. 10-20. FIG. 10-22 is a sectional view taken along line KK in FIG. 10-20. FIG. 10-23 is an explanatory diagram showing the visibility status of the third presentation unit and the fourth presentation unit. FIG. 10-24 is a diagram showing the configuration of the third performance unit and the fourth performance unit. FIG. 10-25 is a diagram showing a presentation mode when the third presentation unit and the fourth presentation unit emit light. FIGS. 10-26 are schematic front views showing (A) a state in which the third effect unit is located at the origin position, and (B) a state in which the third effect unit is located at the effect position.

(Third production unit 600)
As shown in FIGS. 10-20, 10-21(A), and 10-26, the third presentation unit 600 includes a base member 601 and a cover member disposed to cover the front side of the base member 601. 602, an LED board 603 attached to the front surface of the base member 601, and an inner lens 605 arranged on the front side of the LED board 603. ) and the performance motor 631 (see FIG. 10-2), which is a drive source that allows movement in the vertical direction between the origin position shown in FIG. 10-26(B) and the performance position shown in FIG. It has a power transmission member 632 for transmitting power to the light emitting production section 630, and as shown in FIG. 10-20, in the upper part of the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51, In other words, it is provided so as to be visible through the glass window 50a and the light guide plate 501 from the player's side facing the pachinko game machine 75SG001.

The base member 601 is made of a non-transparent synthetic resin material and has a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, and its surfaces (front and rear surfaces and circumferential surface) are white.

The LED board 603 has a generally trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front end of a vertical wall that projects from the front periphery of the base member 601 . On the front surface of the LED board 603, a plurality of third performance LEDs 604A, 604B and other electronic components (not shown) are mounted. The third performance LEDs 604A and 604B are capable of emitting light forward. Further, the surface of the LED board 603 (insulating portion excluding printed wiring on the front and back surfaces) is white. Note that the cable C connecting the LED board 603 and the production control board 12 is wired along the power transmission member 632 (see FIG. 10-26).

The inner lens 605 is made of a synthetic resin material having translucency, and is formed to have almost the same shape as the LED board 603, and allows the plurality of third effect LEDs 604A and 604B arranged on the front surface of the LED board 603 to be viewed from the front side. It is arranged to cover.

As shown in FIG. 10-21(A), the front and back surfaces of the inner lens 605 are provided with lights for diffusing and emitting the light from the third performance LEDs 604A and 604B arranged on the back side toward the front. The provision of a light diffusing section 605A consisting of a concavo-convex portion allows surface light to be emitted.

The cover member 602 is made of a light-transmitting (transparent) synthetic resin material and has a box shape with an open back, and is formed to be able to cover the front sides of the base member 601 and the LED board 603.

On the front surface of the cover member 602, a decorative portion 620 consisting of the letters "XXX" (logotype) is printed with a colored paint that is translucent, or a translucent sheet on which letters are printed is pasted. Due to this, etc., it is provided to be able to transmit light. Further, a light diffusing section 602A consisting of a concave and convex portion is formed on the back surface of the cover member 602, so that the light from the inner lens 605 can be diffused and emitted forward.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example is shown in which the characters "XXX" indicating a jackpot are applied as a logo type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and It may be characters such as the name of a character, characters indicating a variable display result such as "Jackpot", "BONUS", or "RUSH", or characters suggesting a jackpot such as "Heat", "Very Hot", or "!!". Furthermore, in addition to characters, decorations such as characters, symbols, designs, pictures, patterns, etc. may be displayed as the decoration portion.

In this way, when the third performance LEDs 604A, 604B of the third performance unit 600 emit light, the light emitted forward from the third performance LEDs 604A, 604B passes through the inner lens 605 and is further diffused and emitted forward through the cover member 602, causing the entire front area of the cover member 602, including the decorative portion 620, to emit light.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-20, the plurality of third effect LEDs 604A are arranged along the periphery of the letters "XXX" forming the decoration part 620, and the plurality of third effect LEDs 604B are It is arranged at a position that does not correspond to section 620. By arranging the plurality of third effect LEDs 604A along the periphery of the letters "XXX" forming the decoration part 620 in this way, when the third effect LEDs 604A emit light, the letters "XXX" Since the periphery of the characters is illuminated, the shape of the decorative portion 620 can be easily recognized.

In addition, the power transmission member 632, which constitutes a part of the power transmission member that transmits power to the light emission production section 630, is rotatably supported on a rotation axis with one end facing in the front-rear direction, and the other end emits light. The power transmission member of the arm member provided with the production section 630 can be changed in various ways, and may be a rack gear, a pinion gear, etc. as long as it can transmit power so that the light emission production section 630 can be moved in the vertical direction. There may be.

(4th production unit 800)
As shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21(B), the fourth presentation unit 800 includes a base member 801, a cover member 802 disposed to cover the front side of the base member 801, and a base member 802. It mainly consists of an LED board 803 attached to the front side of the LED board 801 and an inner lens 805 arranged on the front side of the LED board 803, and as shown in FIG. At the upper left part, it is provided so that it can be seen through the glass window 50a and the board 200 from the front of the pachinko game machine 75SG001, that is, from the side of the player facing the pachinko game machine 75SG001.

The base member 801 is formed of a non-transparent synthetic resin material into a box shape with an open front, and a portion of the periphery is formed into an arc shape along the guide rail 211 . Furthermore, the surfaces (front and rear surfaces and peripheral surfaces) are white.

The LED board 803 is formed to be smaller in front view than the base member 801, and is attached to the front end of a boss (not shown) erected on the front surface of the base member 801. On the front surface of the LED board 803, a plurality of fourth performance LEDs 804 and other electronic components (not shown) are mounted. The fourth presentation LEDs 804 are angle-type LEDs that can emit light parallel or substantially parallel to the mounting surface of the LED board 803, and are arranged in plural along the peripheral edge of the front surface of the LED board 803. Further, the surface of the LED board 803 (insulating portion excluding printed wiring on the front and back surfaces) is white.

The inner lens 805 is made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and is placed in an area surrounded by the plurality of fourth performance LEDs 804 on the front surface of the LED board 803.

As shown in FIG. 10-21(B), on the back side of the inner lens 805, the light incident from the fourth performance LED 804 is reflected forward by a reflecting portion 806 for reflecting the light forward. The light is emitted forward almost equally from the entire front surface of the inner lens 805. Since the front surface of the inner lens 805 is a flat surface, it emits light from a surface like a light guide plate.

The cover member 802 is made of a light-transmitting (transparent) synthetic resin material, and is formed to be able to cover the front side of the base member 801 and the LED board 803. Specifically, the cover member 802 does not cover the front end of the standing wall 801A along the guide rail 211 among the standing walls erected on the front periphery of the base member 801, and covers the front end of the standing wall 801B other than the part along the guide rail 211. Covers the front end. Further, a light diffusing section 802A consisting of an uneven portion is formed on the back surface of the cover member 802, so that the light from the inner lens 805 can be diffused and emitted forward.

In this way, in the fourth production unit 800, when the fourth production LED 804 emits light, the light emitted from the fourth production LED 804 forward through the inner lens 805 further passes through the cover member 802. By being diffused and emitted forward, the entire front surface of the cover member 802 emits surface light.

Next, the third presentation unit 600 and the fourth presentation unit 800 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 10-24, the third effect unit 600 and the fourth effect unit 800 have the surfaces of their respective base members 601, 801 and LED boards 603, 803 of the same color, which is white, and these base members 601, 801 and the front sides of the LED boards 603, 803 are covered with translucent cover members 602, 802, and the front side emits light when the third performance LEDs 604A, 604B and the fourth performance LED 804 are lit. has been done.

As shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21 (A), an LED board 603 as an electronic component having third presentation LEDs 604A and 604B is arranged on the front side of the base member 601, and the front side is covered with a cover. It is covered with member 602. However, since the cover member 602 is made of a synthetic resin material having light-transmitting properties, even if the cover member 602 is formed with the light diffusing section 602A, the cover member 602 cannot be seen from the player's side. Although it is possible to visually check the back side, an inner lens 605 with a light diffusion section 605A formed on the front and rear surfaces is provided on the back side so as to cover the LED board 603 from the front side. Although it is possible to visually recognize the front surface of the LED board 603, it is extremely difficult to visually recognize the front surface of the LED board 603.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-21(A), a standing wall of the same white base member 601 is arranged around (around) the white LED board 603, so that the LED board 603 is connected to the surrounding base member. 601, the boundary BD between the LED board 603 and the cover member 602 is difficult to see. In other words, it becomes difficult to see that the LED board 603 is provided on the base member 601, so that the LED board 603, which is an electronic component, becomes less noticeable.

On the other hand, as shown in Figures 10-20 and 10-21 (B), the LED board 803 as an electronic component having the fourth performance LED 804 is disposed on the front side of the base member 801, and the front side is covered by the cover member 802. However, because the cover member 802 is made of a synthetic resin material having translucency, even if the cover member 802 has a light diffusion portion 802A formed thereon, it is possible for the player to see the front of the base member 801 and the LED board 803 through the cover member 802.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-21(B), by disposing the same white base member 801 around (periphery) the white LED board 803, the LED board 803 is connected to the surrounding base member 801. As a result, the boundary BD between the LED board 803 and the cover member 802 becomes difficult to see. In other words, it becomes difficult to see that the LED board 803 is provided on a part of the front surface of the base member 801, so that the LED board 803, which is an electronic component, becomes less noticeable.

However, the fourth performance LED 804 is an angle-type LED that enters light from the side end surface of the inner lens 805, and is arranged along the periphery of the LED board 803, so that the LED including the fourth performance LED 804 The front side of the front peripheral edge of the substrate 803 is not covered by the inner lens 805, and the inner lens 805 has a smaller area in which a reflecting portion and a light diffusing portion are formed than the inner lens 605, so that the player The visibility when viewing the LED board 803 including the fourth performance LED 804 through the inner lens 805 from the player side is the same as the visibility of the LED board 803 including the third performance LEDs 604A and 604B through the inner lens 605 from the player side. The visibility is higher than that of 603. In other words, the LED board 803 is more noticeable than the LED board 603.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-24, the light emitting effect part 630 of the third effect unit 600 is larger than the LED board 803 of the fourth effect unit 800 when viewed from the player side (see FIG. 10-20). ), furthermore, the arrangement position in the front-rear direction of the front surface is further forward (on the player side) than the arrangement position of the front surface of the fourth production unit 800 (see FIGS. 10-22 and 10-23), and The light emitting mode by the fourth effect LED 804 of the effect unit 800 is surface emission, whereas the light emission mode by the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B of the third effect unit 600 is point light (see FIG. 10-25). In addition, in FIG. 10-25, the backgrounds of the third effect unit 600 and the fourth effect unit 800 are shown in black for the convenience of explaining the light emission mode.

In this way, the light emitting production unit 630 of the third production unit 600 is larger than the LED board 803 of the fourth production unit 800 when viewed from the player side, is located closer to the player, and emits strong light. Therefore, the performance means has higher visibility than the fourth performance unit 800 when viewed from the player side. That is, the third production unit 600, which is a production means with higher visibility when viewed from the player side than the fourth production unit 800, is provided in the vicinity of the fourth production unit 800. Since the third presentation unit 600 is more conspicuous than the fourth presentation unit 800 and attracts more attention from players, the LED board 803, which is an electronic component of the fourth presentation unit 800, becomes less noticeable.

In addition, in this embodiment, the light emitting production section 630 of the third production unit 600 is larger than the LED board 803 of the fourth production unit 800 when viewed from the player side, and is located closer to the player. , the form is illustrated in which it is configured as a presentation means with higher visibility than the LED board 803 and the base member 801 by emitting strong light, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the third presentation The light emitting production section 630 of the unit 600 has improved visibility because it differs from the LED board 803 of the fourth production unit 800 in at least one of the size, position relative to the player, and light emission mode when viewed from the player side. It is good if the value is high.

Furthermore, the front surface of the light emitting production section 630 of the third production unit 600 as a production means may be colored with a color that is more visible than the surface color of the LED board 803, or a decorative section with a color that is highly visible may be provided. The cover member 602 may be molded in a highly visible color to easily increase the visibility of the light emitting production section 630. Furthermore, the visibility of the light emitting effect part 630 may be easily enhanced by the light emitting mode (for example, lighting color, lighting mode, brightness, etc.) of the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B.

In addition, although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the light emitting production section 630 of the third production unit 600 which can emit light by a light emitting means and can be operated by a production motor 631 is applied as a production means, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, it may be a light-emitting means (such as a lamp part) provided around the fourth effect unit 800 in the gaming machine frame 3, or a effect means that does not emit light by a light-emitting means, or a light-emitting means provided around the fourth effect unit 800 in the gaming machine frame 3. It may be a production section that does not operate and is fixed at a predetermined position.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-23, a protruding portion 3A (eaves portion) is formed at the upper front surface of the gaming machine frame 3, which protrudes further forward than the gaming board 2 and the glass window 50a. The protruding part 3A is formed above the gaming area Y so as not to obstruct the visibility of the game ball passing through the upper part of the gaming area Y, but by protruding largely forward, it can be used for pachinko, for example. When the game machine 75SG001 is installed on the game island of the game hall, the area E1 below the protrusion 3A (the area indicated by halftone dots in the figure) is shaded by the outside light of the game hall being blocked by the protrusion 3A. It gets dark.

Therefore, by providing the third presentation unit 600 and the fourth presentation unit 800 at a position corresponding to the area E1 in the upper part of the game area Y, the LED boards 603 and 803 are easily lost in the shadow of the protrusion 3A. So it becomes less noticeable.

Further, above the LED boards 603, 803, there is provided a protrusion 3A that protrudes toward the player side than the LED boards 603, 803, and the protrusion 3A is larger than the LED boards 603, 803 ( (See FIG. 10-23), the LED boards 603, 803 are in the shadow of the protrusion 3A and become less noticeable.

Further, although the LED boards 603, 803 and the base members 601, 801 are white in color, the present invention is not limited to this, and they may be dark colored (for example, black). By doing so, the LED boards 603, 803 and the base members 601, 801 can easily disappear into the shadow of the protrusion 3A, making them less noticeable.

Note that in this embodiment, a protrusion 3A that protrudes toward the player above the LED boards 603, 803 is applied as the protrusion that protrudes toward the player above the electronic components and specific members. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the protrusion is not limited to a protrusion provided protrudingly from a part of the frame 3 for the game machine. It may be configured by other gaming devices (for example, winning ball device, etc.) or presentation devices provided in the area Y. In addition, the protruding part 3A is not only fixedly installed on the front surface of the gaming machine frame 3, but also moves from the origin position to the protruding position at a predetermined timing, so that the protruding part 3A can be positioned above the electronic components and specific members. It may be a protrusion that protrudes to the side.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-26, the light emitting area 506 of the light guide plate 501 is a light emitting area 506 when the light emitting part 630 and the power transmission member 632 of the third effect unit 600 operating on the back side of the light guide plate 501 move. It is formed so as to overlap in front and behind most of the moving region E2 (the region surrounded by the dashed line in FIG. 10-26).

More specifically, the movement area E2 of the light emitting effect part 630 and the power transmission member 632 is an area where the light emitting effect part 630 moves from the origin position to the effect position, and is an area including the origin position and the effect position. When light enters the light guide plate 501 from the right end surface 501a, the light emitting region 506 becomes in a state of emitting light, and the display image of the rear image display device 5, the light emitting production section 630, and the power transmission member 632 are visible from the player's side to the light guide plate. 501 and becomes difficult or impossible to see. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the light guide plate LED 502 to control the light emitting area during a movement period in which the light emission performance section 630 and the power transmission member 632 are moved from the origin position to the performance position or during a performance period in which they are located at the performance position. 506, the light emitting effect part 630 and the power transmission member 632 become difficult or impossible to see through the light guide plate 501 from the player's side. It is possible to prevent the cable C (electronic component) etc. provided along the member 632 from becoming conspicuous.

Furthermore, after the light emitting production section 630 moves to the production position, when the light guide plate LED 502 goes out and the light emitting production of the light emitting area 506 ends, the power transmission member 632, cable C, etc. become visible, but the light emitting production section By lighting up the third presentation LEDs 604A and 604B of 630 to make the light emission presentation section 630 stand out, the power transmission member 632 and the cable C can be made less noticeable.

Additionally, the electronic components (for example, the LED board 603 and cable C) that are operable in this way are visible to the player during the waiting period and movement period when they are waiting at the origin position. However, it is preferable to make it difficult or impossible to see from the player's side at least during the performance period when the player is located at the performance position. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the electronic components from becoming conspicuous during the production period that attracts the attention of the players.

In addition, the pachinko game machine 75SG001 of the feature section 75SG of this embodiment has the following features:
Electronic components (for example, LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803) provided so as to be visible to the player;
a specific member (for example, base member 301, 401, 601, 801) provided around the electronic component and formed in a similar color to the electronic component;
a translucent member (e.g., cover member 302, 402, 602, 802) that is a translucent member and is provided so that a player can see the electronic component and the specific member through the member;
It is characterized by having the following.
In this way, even if the electronic parts are arranged so that they can be seen by the player, the electronic parts become less noticeable due to the specific members having similar colors, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased.
Note that the electronic component and the specific member can be changed to any color as long as they are similar in color. Further, as in the above embodiment, the electronic component and the specific member may be the same color (for example, black on black, white on white, etc.).

(Explanation regarding transformation and application of characteristic part 75SG)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 75SG001 described above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

For example, in the feature section 75SG of the embodiment, light emitting diodes such as the first performance LED 304, second performance LEDs 404A to 404D, third performance LEDs 604A and 604B, and fourth performance LED 804 are provided as electronic components. Although the embodiment in which the LED boards 303, 403, 603, and 803 are applied is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. (including the control board 12, relay board, etc.), electronic parts such as sensors, solenoids, motors, connectors, cables (wiring), and boards and members for fixing these.

Further, in the characteristic part 75SG of the embodiment, a form is illustrated in which a base member 301, 401, 601, 801 for arranging an LED board 303, 403, 603, 803 as an electronic component is applied as a specific member. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if it is not a member that constitutes a part of a unit (device) that arranges or houses an electronic component as described above, it may be a member that is provided around the electronic component. If there is, a different member provided separately from the unit (device) in which the electronic component is arranged or housed (for example, a member forming part of another unit, or a part of the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3). (a member constituting a part, etc.).

In addition, in the characteristic portion 75SG of the above embodiment, the cover members 302, 402, 602, 802 constituting part of the unit (apparatus) in which the electronic components are arranged or housed are exemplified as the translucent member, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the member does not have to be a part of the unit (apparatus) in which the electronic components are arranged or housed as described above, but as long as it is a translucent member that allows the player to see the electronic components and specific members through the member, it may be a different member provided separately from the unit (apparatus) in which the electronic components are arranged or housed (for example, a member that constitutes part of another unit, or a member that constitutes part of the game board 2 or game machine frame 3).

Further, in the characteristic part 75SG of the embodiment, an example is given in which the electronic component and the specific member provided around the electronic component are the same color (same color), but the present invention is not limited to this. However, as long as the electronic component and the specific member provided around the electronic component have the same color as described above, the electronic component and the specific member are not limited to the same color.

Further, in the characteristic part 75SG of the embodiment, the base members 301, 401, 601, 801 as specific members partially overlap on the back side of the LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803 as electronic components, and , the non-overlapping portions are arranged around the LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803, but the present invention is not limited to this, and electronic components and specific members are arranged from the player's side. When viewed visually, they may be arranged side by side on at least one of the upper side, the lower side, the left side, and the right side without overlapping. Additionally, if the specific component is visible and placed around the electronic component when viewed from the player's side, the electronic component and the specific component are placed apart in the vertical, horizontal, front-back, etc. directions. may have been done.

Note that the specific member provided around the electronic component includes a specific member provided at a position that is visible from the player's side together with the electronic component, and for example, is located within a range of approximately 5 cm from the electronic component. It may also include specific members.

Further, in the characteristic part 75SG of the embodiment, the cover members 302, 402, 602, 802 made of a synthetic resin material having translucency are applied as the translucent members, but the present invention applies thereto. The material is not limited to any particular material as long as it is a translucent member, and may be a glass material or the like. Further, as long as the electronic component and the specific member can be seen through the member by the player, the member may be transparent or translucent, or may be colored in a predetermined color. Furthermore, the light transmittance does not have to be 100% or a value close to 100%.

In addition, in the characteristic part 75SG of the embodiment, the cover members 302, 402, 602, 802 as light-transmitting members allow the player to pass through the cover members 303, 403, 603, 803 as electronic components. Although a form in which a part or the entire area of the base member 301, 401, 601, 801 as a specific member is visible is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least a part of the electronic component is If the electronic component and the specific component are provided so that they can be seen through the electronic component, the electronic component and the specific component can be visually recognized together even if at least a part of the specific component is not visible through the component. All you have to do is stay there.

Moreover, in the characteristic part 75SG of the embodiment, the cover members 302, 402, 602, 802 as light-transmitting members, the LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803 as electronic components and the base member 301 as a specific member, 401, 601, 801 are arranged along the electronic components and the specific member, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not necessarily arranged along the electronic components and the specific member. It doesn't have to be done. That is, the electronic component or the specific member may be arranged obliquely with respect to the light-transmitting member.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 75SG of the above embodiment, the LED board 303, 403, 603, 803 and the base member 301, 401, 601, 801 have an entire surface of a predetermined color (black or white), but the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as the colors of the parts of the electronic components and specific components that can be seen through the translucent member (for example, the front color of the electronic components and specific components) are similar colors, the entire surface does not necessarily have to be similar colors. In addition, the colors of these electronic components and specific components may be colored when the components are molded, or may be colored by painting or printing after molding, or may be the predetermined color by attaching a sticker or the like.

Further, in the characteristic part 75SG of the embodiment, an example is given in which the electronic component and the specific member provided around the electronic component are the same color (same color), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a predetermined electronic device that is difficult or invisible to the player and is installed separately from the LED board 303, 403, 603, 803 as an electronic component or the base member 301, 401, 601, 801 as a specific component. parts (for example, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.) and predetermined members (for example, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, etc.) provided around the predetermined electronic components. (a member for fixing the starting port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.), the predetermined electronic components (for example, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, the solenoids 81, 82, etc.) , it is preferable that the color is not similar to that of a predetermined member (for example, a member that fixes the first starting port switch 22A, second starting port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.).

In this way, with respect to predetermined electronic components such as the first starting port switch 22A, second starting port switch 22B, and solenoids 81 and 82 that are difficult or invisible to the player, the balance with the predetermined member that fixes them is determined. Since general-purpose products can be used without considering the above, manufacturing costs can be reduced.

In addition, by setting the color of the specific component to a color that has the same hue as the electronic component and has either higher brightness or saturation, the visibility of the specific component will be higher than that of the electronic component. Electronic components can be made relatively less noticeable.

Furthermore, by coloring the light-transmitting member in a similar color to the electronic component and the specific member, the light-transmitting member blends in with the electronic component and the specific member, thereby making the electronic component less noticeable.

For example, if an electronic component such as a black LED board is placed on the right side of the game board 2, an outer rail decoration 212 of the same color or a similar color as the electronic component can be placed on the left side of the game board 2 on the opposite side of the image display device 5, separate from the specific component placed around the electronic component, so that it is visible to the player. This allows the black components to be placed in a balanced manner on the left and right sides of the image display device 5, making it less likely for the player to feel uncomfortable, and making the electronic component less noticeable. In this way, by symmetrically placing components of the same color or a similar color as the electronic component at a distance, separate from the specific component, the electronic component can be made less noticeable.

The configuration related to feature 75SG may be appropriately combined with some or all of the configurations related to feature 91AK, 92AK, 01AK, 02AK, etc. For example, if the effects described in feature 91AK, 92AK, 01AK, 02AK can be executed on image display device 5, the electronic components of first effect unit 300, second effect unit 400, third effect unit 600, and fourth effect unit 800 described in feature 75SG arranged around image display device 5 become less noticeable, making it possible to display the above effects favorably.

Specifically, for example, as explained in FIGS. 9-9 to 9-11, the normal drawing effect NOR is executed even during periods other than the effect execution period D0 among the plurality of effect execution periods D0 to D4. In this case, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect using the first light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs, and the light emitting effect is executed when executing the specific drawing effect SPE in the effect execution period D2 etc. In the case of controlling the electronic parts (for example, LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803) and specific members (for example, base members 301, 401, 601, 801) (for example, the game effect lamp 9 It may also be possible to control the light emitting effect using the second light emitting member provided at a position closer than the game effect lamp 9 (or to make the light amount lower than that of the game effect lamp 9, etc.). By doing this, when the light emitting effect using the first light emitting member is restricted, the light emitting effect using the second light emitting member is executed, thereby preventing electronic components and specific components from becoming more noticeable. can.

Also, among the second light-emitting members provided around the electronic components and the specific member, the second effect is capable of surface-emitting the decorative portion 420 of the transparent member disposed on the front side of the electronic component and the specific member. For light-emitting members such as the LED 404A that are not noticeable even if they continue to emit light, the amount of light may be maintained (not restricted) even when controlling not to perform a light-emitting effect using the first light-emitting member. . By doing so, it is possible to make the electronic components and specific members less noticeable without reducing the presentation effect too much.

Further, in the embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1,75SG001 is illustrated as an example of the game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a predetermined number of game balls is Rental balls that are circulated inside the gaming machine and are lent out in response to a player's lending request and the number of prize balls awarded in response to winnings are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is counted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed game machine in which the numbers are subtracted and stored. In these enclosed gaming machines, scores and points are awarded to the player instead of game balls, so these awarded scores and points correspond to the gaming value.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium, and for example, non-spherical game balls such as medals, It may be a medium.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, a pachinko game machine is applied as an example of a game machine, but a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using, for example, a game value. At the same time, one game ends when a variable display result is derived to a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, each of which can be identified. It is also applicable to slot machines that allow winnings to occur.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. in which game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winnings. Furthermore, the gaming machine that allows games may be any machine that allows at least playing games, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, but may be general gaming machines.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within the scope of the present invention, in addition to the above-mentioned embodiments and other embodiments described below.

Further, all or some of the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modification example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment example and each modification example described below may be combined arbitrarily.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiments and the later-described embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and should not be considered restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description and the following description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and range equivalent to the claims are included.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention can variably display a plurality of types of performance identification information (for example, decorative symbols) including specific performance identification information (for example, pseudo-continuous symbols), derive and display the display results, A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1, 75SG001) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and is equipped with an electronic component (for example, an LED board) that is provided so as to be visible to the player. 303, 403, 603, 803), a specific member (for example, base member 301, 401, 601, 801) provided around the electronic component and formed in a similar color to the electronic component, and A translucent member (e.g., cover member 302, 402, 602, 802) that is provided so that the electronic component and the specific member can be visually recognized by the player through the member; Predetermined electronic components (for example, first starting port switch 22A, second starting port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.) that are difficult or invisible to view, and predetermined members provided around the predetermined electronic components (for example, , the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, a member for fixing the solenoids 81, 82, etc.), and the light-transmitting member (for example, the cover member 302) is provided with the electronic component (for example, The predetermined member has a decorative pattern (for example, a decorative pattern 331) formed so as to extend over the LED board 303) and the specific member (for example, the base member 301) (see FIGS. 10-12), and the predetermined member has a The color is not similar to that of the electronic parts, and furthermore, as a variable display, the specific performance identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from when the variable display of the performance identification information is started until the display result is derived and displayed. A specific effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display process shown in FIG. 7) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a pseudo continuous effect) that restarts the display, and the specific effect identification information. Suggestive performance execution means (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable displaying performance process shown in FIG. 7) that can execute a suggestive performance that suggests temporary stopping (for example, a temporary stop suggesting performance); Notification performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable displaying performance process shown in FIG. 7 The suggestive performance execution means temporarily lowers the visibility of performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display as the suggestive performance. After that, it is possible to perform an effect that lowers the visibility to a second low visibility state that is even lower than the first low visibility state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 5, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is reduced by displaying concentrated lines at a density of D1, and then the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced by displaying concentrated lines at a density of D2) As the notification performance, the notification performance execution means is capable of executing a performance that makes performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information invisible (for example, as shown in FIGS. 16-34 and 16-35). (a part in which the left and right decorative patterns are made invisible by displaying an effect image for temporary stop notification in the entire display area of the image display device 5), the suggestive effect execution means is configured such that the specific effect identification information indicates the temporary stop. Even if the above-mentioned suggestion effect is not temporarily stopped, the effect display can be continued for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-44). If the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the part where the concentrated line continues to be displayed even after the pseudo-continuous pattern is hidden on the image display device 5) can be mentioned.

With this configuration, even if electronic components are arranged so that they are visible to the player, the decorative pattern makes the electronic components less noticeable, allowing for greater freedom in design. In addition, for specified electronic components that are difficult or impossible to see by the player, generic products can be used without considering the balance with specified materials, allowing for reduced manufacturing costs. In addition, the suggestive performance can increase the player's anticipation of a temporary stop, and the execution of the notification performance can increase the player's sense of elation at the temporary stop. In addition, if a temporary stop is not made, the effect display continues to be displayed even after the specified timing for the temporary stop, making it easier for the player to recognize that the temporary stop did not occur, and easing the player's disappointment at the temporary stop, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In other words, it is possible to create a gaming machine that looks good while increasing the degree of freedom in design, and since the effect display continues to be displayed for a specified period of time after the specified timing has passed even if the specific effect identification information does not temporarily stop, the lingering effect display can leave a strong impression on the player of the suggestive effect, and the player's sense of disappointment can be alleviated compared to when the effect display is terminated immediately after the specified timing has passed. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that looks good when installed in an amusement park and is likely to attract the interest of players.

Alternatively, the gaming machine of the present invention may perform variable display of multiple types of performance identification information (for example, decorative patterns) to derive and display the display results, thereby achieving an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot). A game machine (for example, Pachinko game machine 1, 75SG001) that can be controlled in a gaming state), and includes an electronic component (for example, an LED board 303, 403, 603, 803) that is provided so as to be visible to the player; A specific member (for example, base member 301, 401, 601, 801) provided around an electronic component and formed in a color similar to that of the electronic component, and a translucent member that allows the player to use the member. A translucent member (for example, cover member 302, 402, 602, 802) that is provided so that the electronic component and the specific member can be seen through it, and a predetermined electronic component that is provided that is difficult or invisible to the player. (e.g., first starting port switch 22A, second starting port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.) and predetermined members provided around the predetermined electronic components (for example, first starting port switch 22A, second starting port switch 22A, second starting port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.). a member for fixing the mouth switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.), and the light-transmitting member (for example, the cover member 302) is provided with the electronic component (for example, the LED board 303) and the specific member (for example, the predetermined member has a decorative pattern (for example, the decorative pattern 331) formed so as to straddle the base member 301 (see FIG. 10-12), the predetermined member has a color that is not similar to the predetermined electronic component, and further, As a variable display, special identification information (for example, a pseudo-continuous pattern) different from the performance identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the performance identification information until the display result is derived and displayed. A specific effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 7) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a pseudo continuous effect) that resumes the variable display later, and the special identification Suggestive effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable displaying effect process shown in FIG. 7) capable of executing a suggestive effect that suggests that the information is temporarily stopped (for example, a temporary stop suggestion effect); , a notification effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable displaying effect processing shown in FIG. 7 ), and the suggestive performance execution means is configured to once reduce the visibility of the performance identification information to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display as the suggestive performance, and then reduce the visibility of the performance identification information to a first low visibility state. It is possible to perform an effect that lowers the visibility to a second low visibility state that is even lower than the visibility state (for example, as shown in FIGS. (a portion in which the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is lowered by displaying them at a density of D2, and then the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced by displaying concentrated lines at a density of D2), the notification effect execution means As the notification effect, it is possible to perform an effect that makes the effect identification information invisible (for example, as shown in FIGS. 16-34 and 16-35, an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed on the image display device 5). (a portion where the left and right decorative patterns are made invisible by displaying them in the entire display area), the suggesting effect execution means is capable of executing the suggesting effect even when the special identification information does not temporarily stop, If it does not stop, the effect display can be continuously displayed for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing has passed (for example, as shown in Figure 16-44, a temporary stop suggestion effect is executed so that the pseudo continuous pattern temporarily stops). If not, the area where the concentrated line continues to be displayed even after the pseudo continuous pattern is hidden on the image display device 5) is a gaming machine.

According to such a configuration, even if the electronic components are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the decorative pattern makes the electronic components less noticeable, so it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in design. Further, as for the predetermined electronic parts that are difficult or invisible to the player, general-purpose products can be used without considering the balance with the predetermined members, so that manufacturing costs can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the temporary stop through the suggestive effect, and by executing the notification effect, it is possible to increase the player's sense of elation over the temporary stop. By continuing to display the effect display even after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the temporary stop was not made, and the player's feeling of disappointment at the failure to make the temporary stop is alleviated. As a result, the player's enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In other words, it is possible to create a game machine with a good appearance while increasing the degree of freedom in design, and even if the special identification information is not temporarily stopped, the effect display will continue to be displayed for a predetermined period after a predetermined timing has passed. Therefore, the lingering sound of the effect display can strongly impress the player with the suggestive performance, and the player's feeling of disappointment can be alleviated compared to the case where the effect display is ended immediately after a predetermined timing. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that looks good when installed in a gaming parlor and easily attracts players' interest.

Furthermore, as an example of a form of gaming machine that can increase the freedom of design and improve the interest in gaming, there is a gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing a variable display of multiple types of performance identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) including specific performance identification information (e.g., pseudo consecutive patterns) and deriving and displaying the display result, and that can execute a specific performance (e.g., pseudo consecutive performance) in which the specific performance identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the performance identification information to the deriving and displaying of the display result and then the variable display is resumed. The present invention is provided with a performance execution means (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance process shown in FIG. 7), a suggestion performance execution means capable of executing a suggestion performance (for example, a temporary stop suggestion performance) that suggests that the specific performance identification information will be temporarily stopped (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance process shown in FIG. 7), and an announcement performance execution means (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance process shown in FIG. 7) that is capable of executing an announcement performance (for example, a temporary stop announcement performance) that notifies that the specific performance identification information has been temporarily stopped, and the suggestion performance execution means executes, by displaying an effect display, The notification performance execution means is capable of executing a performance in which the visibility of performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information is once reduced to a first low visibility state, and then reduced to a second low visibility state having even lower visibility than the first low visibility state (for example, as shown in Figs. 16-33 and 16-34, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is reduced by displaying convergent lines at a density D1 on the image display device 5, and then the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced by displaying convergent lines at a density D2), and the notification performance execution means is capable of executing, as the notification performance, a performance in which the performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information is made invisible (for example, as shown in Figs. As shown in Fig. 16-34 and Fig. 16-35, the effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5, making the decorative patterns on the left and right invisible), the suggestive performance execution means can execute the suggestive performance even when the specific performance identification information does not temporarily stop, and when the temporary stop does not occur, the effect display can continue to be displayed for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing has passed (for example, as shown in Fig. 16-44, when the pseudo consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop after the temporary stop suggestive performance is executed, the converging lines continue to be displayed even after the pseudo consecutive patterns are hidden on the image display device 5).

Alternatively, as an example of a form of a gaming machine that can increase the degree of freedom in design and improve the enjoyment of the game, display results can be obtained by variably displaying multiple types of performance identification information (for example, decorative patterns). A gaming machine (e.g., Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can derive and display the information and control it to an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for the player, and starts variable display of production identification information as a variable display. At a predetermined timing after deriving and displaying the display result, a specific production (for example, a pseudo series pattern) that temporarily stops special identification information (for example, a pseudo series pattern) different from the production identification information and then resumes variable display. A specific effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 7) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 7), and a suggestive effect (e.g. , a temporary stop suggestion effect) (e.g., a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 7), and the special identification information informs that the temporary stop has been made. An information performance execution means (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable displaying performance process shown in FIG. 7) capable of executing a notification performance (for example, a temporary stop notification performance), and the suggestion performance execution means As the suggestive effect, after once reducing the visibility of the effect identification information to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display, a second low visibility state whose visibility is even lower than the first low visibility state is performed. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 16-33 and 16-34, by displaying concentrated lines at a density D1 on the image display device 5, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns can be improved. (a part in which the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced by displaying concentrated lines at a density D2 after decreasing the concentration line), the notification effect executing means makes the effect identification information invisible as the notification effect. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 16-34 and 16-35, by displaying an effect image for temporary stop notification in the entire display area of the image display device 5, the left and right decorative patterns can be (a portion made invisible), the suggestive effect execution means is capable of executing the suggestive effect even when the special identification information does not temporarily stop, and when the special identification information does not temporarily stop, the suggestive effect is executed at a predetermined time after the predetermined timing. During the period, the effect display can be continuously displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. An example is a gaming machine (where the saturated line continues to be displayed even after it has been hidden). Below, one example of the form of these gaming machines will be explained as another example of the form.

FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is disposed in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is disposed to the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured, for example, using a seven-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are disposed directly in front of the main board 11 when the back surface of the game board 2 is viewed with the game machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, winning ratios, and bases. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the big prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the second starting prize opening (electronic chew) and the number of prize balls that land in the grand prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display monitor 29 only needs to be capable of displaying setting values to be changed or checked when the settings are changed or checked.

When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is provided with a rotatable glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and is configured so that the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the gaming area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. The security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Fig. 12. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on the electronic circuit board.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it ON), power from an AC power source such as an external power source such as a commercial power supply, such as 100V AC, can be supplied from the power supply board 17 to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 is equipped with, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a specified DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of special games (including management of reserved games), execution of regular games (including management of reserved games), jackpot game status, game status, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. Good to have. The power-off signal becomes an OFF state when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and becomes an ON state when a period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is below a predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display unit 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 13, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S901). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S902). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery condition is satisfied (step S903). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in the OFF state, backup data is present, and the backup RAM is normal. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, for example, an ON clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an ON clear signal is input, it is determined in step S903 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The backup data only needs to be capable of being stored in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S903, it is determined whether the recovery condition can be satisfied by checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S903; Yes), the setting confirmation process (step S905) is executed after executing the recovery process (step S904). Through the recovery process in step S904, a work area is set based on the storage contents of the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the gaming state can be restored to the state it was in when the power supply stopped. For example, if the special symbols are changing, the special symbol can be changed from the state before the stoppage. It is sufficient if the fluctuation of the symbols can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not met (step S903; No), an initialization process (step S906) is executed, and then a setting change process (step S907) is executed. The initialization process in step S906 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and the execution of the clearing process sets initial values in the working area.

In the setting confirmation process of step S905, it is determined whether predetermined setting confirmation conditions are satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S905 is executed when the recovery conditions including that the clear signal is in the OFF state are satisfied in step S903. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation conditions are met in the setting confirmation process in step S905, a setting confirmation state is entered in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. When the game is in the stopped state, firing of game balls by operating the batting operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, and normal symbols are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled to stop displaying losing symbols or the like, or to display a display corresponding to a game stop state different from losing symbols. When the setting confirmation state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

In the setting change process of step S907, it is determined whether predetermined setting change conditions are satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the on state.

If the setting change conditions are met in the setting change process in step S907, the setting change state is entered in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A start change command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed every time an operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. Thereafter, based on the setting key 51 being turned off by an operation by an attendant at the game parlor, etc., the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage). Turn off the light. When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be placed in the game stop state, similar to when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

When the performance control board 12 receives a setting check start command or a setting change start command, control may be performed to notify the user that a setting check or change is in progress. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting component such as the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on, for example, by pressing down a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S906 and the step The setting change process in S907 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S904 and the setting confirmation process in step S905 are executed to enable control to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, the initialization process of step S906 is executed if the clear switch is on. However, if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S904 is executed, but the setting confirmation state is not controlled.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S908). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated at a predetermined time interval (for example, 2 ms) (step S909), and the interrupt is permitted (step S9010). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate change depending on the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate are changed. For example, the set value has six levels from 1 to 6, where 6 has the highest probability of winning the jackpot, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the probability of winning the jackpot decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, it is the highest advantage for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. . If the probability of winning the jackpot changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the probability of winning a jackpot is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may vary depending on the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side.

FIG. 14 shows an example of the configuration of the display result determination table. FIG. 14(A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and FIG. 14(B) shows a configuration example of the first special symbol display result determination table used when the variable special symbol is the second A configuration example of a second special figure display result determination table used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is a variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 14(A), when the variable special figure is the first special figure, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is in the range of 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and 65317 to 65535 are assigned to "time saving". Other numerical ranges are assigned as "outliers". In addition, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is variable probability, of the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Assigned. In addition, the case where the setting value of the first variable special figure is 2 to 6 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state is as shown in FIG. 14(A).

As shown in FIG. 14(B), when the variable special figure is the second special figure, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is in the range of 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and 65317 to 65425 are assigned to "time saving". Other numerical ranges are assigned as "outliers". In addition, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is variable probability, of the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Assigned. Incidentally, the case where the set value of the second variable special figure is 2 to 6 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state is as shown in FIG. 14(B).

Now, looking at the numerical range of hit determination values assigned to "jackpot" and "miss with time-saving" in each display result determination table, as shown in FIG. 15, in the display result determination table for the first special chart when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit determination values from 1020 to 1237 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

In other words, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the common hit determination value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 is selected. Only numbers within the numerical range (1020-1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the non-common numerical range is added to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment values. Numbers within the range are assigned a "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

Furthermore, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range from 65317 to 65535 among the winning determination values determines whether the time-saving win or loss occurs regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the time saving judgment value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and there is also a time saving function. The loss judgment value is in the range of 65317 to 65535, with 65317 as the reference value for loss with time saver (loss reference value with time saver), in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1346) of the previous setting value 6. This setting prevents the numerical range of the time saving loss judgment value from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value which changes according to each set value.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. It is set to a common numerical range.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 to setting In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5. , and the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674.

In other words, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is variable probability state, when the set value is 1, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, the common numerical range ( 1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", but if the set value is 2 or more, the jackpot judgment value within the range of the common numerical value range plus the non-common numerical range A numerical value is assigned to a “jackpot.” Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1347 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

In the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 among the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. is set to a common numerical range.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

In other words, in this pachinko game machine 1, when the setting value is 1 in the second special symbol display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535. Among the hit judgment values, only the numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment values is assigned. Numerical values within the range plus the non-common numerical value range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

Furthermore, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range from 65317 to 65425 among the winning determination values determines whether the time-saving win or loss occurs regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the time saving judgment value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and there is also a time saving function. The loss judgment value is in the range of 65317 to 65425, with 65317 as the reference value for loss with time saver (loss reference value with time saver), in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1346) of the setting value 6. This setting prevents the numerical range of the time saving loss judgment value from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values is the common numerical value of the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. The range is set. The characteristics of the other second special figure display result determination table are the same as the first special figure display result determination table.

As mentioned above, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, regardless of the setting value, 65317 to When the range of 65535 is set to the common numerical range with and without time saving, and the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the setting value will be changed in both the normal state and the time saving state. Regardless, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set as a common numerical range with and without time saving. In other words, when the gaming state is normal and when the time-saving state is set, the rate at which the variable display result is a loss with time-saving is the same for all setting values, so depending on the setting value, the gambling can be prevented from becoming excessively high. Furthermore, regarding the time saving error, which is assigned a common judgment value number for each setting value, all setting values are set in a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the reference value for the time saving error, so the display is variable. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load on the CPU 103 related to determining whether the result is a time saving or not.

In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, six setting values can be set, from 1 to 6, but the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. Also, the smaller the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the setting value based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by a common ratio regardless of the setting value. The variation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The setting value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by varying the execution rate of normal reach and super reach depending on the setting value. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the setting value. In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting value.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 193SG in embodiment of the present invention)
Next, the feature section 193SG (hereinafter abbreviated as main feature section 193SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described.

The gaming machine of form A1 is
Multiple types of performance identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) including specific performance identification information (e.g., pseudo-continuous patterns) are variably displayed, display results are derived and displayed, and an advantageous state advantageous to the player (e.g., jackpot game) is generated. A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled according to the state),
As a variable display, a specific performance (for example, a pseudo continuous display) that temporarily stops the specific performance identification information at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the performance identification information until the derivation and display of the display result, and then restarts the variable display. a specific performance execution means (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance process shown in FIG. 10) capable of executing the performance);
Suggestion performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable displaying performance process shown in FIG. 10 ) and
Notification performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable displaying performance process shown in FIG. 10 ) and
Equipped with
The suggestive performance execution means is configured to reduce the visibility of performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display as the suggestive performance, and then reduce the visibility of performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information to a first low visibility state. It is possible to perform an effect that lowers the visibility to a second low visibility state that is even lower than the current state (for example, as shown in FIGS. after reducing the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns by displaying them, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced by displaying concentrated lines at a density of D2),
The notification performance execution means is capable of executing, as the notification performance, a performance that makes performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information invisible (for example, as shown in FIGS. 16-34 and 16-35). , a portion where the left and right decorative patterns are made invisible by displaying an effect image for temporary stop notification in the entire display area of the image display device 5),
The suggestive effect execution means is capable of executing the suggestive effect even when the specific effect identification information does not temporarily stop, and when the specific effect identification information does not temporarily stop, displays the effect for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing. Continuous display is possible (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-44, if the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the pseudo-continuous pattern can be displayed after the pseudo-continuous pattern is hidden on the image display device 5. (areas where saturated lines are continuously displayed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the temporary stop by the suggestive effect, and also to increase the player's sense of elation for the temporary stop by executing the notification effect. If the player does not make a temporary stop, the effect display continues to be displayed even after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop, making it easier for the player to recognize that the temporary stop was not made, and reducing the player's disappointment at not making the temporary stop. Since the player's feelings can be alleviated, the player's enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A2 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko game) that can variably display multiple types of performance identification information (for example, decorative patterns), derive and display display results, and control the player to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) machine 1),
As a variable display, special identification information (for example, a pseudo-continuous pattern) different from the performance identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the performance identification information until the display result is derived and displayed. A specific effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 10) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a pseudo continuous effect) that restarts the variable display later;
Suggestive effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable displaying effect processing shown in FIG. 10 part) and
Notification performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable displaying performance process shown in FIG. 10 part) and
Equipped with
The suggestive performance execution means, as the suggestive performance, once reduces the visibility of the performance identification information to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display, and then lowers the visibility even further than the first low visibility state. It is possible to perform an effect that lowers the visibility to a low second low visibility state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 16-33 and 16-34, by displaying concentrated lines at the density D1 on the image display device 5, the left and right After reducing the visibility of the decorative pattern, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced by displaying concentrated lines at a density of D2),
The notification performance execution means is capable of executing a performance that makes the performance identification information invisible as the notification performance (for example, as shown in FIGS. 16-34 and 16-35, an effect image for temporary stop notification) (a portion in which the left and right decorative patterns are made invisible by displaying them in the entire display area of the image display device 5),
The suggestive effect execution means is capable of executing the suggestive effect even when the special identification information does not temporarily stop, and continues to display the effect for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing if the special identification information does not temporarily stop. (For example, as shown in FIG. 16-44, if the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the pseudo-continuous pattern can be displayed even after the pseudo-continuous pattern is hidden on the image display device 5. (parts where saturated lines are continuously displayed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the temporary stop by the suggestive effect, and also to increase the player's sense of elation for the temporary stop by executing the notification effect. If the player does not make a temporary stop, the effect display continues to be displayed even after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop, making it easier for the player to recognize that the temporary stop was not made, and reducing the player's disappointment at not making the temporary stop. Since the player's feelings can be alleviated, the player's enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A3 is
If the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) does not temporarily stop, the suggestive performance execution means determines a predetermined value for the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) to temporarily stop when the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) temporarily stops. moving the effect display toward the position (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-48 as modification 193SG-1, the part where the concentrated line is moved and displayed toward the center of the image display device 5);
The gaming machine according to form A1 or form A2, characterized in that:
According to this feature, since the predetermined position can be specified by the effect display, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the specific performance identification information (or special identification information) has not temporarily stopped.

The A4 format gaming machine is
The effect display has higher transparency after the predetermined timing than before the predetermined timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-33, when the pseudo continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the display image data Before the switching timing, the concentrated lines are displayed at a density of D2, and after the display image data switching timing, the concentrated lines are displayed at a density of D1. (The part where the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is higher after the image data switching timing)
The gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A3, characterized in that:
According to this feature, the transparency of the effect display increases after the predetermined timing when the specific production identification information (or special identification information) temporarily stops, so that the specific production identification information (or special identification information) does not temporarily stop. By making players aware of this, and by increasing attention to the background image that is easily visible through the effect display, the game can be improved even if the specific production identification information (or special identification information) has not temporarily stopped. It can alleviate people's feelings of disappointment.

The gaming machine of form A5 is
The suggested effect execution means causes the effect display to be temporarily stopped at a predetermined position where the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) temporarily stops when the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) temporarily stops; Delete any performance identification information (or performance identification information) different from the specific performance identification information before it is stopped and displayed (for example, as shown in Figure 16-44, if the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop) In the "Medium" decorative pattern display area 5C, the concentrated line is hidden before the decorative pattern with a number other than "1", which is a jackpot combination, or "1", which is a losing combination, stops. ),
The gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A4, characterized in that:
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the stop of the performance identification information from being mistakenly recognized as a temporary stop.

The game machine of form A6 is
When the notification effect is executed, the temporarily stopped specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is transformed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 16-35(G) to 16-35(H)). , the part where the pseudo-reen pattern cracks and explodes),
When the specific production identification information (or the special identification information) temporarily stops, the specific production identification information (or the special identification information) is located at a production position (for example, the first production position) that overlaps at least a part of the specific production identification information (or the special identification information). Equipped with an operable movable body (for example, second movable body 193SG033),
The gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A5, characterized in that:
According to this feature, the temporary stop can be further impressed on the player by the movement of the movable body and the modification of the specific performance identification information (or special identification information).

The gaming machine of form A7 is
The movable body is
The first action (for example, movement from the retreat position to the first effect position shown in Figure 16-2) has a smaller area overlapping with the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) than the first movement. It is possible to perform a second operation (for example, movement from the retreat position shown in FIG. 16-2 to the second production position),
In the notification effect, the first operation is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-35(F), the part where the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retreat position to the first effect position during the temporary stop notification effect) ),
The gaming machine according to form A6, characterized in that:
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the specific performance identification information (or special identification information) from becoming difficult to see due to the movable body, and to impress upon the player that the temporary stop has been made.

The game machine of form A8 is
The movable body has a light emitting part (for example, a second movable body LED193SG034) that can emit light,
In the first operation, the light emitting section emits light in a manner corresponding to the effect display (for example, as shown in Modification Example 193SG-2, during the temporary stop notification effect, the second movable body LED 193SG034 is temporarily stopped). The part that lights up with the color of the concentrated line displayed in the suggestive effect),
The gaming machine according to form A7, characterized in that:
According to this feature, since the light emitting section emits light in a manner corresponding to the effect display, the presentation effect can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A9 is
The first operation of the movable body ends before the specific production identification information (or the special identification information) is erased (for example, Fig. 16-35 (F) and Fig. 16-35 (G) As shown in , the part in which the second movable body 193SG033 is moved from the first presentation position to the retracted position before the pseudo continuous pattern is hidden on the image display device 5),
The gaming machine according to form A7 or form A8, characterized in that:
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the specific performance identification information (or special identification information) will be deleted.

The gaming machine of form A10 is
When the notification effect is executed, the temporarily stopped specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is transformed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 16-35(G) to 16-35(H)). , the part where the pseudo-reen pattern cracks and explodes),
A display corresponding to a specific performance (for example, a display of "x2", "x3", "x4", etc.) indicating that the N+1st variable display will be executed after the specific performance identification information is temporarily stopped. A display device corresponding to a specific effect that can be displayed (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 10);
a movable body (for example, a second movable body 193SG033) capable of operating at a performance position (for example, a first performance position) that overlaps at least a part of the specific performance compatible display displayed by the specific performance compatible display means;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A9, characterized in that:
According to this feature, the movement of the movable body can increase attention to the display corresponding to the specific effect, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A11 is
The movable body has a light emitting part (for example, a second movable body LED193SG034) that can emit light,
The light emitting unit emits light in a manner according to the display corresponding to the specific effect (for example, when displaying "x2" as the first variable display start number notification effect, it emits light in blue; when displaying "x3", it emits light in a manner that corresponds to the specific effect display. The part that makes the second movable body LED193SG034 emit light is green, and red when displaying "x4"),
The gaming machine according to form A10, characterized in that:
According to this feature, since the light emitting section emits light in a manner corresponding to the display corresponding to another variable display, it is possible to attract attention to the display corresponding to the specific effect, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A12 is
In the case where the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) does not temporarily stop after the suggestive performance is executed, the special performance (for example, the part where the temporary stop suggestion image is displayed in the central part of the image display device 5) A special effect execution means (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 10) capable of executing
Equipped with
When the suggestion effect is executed, the effect display of the suggestion effect is displayed with priority over the variable display of the effect identification information during the suggestion effect (for example, a pseudo continuous pattern is displayed instead of a normal decorative pattern). (a portion of the image display device 5 that is moved and displayed from above to below);
The special performance execution means executes, as the special performance, a first performance period (for example, FIG. 16- As shown in 33, the period before the display image data switching timing in the temporary stop suggestion performance) and the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) at the predetermined timing because the temporary stop did not occur at the predetermined position. (For example, as shown in FIG. 16-33, the period after the display image data switching timing in the temporary stop suggestion performance) and the second performance period (for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 16-33, FIG. 16-35, and FIG. 16-44, a portion where a concentrated line is displayed while displaying a temporary stop suggestion image in the center of the image display device 5),
The gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A11, characterized in that:
According to this feature, the display control in the suggestive effect becomes easy, and the transition to the second effect period becomes unnatural when the specific effect identification information (or special identification information) does not temporarily stop due to the special effect. You can prevent this from happening.

The gaming machine of form A13 is
The special performance executing means is configured to add, as the special performance, the second performance at a position different from the predetermined position to the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) temporarily stopped at the predetermined position. It is possible to execute an effect in which the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) in a translucent state is displayed in duplicate at a position corresponding to a period (for example, a temporary stop suggestion image is displayed in the center of the image display device 5). ),
The gaming machine according to form A12, characterized in that:
According to this feature, the transition to the second performance period can be made even more natural.

The gaming machine of form A14 is
The image display means can combine and display images drawn on a plurality of drawing layers (for example, as shown in FIGS. 16-3 and 16-4, image data 1, image data 2, image a portion that can be displayed on the image display device 5 by combining data drawn as data 3 and image data 4),
The drawing layer in which the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) and the effect display of the special effect are drawn is different from the drawing layer in which the effect display of the suggested effect is drawn (for example, FIG. 16-3 As shown in , a temporary stop suggestion image is drawn as image data 1, a decorative pattern or a pseudo continuous pattern is drawn as image data 2, and a concentrated line is drawn as image data 4),
The gaming machine according to form A12 or form A13, characterized in that:
According to this feature, the specific performance identification information (or special identification information) and the performance display of the special performance can be drawn separately from the performance display of the suggestive performance. ) and the degree of freedom in special effects can be increased.

The gaming machine of form A15 is
When the notification effect is executed, it is possible to execute an effect in which the temporarily stopped specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is transformed and then moved and erased (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-35 (G) ) ~ As shown in Figures 16-35 (H), 16-36 (I), and 16-36 (J), the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed moving toward the player after it explodes with a crack. (the part that is hidden),
A specific effect corresponding display (for example, "x2", "x3", " further comprising a specific performance compatible display means (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance processing shown in FIG. 10) capable of displaying a display such as "×4",
The specific effect corresponding display means can move and erase the specific effect corresponding display (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-37, displaying "x2", "x3", "x4", etc.) (the part that is moved and displayed toward the player and then hidden),
The production identification information in the N+1 variable display becomes visible from when the specific production identification information (or the special identification information) is erased until the display corresponding to the specific production is erased (for example, As shown in 16-37(O), when "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. are displayed on the image display device 5, the left and right decorative patterns are visible to the player. part),
The gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A14, characterized in that:
According to this feature, the performance effects of the notification performance and the display corresponding to the specific performance can be enhanced, and the performance identification information becomes visible before the display corresponding to the specific performance is erased, so that the variable display can be restarted. This makes it easier for players to recognize.

The gaming machine of form A16 is
A preview performance execution means capable of executing a preview performance that foretells that the advantageous state is likely to occur using the performance identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes a variable display performance process shown in FIG. 10) part),
The preview performance execution means limits the execution of the preview performance when the display corresponding to the specific performance is deleted (for example, as shown in Modified Example 193SG-3, the first variable display start number notification performance is " x2,” “x3,” and “x4” are displayed moving (enlarged) toward the player, the part that restricts the execution of the preview effect);
The gaming machine according to form A15, characterized in that:
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the user from not being able to easily recognize that the variable display will be resumed due to the execution of the preview effect.

The gaming machine of form A17 is
Both the specific production identification information (or the special identification information) and the specific production corresponding display are movements toward the player who is playing the game (for example, if the pseudo-continuous symbol explodes and the game starts (the part where the display moves towards the player side, and the part where displays such as "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. move towards the player side),
The gaming machine according to form A15 or form A16.
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the impression given to the player and improve the performance effect.

The gaming machine of form A18 is
A special effect that makes it difficult to see the temporarily stopped specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) by displaying a special image after the notification effect is executed (for example, the blast wave shown in Modification 193SG-4) A special effect execution means (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect processing shown in FIG.
The specific effect execution means makes visible the display corresponding to the resumption of the variable display after the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is made difficult to see due to the special effect (for example, in Modification 193SG). -4, the part where re-variable display is performed after hiding the visibility-obscuring image),
The gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A17, characterized in that:
According to this feature, before the display including the performance identification information corresponding to the restart of the variable display starts, a special performance in which the specific performance identification information (or special identification information) becomes difficult to see is executed. It is possible to easily understand that the variable display is restarted.

The gaming machine of form A19 is
image display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying a variable display of the performance identification information and a performance display of each performance;
A board material provided on the player side of the image display means and having a transparency that allows the player to see the display of the image display means, and capable of displaying the special image by inputting light from the outer peripheral side. A light guide plate (for example, the light guide plate shown in Modification Example 193SG-4),
Equipped with
The special performance execution means makes the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) displayed on the image display means difficult to see by displaying the special image on the light guide plate in the special performance. (For example, as shown in Modification Example 193SG-4, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, a visibility inhibiting image is displayed on the light guide plate, so that the pseudo-continuous symbol displayed on the image display device 5 can be viewed from the player.) (parts that are difficult to see),
The gaming machine according to form A18, characterized in that:
According to this feature, since the special image is displayed on the light guide plate, it is possible to enhance the player's impression, and therefore it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the special performance.

The gaming machine of form A20 is
In the case where the specific production identification information (or the special identification information) does not temporarily stop, the moving speed of the specific production identification information (or the special identification information) before the predetermined timing is the same as the moving speed of the specific production identification information (or the special identification information) after the predetermined timing. Different from the movement speed of the performance identification information (or the special identification information) (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-33, the movement speed of the pseudo continuous pattern before the display image data switching timing is V1, but the display image The movement speed of the pseudo continuous pattern after the data switching timing is V3),
The gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A19, characterized in that:
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily understand whether the specific performance identification information (or special identification information) is before or after the predetermined timing of temporary stopping.

The gaming machine of form A21 is
When the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) temporarily stops, the speed of movement of the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) to the predetermined temporary stop position before the predetermined timing is as follows: The specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) that has passed the predetermined position after the predetermined timing is different from the moving speed when returning to the predetermined position (for example, as shown in Modification Example 193SG-5, Even if the continuous pattern does not temporarily stop at the center of the image display device 5, the pseudo continuous pattern once starts moving downward to the image display device 5 and then returns to the center of the image display device 5. In this case, the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous pattern before the display image data switching timing, and the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbol before the display image data switching timing, and the (the part that makes the movement speed of the pseudo-repeat pattern different when returning to the previous section),
The gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A20, characterized in that:
According to this feature, the player can easily understand whether the movement is before passing a predetermined position or the movement back after passing the predetermined position.

The gaming machine of form A22 is
The suggested effect execution means regulates the display of the effect display when the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) that has passed the predetermined position returns to the predetermined position (for example, according to Modification Example 193SG). -5, when the pseudo continuous pattern once passes through the center of the image display device 5 and then returns to the center of the image display device 5, the part where the concentrated line is not displayed again),
The gaming machine according to form A21, characterized in that:
According to this feature, it becomes easier to understand that the person is moving back after passing by.

The gaming machine of form A23 is
When the specific production identification information (or the special identification information) temporarily stops, the moving speed before the specific production identification information (or the special identification information) temporarily stops is the same as that of the specific production identification information after the temporary stop. The performance identification information (or the special identification information) is different from the moving speed (for example, as shown in FIG. However, the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous pattern after the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous pattern is V2),
The gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A19, characterized in that:
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily understand whether the movement is before the temporary stop or the movement after the temporary stop.

The gaming machine of form A24 is
The moving direction of the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) before the temporary stop is different from the movement direction of the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) after the temporary stop (e.g. , as shown in Figures 16-34 and 16-35, the pseudo-continuous symbols before the temporary stop move downward from above, but the pseudo-continuous symbols after the temporary stop move toward the player (towards the player). (the part that moves),
The gaming machine according to form A23, characterized in that:
According to this feature, it is possible to make it even easier to understand that the movement is after a temporary stop, and it is possible to prevent misidentification of movement.

FIG. 16-1 is a configuration diagram showing a control board and the like in this feature section 193SG. As shown in FIG. 16-1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this feature section 193SG is provided with a second movable body 193SG033. The second movable body 193SG033 is equipped with a drive motor (not shown), and can be operated by the performance control CPU 120 controlling the drive motor. Further, a second movable body LED 193SG034 is built in the second movable body 193SG033 to cause the second movable body 193SG033 to emit light. Note that the second movable body LED 193SG034 is connected to the lamp control board 14.

As shown in FIG. 16-2(A), the second movable body 193SG033 during non-operation is disposed at a position below the image display device 5 (retracted position) between the image display device 5 and the game board 2. ing. Incidentally, in the retracted position, most of the second movable body 193SG033 is hidden by the game board 2, so that it is difficult for the player to see it.

The second movable body 193SG033 in this feature section 193SG is used as a jackpot notification during the variable display, during execution of the temporary stop notification effect, the first variable display start number notification effect, which will be described later, and during the reach effect of Super Reach, as shown in FIG. 16-2. It operates upward from the retracted position shown in (A).

Among these, when executing the temporary stop notification effect and when executing the first variable display start count notification effect, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the image display device 5. While moving (operating) to the first performance position, which is the front position, when executing the jackpot notification in the reach performance of Super Reach, the second movable body 193SG003 moves as shown in Figure 16-2 (C). It moves (operates) from the retracted position to the second presentation position, which is the front position of the image display device 5 and is located above the first presentation position.

Although not particularly shown, the second movable body 193SG033 that has moved to the first presentation position or the second presentation position is configured to return from the first presentation position or the second presentation position to the retracted position again as a predetermined period of time passes. It has become.

Furthermore, in this characteristic part 193SG, the second movable body 193SG moves from the retreat position to the first performance position during the temporary stop notification performance, so that a part thereof overlaps with the pseudo-continuous pattern when viewed from the front. (See Figure 16-35 (F)). On the other hand, the case where the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retreat position to the second performance position is limited to only when the jackpot notification is executed during the super reach performance. In other words, the movement of the second movable body 193SG033 from the retracted position to the first presentation position is also an operation in which the area overlaps with the pseudo-continuous pattern is larger than that of movement from the retraction position to the second presentation position.

Next, the display control section 123 in the main characteristic section 193SG will be explained. The CGROM in the display control unit 123 stores a plurality of types of image data for displaying images on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 is capable of displaying a predetermined image on the image display device 5 based on one image data stored in the CGROM based on instructions from the performance control CPU 120, and can display multiple types of image data. By arranging the images and displaying the images on the image display device 5, it is possible to display a predetermined effect screen. When not displaying a predetermined image on the image display device 5, depending on the situation, other image data may be placed in front of the image data of the predetermined image with a transmittance of 0%. The predetermined image is not displayed on the production screen by controlling the image based on the data not to be displayed on the production screen, and by displaying the image on the image display device 5 that has created the display data in which the image data of the predetermined image is not arranged. It may be controlled as follows.

For example, when displaying an image on the image display device 5, as shown in FIGS. 16-3(A) to 16-3(D) and FIGS. 16-4(A) to 16-4(D), , an image is displayed on the image display device 5 based on display data created by arranging a plurality of image data including image data 1 to 4. Of these, FIG. 16-3 shows the image data immediately before the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped as a temporary stop suggestion effect (see FIG. 16-35) in the main feature section 193SG, and FIG. 16-4 shows the image data when the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped. This is the image data when it did not stop.

As shown in FIG. 16-3 (A), image data 1 displays a pseudo continuous pattern (this feature This data is drawn in order to display a temporary stop suggestion image that suggests that the symbol (in which the symbol "NEXT" is displayed) is stopped (temporarily stopped).

In addition, the pseudo-series pattern in this characteristic part 193SG is a special pattern that is displayed on the image display device 5 only during a temporary stop suggestion performance or a temporary stop notification performance, which will be described later, as a part of the decorative pattern. This is a pattern in which a re-variable display (pseudo-continuous display) of a decorative pattern is executed by temporarily stopping the pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo-continuous pattern is a pattern that is different from the decorative pattern and is a pattern that is displayed on the image display device 5 only during the temporary stop suggestion performance or temporary stop notification performance, which will be described later. It may be.

Furthermore, in the present feature section 193SG, a form in which the pseudo-continuous pattern is a special pattern that is displayed on the image display device 5 only during the temporary stop suggestion performance or the temporary stop notification performance as part of the decorative pattern has been exemplified. The invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo-continuous pattern may be a pattern that is displayed as part of the variable display together with the normal decorative pattern even during the temporary stop suggestion performance or the temporary stop notification performance.

Furthermore, if the pseudo-connected pattern is to be a different pattern from the decorative pattern, the normal decorative pattern (the pattern with the numbers "1" to "9" in the main characteristic part) is temporarily stopped in the center of the image display device 5. After that, a case may be provided in which a pseudo-continuous effect is executed by changing the temporarily stopped decorative pattern to a pseudo-continuous pattern.

As shown in FIG. 16-3 (B) and FIG. 16-4 (A), image data 2 includes the above-mentioned pseudo continuous pattern directed downward from the top of the image display device 5 during execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect. This data is drawn to display the moving display of , and immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect ends without the pseudo continuous pattern temporarily stopping, the data is drawn from the top to the bottom of the image display device 5 instead of the pseudo continuous pattern. This data is drawn in order to display a variable display of normal decorative patterns (designs from "1" to "9" in this feature section 193SG).

In addition, the image data 2 displays a swinging display of decorative symbols in each of the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R when the temporary stop suggestion production is executed, and also displays the non-operation of the temporary stop suggestion production. At the time of execution, it is also image data that displays a variable display of decorative patterns in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

As shown in FIG. 16-4(B), the image data 3 is a pseudo continuous pattern directed downward from the center of the image display device 5 immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect ends without the pseudo continuous pattern temporarily stopping. This is data drawn to display a moving display of consecutive symbols.

As shown in FIGS. 16-3(C) and 16-4(C), the image data 4 is transmitted from the outer peripheral edge of the image display device 5 to the central portion of the image display device 5 (“middle” decorative pattern display). This is data drawn to display concentrated lines toward area 5C).

As shown in FIGS. 16-3 and 16-4, display priorities for displaying images on the image display device 5 are set for these image data 1 to 4. Image data 1 is set to have the highest display priority. Further, the display priority of image data 2 is set lower than that of image data 1, and the display priority of image data 3 is set lower than that of image data 2. The display priority of image data 4 is set to be the lowest (display priority of images in image display device 5: image data 1>image data 2>image data 3>image data 4). That is, in the image display device 5, an image based on image data 1 is displayed as the uppermost image, an image based on image data 2 is displayed as a lower layer image than an image based on image data 1, and an image based on image data 3 is displayed as a lower layer image. An image is displayed as a lower layer image than an image based on image data 1 and an image based on image data 2, and an image based on image data 4 is displayed as an image based on image data 1, an image based on image data 2, and an image based on image data 3. It is displayed as a lower layer image than the image.

Although not particularly illustrated, the image data in the feature section 193SG includes, in addition to image data 1 to image data 4, image data 5 that is drawn to display a background image on the image display device 5. . The display priority of the image data 5 is set lower than that of the image data 4. That is, in this feature section 193SG, among the images displayed on the image display device 5, the background image is displayed as the lowest layer of data.

Therefore, when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed, the image based on image data 2 (the moving display of the pseudo-continuous pattern from the top to the bottom) is changed to image data 4, as shown in Figure 16-3 (D). The image based on image data 1 (temporary stop suggestion image) is displayed with priority over the image based on image data 2 and the image based on image data 4. Immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect ends without the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stopping, the image based on image data 3 (from the center of the pseudo-continuous pattern to The image based on image data 2 (display moving downward from the top of the decorative pattern) is displayed with priority over the image based on image data 4 (the saturated line), and the image based on image data 2 (display moving downward from the top of the decorative pattern) is displayed with priority over the image based on image data 4. The image based on image data 3 and the image based on image data 4 are displayed with priority.

The convergent lines in this feature section 193SG are set to a high transmittance (for example, 50%). Therefore, as shown in Figures 16-3(C) and 16-4(D), while the temporary stop suggestion effect is being executed, the player can see the decorative patterns, pseudo consecutive patterns, and temporary stop suggestion images through the convergent lines.

In particular, in this feature section 193SG, during execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) displays the image data shown in FIG. The player is made to pay attention to whether or not the symbols temporarily stop. In addition, in the variable display that executes the temporary stop suggestion performance, the performance control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) controls whether the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped at the start timing of the variable display or not. The image data to be stopped is set and variable display is performed. Then, the performance control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) changes the image data to be displayed on the image display device 5 at the display image data switching timing (see FIG. 16-33) of the temporary stop suggestion performance in which the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop. The image data in which the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped (FIG. 16-3) is switched to the image data in which the pseudo-continuous pattern is not temporarily stopped (FIG. 16-4) shown in FIG. 16-4.

FIG. 16-5(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the production control command used in the feature section 193SG. The production control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIG. 16-5(A) is an example, and other command formats may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 16-5(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) of a symbol (also referred to as a performance symbol). Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that can be arbitrarily set according to the content of the instruction by the production control command. Note that in the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern to be specified.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in Figure 16-5 (B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also referred to as variable display result) is a "miss", a "big hit", or a "small hit". Different EXT data is set depending on the result (predetermined result) and the result of determining which of a plurality of types of jackpot is to be selected when the variable display result is "jackpot" (jackpot type determination result).

For example, as shown in FIG. 16-5(B), in the variable display result designation command, command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot A". Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot B". Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot C". Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "non-variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "small jackpot".

Command 8F00H is a pattern determination command that specifies the stop (determination) of the change in the decorative patterns in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. Command 95XXH is a game state designation command that specifies the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which neither time-saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed but probability variable control is not performed (low probability high base state, time-saving state). In addition, command 9502H is a third game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which high probability bonus control is performed but time-saving control is not performed (high probability low base state, high probability bonus state without time-saving), and command 9503H is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control and high probability bonus control are both performed (high probability high base state, high probability bonus state with time-saving).

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that designates the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game or a small win game. Command A1XXH is a big winning hole opening notification command that notifies that the big winning hole is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state. Command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the jackpot that notifies that the jackpot has changed from the open state to the closed state during the jackpot gaming state. Command A3XXH is a winning end designation command that designates the display of an effect image at the end of a jackpot game or a small winning.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command may be set, so that different EXT data may be set depending on the predetermined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command while the big winning hole is open and the notification command after the big winning hole is opened, for example, in response to the number of rounds (for example, "1" to "10") in the normal open jackpot state and the high speed open jackpot state, which will be described later, Different EXT data is set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that passed through (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A was detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting prize (first starting winning) occurred. This is a first starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. , is a second starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first pending memory number notification command that notifies the first special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. Command C2XXH is a second pending memory number notification command that notifies the second special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. The first pending storage number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, when the second starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of pending memories decreases), the special figure game It may also be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total number of pending memories may be transmitted. That is, a total number of pending memories notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Commands C4XXH and C6XXH are presentation control commands (commands specifying the judgment result at the time of winning) that indicate the content of the judgment result at the time of winning. Of these, command C4XXH is a pattern specification command that indicates whether the variable display result will be a "jackpot" or not, the judgment result of the type of jackpot (probable win, non-probable win, or sudden probability), and whether it will be a small win, as the judgment result at the time of winning. In addition, command C6XXH is a variation category command that indicates the judgment result at the time of winning, that is, whether the random number value for judging the variation pattern will be a "non-reach", "super reach", or "other".

Note that the commands shown in Figure 16-5(A) are just examples; some of these commands may be omitted, different commands may be used in place of these commands, or some of these commands may not be included. You may add a command different from the one in . For example, a prize ball number notification command that allows you to specify the number of prize balls that will be paid out based on the game balls entering each winning slot, and a gate notification command that allows you to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times the probability change control or time saving control will be executed, etc. may be provided.

FIG. 16-6 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 16-6, in this feature section 193SG, on the side of the main board 11, a random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and a random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. , and the random number MR4 for determining the display result of the ordinary figure are controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random numbers used to control the progress of games are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may be one that counts numerical data indicating some or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting section (not shown), to update various numerical data by software, thereby updating the random numbers MR1 to MR4. Numerical data indicating a portion may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control a variable display result such as a special pattern in a special pattern game as a "jackpot" into a jackpot game state. For example, It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A", "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", or "non-probable variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". This is a random number value used to determine the value, and takes, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols to one of multiple types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to " Takes a value in the range of ``997''.

The random number MR4 for determining the general pattern display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the general pattern game by the normal pattern display 20 is to be "normal pattern hit" or "normal pattern hit". This is a random number value, for example, in the range of "3" to "13".

FIG. 16-7(A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM 101. In this feature section 193SG, a common special figure display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the special figure display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table 1 shows variable display results in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special figure display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special figure display device 4B. Before the finalized special symbol is derived and displayed, to determine whether or not to control the variable display result into a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" based on the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. This is the table being referenced.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in the feature section 193SG, depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "miss".

In the special figure display result determination table 1, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result determines whether or not the special figure display result is treated as a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot gaming state. This is judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this feature section 193SG, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), there are more decision values than when the gaming state is in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "Jackpot". As a result, in a variable probability state (high probability state) in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, compared to the probability determined (approximately 1/300 in this feature section 193SG), the probability that the special figure display result is determined as a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled becomes higher (approximately 1/300 in this feature section 193SG). /30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, when the gaming state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a variable probability state (high probability state), it is determined that the control is to be made into a jackpot gaming state compared to when it is in a normal state or a time saving state. In order to increase the probability of winning, the determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state.

Further, FIG. 16-7(B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special figure display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special figure display device 4B. Before the finalized special symbol is derived and displayed, it is determined based on the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result whether or not to control the variable display result to a "small win" game state as a "small win". This is the table referenced for this purpose.

In the special figure display result determination table 2 in this feature section 193SG, regardless of whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result determines whether to control the special figure display result to a "small hit" game state as a "small hit". This is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result judgment table 2 in this feature section 193SG, the number of judgment values assigned to the "small hit" is different depending on the first special figure game and the second special figure game. There is. Specifically, if it is a special game of the first special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the "small hit", but if it is a special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit". No judgment value has been assigned. Therefore, as will be described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the time saving control is executed to generate the second starting winning prize formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. In the high base state where winnings occur and the variable display of the second special figure is often executed, "small hits" almost never occur, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter a prize opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a small hit in which many game balls cannot be obtained, thereby preventing the game interest from decreasing.

FIG. 16-8(A) shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this feature section 193SG selects one of a plurality of jackpot types based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special figure display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled. This is a table that is referenced to determine the In the jackpot type determination table, the special symbol for which a variable display (fluctuating display) was performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A). 2 special pattern display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type may be "non-probable variable jackpot", "probable variable jackpot A", or " They are assigned to a plurality of jackpot types such as "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C."

Here, to explain the jackpot types in this feature section 193SG using FIG. 16-8(B), in this feature section 193SG, high accuracy control and time saving control are set as jackpot types after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Probability variable jackpot A" and "Probability variable jackpot B" which are executed and move to a high-precision high base state, and a high-probability low base state in which high-precision control is executed but time-saving control is not executed after the jackpot gaming state ends. A "probable variable jackpot C" that transitions, and a "non-probable variable jackpot" that transitions to a low-probability-high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state where only the time saving control is executed are set.

The jackpot game state by the "probable variable jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). On the other hand, the jackpot game state of "Probable Variable Jackpot B" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds). . In addition, the jackpot game state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). . Therefore, the "probable variable jackpot A" may be referred to as a 10 round (10R) variable probability jackpot, and the "probable variable jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5 round (5R) variable variable jackpot. Furthermore, in the jackpot game based on "Probable Variable Jackpot C", a round in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player is repeatedly executed twice (so-called 2 rounds), and a special This is a high-speed opening jackpot in which the opening period of the variable winning ball device 7 is shorter (for example, 0.1 seconds) than other jackpot games. Furthermore, during the jackpot game of any jackpot type, probability change control and time saving control are not executed.

Also, although not particularly illustrated, the small winning game state in the feature section 193SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 twice to the first state advantageous to the player, and the opening time is the same as the variable jackpot C. This is the open period (0.1 seconds in this feature section 193SG). Furthermore, after the small winning game ends, the gaming state immediately before the small winning game is carried over.

In other words, in this feature section 193SG, when it is decided to have a "high probability jackpot C" or a "small jackpot", the variable display is executed in the same variable pattern (PC1-1 shown in FIG. 16-9), and the chance eye is displayed as a stopped variable display result. Furthermore, since the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 is the same, it is not possible to distinguish from these variable displays and the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 whether it is a "high probability jackpot C" in which high probability control is executed, or a "small jackpot" in which the previous game state continues without high probability control. Therefore, after the end of the high probability jackpot C jackpot game or small jackpot game, it is possible to have the player continue playing while expecting that high probability control is being executed.

The high probability control and time saving control that are executed after the end of the jackpot game state of the probability variable jackpot A and the probability variable jackpot B are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is a variable probability jackpot A or variable probability jackpot B, the high probability control and time saving control are executed again after the jackpot gaming state ends, so the jackpot gaming state does not go through the normal state. This occurs continuously, resulting in a so-called consecutive home situation.

On the other hand, the time-saving control that is executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to a "non-variable jackpot" ends when a specified number of special games (100 times in this feature part 193SG) are played, or when the jackpot game state is reached before the specified number of special games are played.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 16-8(A), depending on whether the variably displayed special symbol is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, "probable variable jackpot A", " The assignment of determination values to the jackpot types of "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", and "non-probable variable jackpot" is different. In other words, when the variably displayed special figure is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "Probable Variable Jackpot B" or "Probable Variable Jacket B" with a small number of rounds. If the variablely displayed special figure is the second special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C". It has not been done. With such settings, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the first starting condition for starting the special pattern game using the first special pattern displayed by the first special pattern display device 4A. and when the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fulfillment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Therefore, the ratio at which the jackpot type is determined to be "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be varied. In particular, in the special pattern game using the second special pattern, the jackpot type is not determined to be controlled to a normal open jackpot state or a high speed open jackpot state with a small number of rounds, such as "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C". Therefore, for example, by high opening control accompanying time saving control, in a gaming state where game balls are likely to enter the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, frequent occurrence of a jackpot state where few prize balls are obtained can be avoided. This makes it possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 16-8 (A), the assignment of the determination value to the jackpot type of "non-probable variation" is determined by whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Since it is the same regardless of whether it is the same, the probability of a non-probable jackpot and the probability of a fixed jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as mentioned above, the allocation of judgment values for "probable strange jackpot B" and "probable strange jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the assignment of the judgment value for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" which has a large number of rounds, It is set so that it is easier to decide if it is a special figure game of a special figure than if it is a special figure game of the first special figure.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range that is different from the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is the jackpot of "probable strange jackpot B" or "probable strange jackpot C". It may be possible to assign it to a type. For example, in the case of a special pattern game with the second special pattern, the judgment value is smaller than in the case of a special pattern game with the first special pattern, for the jackpot types of "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether it is a first special figure game or a second special figure game.

FIG. 16-9 shows a variation pattern in this feature section 193SG. In this feature section 193SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach", and the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in response to cases where the display result is a "big hit" or a "small win." In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the off-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off". A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is referred to as a jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. Although this feature section 193SG provides two types of normal reach variation patterns, the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more types of normal reach variation patterns may be provided, or one normal reach variation pattern may be provided. It is also possible to use only the types. Furthermore, a plurality of super reach variation patterns may be provided, such as super reach α, super reach β, . . . .

In addition, the fluctuation patterns in this feature section 193SG include a special winning fluctuation pattern ( PC1-1) is also included.

As shown in FIG. 16-9, the special symbol variation time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the normal reach variation pattern is executed in the feature section 193SG is set shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern.

In addition, the normal reach variation patterns in this feature section 193SG include a variation pattern in which a pseudo-continuous effect is not executed, in which a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and variable-displayed again during a variable display, and a pseudo-continuous effect is executed once during a variable display. There is a variation pattern. In addition, in the normal reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is not performed during the variable display is set to have a shorter special figure variation time than the variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed once during the variable display.

Furthermore, regarding the super reach variation patterns in this feature section 193SG, there are a variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous effect is executed twice during a variable display, and a variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous effect is executed three times during a variable display. In addition, in the super reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed twice during the variable display is set to have a shorter special symbol variation time than the variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed 3 times during the variable display. .

In addition, in this feature section 193SG, since the variable display result is set to be a "jackpot" and the jackpot expectation level increases in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach, in the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern, The longer the special figure fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a jackpot.

In other words, regarding the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern in the feature section 193SG, the greater the number of times the pseudo continuous performance is executed during variable display, the higher the jackpot expectation level becomes.

In addition, in this feature section 193SG, as will be described later, the type of these fluctuation patterns is determined first, such as a non-reach type, a normal reach type, a super reach type, etc. After that, instead of determining the fluctuation pattern to be executed from among the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type, the fluctuation pattern is determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern may be provided, and from these random numbers for determining the type of variation pattern. The type of variation pattern may be determined first, and then the variation patterns belonging to the determined type may be determined.

FIG. 16-10 is an explanatory diagram of a method for determining a variation pattern in this feature section 193SG. In this feature section 193SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected differs depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 16-10, if the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to determine the variation pattern. PB1-1 (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance 1-time jackpot), PB1-3 (variation pattern of super reach pseudo-continuous performance 2-time jackpot), PB1-4 (super It is determined from the variable pattern of reach pseudo consecutive performance 3 times jackpot). In addition, if the variable display result is Probable Variable Jackpot A or Probable Variable Jackpot B, select Variation Pattern Judgment Table B for Jackpot, and change the variation pattern to PB1-1 (Normal Reach Jackpot) using the corresponding Jackpot Variation Pattern Judgment Table B. (variation pattern), PB1-2 (variation pattern of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance, 1-time jackpot), PB1-3 (variation pattern of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance, 2-time jackpot), PB1-4 (variation pattern of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance, 3-time jackpot) ).

As shown in FIG. 16-10, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A and the jackpot variation pattern determination table B have different determination ratios for PB1-1 to PB1-4. Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 45%, PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 20%, Determine PB1-4 at a rate of 5%. On the other hand, in jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 20%, PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 30%, and PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 20%. 4 at a rate of 45%. In other words, in this feature section 193SG, when the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot A or probability variable jackpot B, the super reach variation pattern is determined at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a non-probability variable jackpot. It has become. Furthermore, if we pay attention to the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous effect, when the variable display result is a variable probability jackpot A or a variable probability variable jackpot B, there are more pseudo-continuous effects during the variable display than when the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot. It is easier to implement. Therefore, this feature section 193SG makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the variation pattern in the variable display and the number of executions of the pseudo continuous effect.

In addition, if the variable display result is a definite variable jackpot C or a small hit, select the special winning variation pattern judgment table, and use the special winning variation pattern judgment table to change the variation pattern to PC1-1 (special winning variation pattern). In other words, in this feature section 193SG, the variable display is executed with the same variation pattern when the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot C and when the variable display result is a small win. It is difficult to specify whether the result is a variable jackpot C or a small hit.

In addition, if the variable display result is "Loss" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 2 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for losses, and select the corresponding variation pattern judgment table A. Using variation pattern determination table A for miss, change the variation patterns to PA1-1 (non-reach variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach variation pattern), and PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous performance 1-time variation variation pattern). ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern with two missed super reach pseudo consecutive performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern with three missed super reach pseudo consecutive performances).

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 3, select the fluctuation pattern judgment table B for the loss, and Using fluctuation pattern determination table B, change the fluctuation patterns into PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern with non-reach miss), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach miss), and PA2-2 (variation pattern with one miss of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance). ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern with two missed super reach pseudo consecutive performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern with three missed super reach pseudo consecutive performances).

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 4, select the fluctuation pattern judgment table C for the loss, and select the fluctuation pattern judgment table C for the loss. Using fluctuation pattern determination table C, change the fluctuation patterns into PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation pattern with non-reach miss), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach miss), and PA2-2 (variation pattern with one miss of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance). ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern with two missed super reach pseudo consecutive performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern with three missed super reach pseudo consecutive performances).

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for failure, and change the fluctuation pattern to PA1-4 using the fluctuation pattern determination table D for failure. It is determined from PA2-1 (a time-saving shortening variation pattern that is out of reach) and PA2-1 (a variation pattern that is out of normal reach).

In other words, when the variable display result in this feature section 193SG is "off", the special figure is Since the rate at which variable display is executed is higher due to shortening variation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) whose variation time is shorter than the normal non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1), While preventing the game from being delayed, it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a jackpot.

The RAM 102 in the feature section 193SG is provided with, for example, a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of games in the pachinko game machine 1. The data holding area for game control includes a first special figure reservation storage section, a second special figure reservation storage section, a regular figure reservation storage section, a game control flag setting section, a game control timer setting section, and a game control counter. It includes a setting section and a game control buffer setting section.

The first special figure holding storage unit stores special figures that have not yet been started, although a game ball has passed (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting prize) has occurred. Stores pending data of the game (special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A). As an example, the first special figure holding storage unit associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first starting prize opening with the holding number, and the first starting condition is satisfied when the game ball passes (enters). The CPU 103 extracts from the random number circuit 104 etc. based on the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern as pending data. , are stored until the number of stored items reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). In this way, the suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage section indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game is suspended. ) is the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a jackpot.

The second special figure holding storage unit stores special figures that have not yet been started, although the game ball has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. Stores pending data of a figure game (a special figure game using the second special figure on the second special figure display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting prize opening with the holding number, and the second starting condition is satisfied when the game ball passes (enters). The CPU 103 extracts from the random number circuit 104 etc. based on the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination as pending data. , are stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (eg, "4"). In this way, the suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage section indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game is suspended. ) is the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a jackpot.

The reserved information (first reserved information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning port, and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the establishment of the second start winning condition by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning port may be stored in a common reserved memory unit in association with the reserved number. In this case, start port data indicating whether the game ball passed (entered) the first or second start winning port may be included in the reserved information and stored in association with the reserved number.

The standard figure holding storage section stores the hold information of the standard figure game which has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal figure holding storage unit associates the game balls with the holding numbers in the order in which they pass through the passage gate 41, and stores the normal figure display result judgment data extracted from the random number circuit 104 by the CPU 103 based on the passing of the game balls. The numerical data indicating the random number MR4 of is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of the game on the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting section is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting section stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting section is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting section stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting section may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the gaming random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4, are stored as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number is updated periodically or irregularly according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the updating operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 11 has an area for holding various data used to control performance operations, such as data storage for performance control as shown in FIG. 16-11(A). Area 193SG190 is provided. The production control data holding area 193SG190 shown in FIG. 16-11(A) includes a production control flag setting section 193SG191, a production control timer setting section 193SG192, a production control counter setting section 193SG193, and a production control buffer setting section 193SG194. We are prepared.

The production control flag setting section 193SG191 includes multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to production operation states such as the display state of production images on the screen of the image display device 5, production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, etc. A flag is set. For example, the production control flag setting section 193SG191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The performance control timer setting section 193SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as display operations of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the production control timer setting section 193SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The performance control counter setting section 193SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control counter setting section 193SG193 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting section 193SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control buffer setting section 193SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this feature section 193SG, data constituting a starting winning reception command buffer 193SG194A as shown in FIG. 16-11(B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting section 193SG194. The start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special symbol reserved memory. A corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") are provided. In addition, the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the second special symbol reserved memory. ”) and a storage area corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed (an area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”). When there is a starting prize in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command or second starting opening winning designation command), symbol designation command, variable category designation A set of four commands, a command and a pending storage number notification command (a first pending storage number notification command or a second pending storage number notification command), is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure pending memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure pending memory in the starting winning reception command buffer 193SG194A are used for these starting opening winning designation commands, symbol designation commands, variable category designation commands, A storage area (entry) is secured for storing the number of pending storage notification commands in association with each other and storing them separately in a first special symbol pending storage and a second special pattern pending storage.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) are determined later when the start condition is met and the variable display of the highest pending storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") starts. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the suspended memory for which the start condition is satisfied, are shifted upward one by one so that the start condition is satisfied, and the stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or "2-0" are It is cleared in the special drawing waiting process that is executed when ending the process.

Furthermore, in the starting winning reception command buffer 193SG194A of the feature section 193SG, there is information indicating whether or not the display pattern has not yet been determined in conjunction with the determination of whether or not to execute the pre-read notice performance in the pre-read notice setting process (FIG. 14). In other words, due to the occurrence of a new starting prize, the display pattern has not yet been determined because the starting opening winning designation command, symbol designation command, variable category designation command, and pending storage number notification command are newly stored. A display undetermined flag indicating , and a pending display flag to which a flag value is set according to the display pattern (display mode) of the pending memory display, respectively corresponding to the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory. A storage area is secured for each storage area (entry) so that it can be stored in association with a buffer number.

In addition, the starting winning command buffer 193SG194A of this feature section 193SG has a storage area so that the performance restriction flag can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory. is secured for each storage area (entry). In addition, the production restriction flag means that, in the command analysis process (Figure 16-18), a starting prize has occurred in the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole, but the symbol designation command, variable category designation command, and number of pending memories This is a flag indicating that the entry is not a target of a pre-read preview performance when a notification command is not received within a first pending storage number notification waiting time or a second pending storage number notification waiting time, which will be described later.

In addition, in the case where execution of the pre-read notice performance is not determined in the pre-read notice setting process described later, "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal pending memory display is stored in the pending display flag. As a result, the reserved memory display in the normal display mode (for example, a white circle) is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D and the second reserved memory display area 193SG5U provided at the bottom of the image display device 5, and When it is decided to execute the reading preview effect, "1" (square By setting (◇)) or "2" (star (☆)), a special mode of pending memory display different from the normal display mode is displayed in the first pending memory display area 193SG5D and the second pending memory display area 193SG5U. The variable display corresponding to the pending memory display foretells that there is a high possibility of a jackpot or a super reach.

At the time of starting winning into the first starting winning opening, the performance control CPU 120 stores commands from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure pending memory of the starting winning receiving command buffer 193SG194A. Then, when a starting prize is entered into the second starting prize opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the second special figure pending memory of the starting winning reception command buffer 193SG194A. go. At the time of starting winning, the starting opening winning specifying command to the pending storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the starting opening winning prize designation command is stored in the storage areas corresponding to the endings "1" to "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first special figure pending memory or the second special figure pending memory. , symbol designation command, fluctuation category designation command, and pending storage number notification command are stored in this order.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 193SG194A shown in FIG. 16-11(B) is sent to the entry (buffer The entry stored in the buffer number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2-0") is deleted. -1") and the stored contents of the entries subsequent to the pending storage of the variable display to be started are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 16-11(B), when the variable display of the decorative symbols in the first special symbol retention memory is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number Each command stored in "1" is shifted to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1". The commands that are shifted and stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the starting prize winning determination process of the main feature section 193SG executed in step S101 in FIG. 5 will be explained based on FIG. 16-12. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether the state is the same (step 193SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 193SGS101; Y), the number of reserved memories of the first special figure, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is set to the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether the value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is reached (step 193SGS102). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the first special symbol pending storage number by reading the first pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the first pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section, for example. When the first special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value in step 193SGS102 (step 193SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section is set to "1" (step 193SGS103).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off in step 193SGS101 (step 193SGS101; N), or when the number of first special symbols pending memory has reached the upper limit value in step 193SGS102 (step 193SGS102; Y), the variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is in the on state ( Step 193SGS104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 193SGS104; Y), the number of second special symbols pending memory, which is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, is set to the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether the value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is reached (step 193SGS105). The CPU 103 should just be able to specify the second special symbol pending memory number by reading the second pending memory number count value which is the stored value of the second pending memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting section, for example. When the second special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value at step 193SGS105 (step 193SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section is set to "2" (step 193SGS106).

After executing either of the processes of step 193SGS103 and step 193SGS106, the number of special symbols pending stored according to the starting opening buffer value, which is the storage value of the starting opening buffer, is updated to add 1 (step 193SGS107). For example, when the starting port buffer value is "1", the first pending storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is "2", the second pending storage number count value is added by 1. In this way, the first pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting prize opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the first special pattern is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting prize opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the second special pattern is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of pending memories is also updated to add 1 (step 193SGS108). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section, may be updated by adding one.

After executing the process of step 193SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random number MR1 for determining the jackpot type from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting section. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 of , and the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are extracted (step 193SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as reservation information at the head of a free entry in the special figure reservation storage unit according to the starting opening buffer value (step 193SGS110). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage section, while when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the 2 special figure reservation storage section.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is considered a "jackpot", and whether or not the variable display result is determined by the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of jackpot in the case of "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining a variation pattern is used to determine a variation pattern including variable display times of special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of step 193SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random values used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display results and variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols.

Following the process of step 193SGS110, transmission settings of a starting slot winning designation command according to the starting slot buffer value are performed (step 193SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the performance control board Settings are made to send the first starting opening winning designation command to No. 12. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", by storing the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the sending command buffer, Make settings for transmitting the second starting opening winning designation command. The starting opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 13 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted.

Following the process of step 193SGS111, winning random value determination process is executed (step 193SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending memory number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the sending command pointer in the sending command buffer, a pending memory number notification command is sent to the production control board 12. Settings are made for this purpose (step 193 SGS 113). The pending storage number notification command set in this way is sent from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 13 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted.

After executing the process of step 193SGS113, it is determined whether the starting port buffer value is "1" (step 193SGS114). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is "1" (step 193SGS114; Y), the starting port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 193SGS115), and then the process of step 193SGS104 is started. move on. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2" (step 193SGS114; N), the starting opening buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 193SGS116), and then the starting opening is won. Finish the process. Thereby, even if both the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid starting winning of a game ball, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be surely completed.

FIG. 16-13(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 193SGS112 of FIG. 16-13 as the winning random value determination process. In this feature section 193SG, when variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, special symbol normal processing (step S110 in FIG. 5, FIG. A determination is made as to whether or not to treat the result) as a "jackpot" and control the game to a jackpot gaming state. In addition, in a variation pattern setting process (step S111 in FIG. 5, FIGS. 16-15) to be described later, a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is determined. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning hole (the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole), the CPU 103 executes the winning time random numerical value judgment process of step 193 SGS 112. By doing so, it is determined whether or not the jackpot symbol is determined to be stopped and displayed as a special symbol display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach is determined. As a result, before the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting prize opening starts, that is, before it is determined whether or not to win the jackpot at the start of the variable display. Beforehand, it is determined whether the special figure display result will be a "jackpot" or which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern will be, and based on this determination result, the performance control CPU 120 etc. , as will be described later, a preview effect such as a pre-read preview effect is executed.

In the prize winning random value determination process shown in FIG. 16-13(A), the CPU 103 first checks the status of the time saving flag and probability change flag provided in the game control flag setting section, etc., and determines whether the pachinko game machine 1 is specified (step 193SGS121). The CPU 103 specifies that the variable probability state is in the variable probability state when the variable probability flag is in the on state, and specifies that the state is in the reduced time state when the variable variable probability flag is in the off state and the time saving flag is in the on state, and when both the variable variable flag and the time saving flag are in the state When it is off, it may be specified that it is in the normal state.

Following the processing of step 193SGS121, the special chart display result judgment table 1 shown in FIG. 16-7 is selected and set (step 193SGS122). After that, it is judged whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result extracted in step 193SGS109 of FIG. 16-12 is within a predetermined jackpot judgment range (step 193SGS123). In the jackpot judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" in the special chart display result judgment table 1 selected by the processing of step 193SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 can compare the random number value MR1 with each judgment value one by one to judge whether there is a judgment value that matches the random number value MR1. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) judgment values included in the jackpot judgment range may be set, and the CPU 103 may compare the random number value MR1 with the minimum and maximum values of the jackpot judgment range to determine whether the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot judgment range. In this case, by determining that the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot judgment range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined to be a "jackpot".

If it is determined in step 193SGS123 that it is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that there is no jackpot in the variable display (step 193SGS123; N), the special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 16-7 2 is selected and set (step 193SGS124). Thereafter, it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 193SGS109 of FIG. 16-12 is within a predetermined small hit determination range (step 193SGS125).

If the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is within a predetermined small hit determination range, that is, if it is determined that there will be a small hit in the variable display (step 193SGS125; Y), the variable display result will be a "small hit". Execute the transmission setting of the 6th symbol designation command, which is a symbol designation command according to the result (step 193SGS126), select and set the special winning variation pattern determination table (step 193SGS127), and proceed to step 193SGS138. .

If the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is not within the predetermined small hit judgment range, that is, if the variable display result is a "miss" in the variable display, a symbol will be displayed according to the variable display result being a "miss". The transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is the designation command, is executed (step 193SGS128), and it is determined whether the time saving flag is on, that is, whether the current gaming state is the time saving state or not (step 193SGS128). 193SGS129). If the time saving flag is off (step 193SGS129; N), select and set the fluctuation pattern determination table A for failure, and if the time saving flag is on (step 193SGS129; Y), determine the fluctuation pattern for failure. Table D is selected and set (step 193SGS131). Note that the failure variation pattern determination table A is a failure variation pattern determination table that is used when the number of pending memories is two or less. Further, the loss variation pattern determination table D is a loss variation pattern determination table that is used when the gaming state is a high base state in which time saving control is being executed.

In addition to these miss fluctuation pattern determination tables A and D, this feature unit 193SG also has miss fluctuation pattern determination table B, which is used when the number of reserved memories is three, and miss fluctuation pattern determination table C, which is used when the number of reserved memories is four, prepared in advance. Of these, of miss fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C, in miss fluctuation pattern determination table A, for example, 498 determination values from 0 to 497 (approximately 50%) of the possible range of the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are assigned to non-reach fluctuation patterns, in miss fluctuation pattern determination table B, 598 determination values from 0 to 597 (approximately 60%) of the possible range of the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are assigned to non-reach fluctuation patterns, and in miss fluctuation pattern determination table C, 698 determination values from 0 to 697 (approximately 70%) of the possible range of the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are assigned to non-reach fluctuation patterns. On the other hand, in the loss fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C, 100 determination values (approximately 10%) from 898 to 997 are assigned to the range of possible values of the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern for the super reach fluctuation pattern.

Therefore, by determining the fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern determination table A for failure in step 193SGS126, the determination of non-reach and super reach will always be non-reach or super reach even if the number of reserved memories changes after the determination. Since this is a fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern determination table A for losing is used to determine when a starting prize is won.

In addition, if it is determined in step 193SGS123 that it is within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that there will be a jackpot during variable display (step 193SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 16-13 (A), , the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step 193SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103 operates according to the variable special figure (the "first special figure" corresponding to "1" or the "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the starting opening buffer value. , selects table data for jackpot type determination from the table data configuring the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for determining the jackpot type, it is determined which of the plurality of jackpot types is to be determined.

The controller 100 also executes the setting to send the symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, the second symbol designation command if it is a sure-variable jackpot A, the third symbol designation command if it is a sure-variable jackpot B, the fourth symbol designation command if it is a sure-variable jackpot C, and the fifth symbol designation command if it is a non-variable jackpot (step 193SGS133), and then determines whether the determined jackpot type is a non-sure-variable jackpot (step 193SGS134a). If the determined jackpot type is a non-sure-variable jackpot (step 193SGS134a; Y), the controller 100 selects and sets the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A as a table for determining the jackpot fluctuation pattern (step 193SGS135), and proceeds to step 193SGS138.

Further, if the determined jackpot type is not a non-probability variable jackpot (step 193SGS134a; N), it is further determined whether the determined jackpot type is a probability variable jackpot A or a probability variable jackpot B (step 193SGS134b).

If the determined jackpot type is probability variable jackpot A or probability variable jackpot B (step 193SGS134b; Y), select and set jackpot variation pattern determination table B as the table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step 193SGS136), proceed to step 193SGS138.

If the determined jackpot type is not Probable Variable Jackpot A or Probable Variable Jackpot B (Step 193SGS134b; N), that is, if the determined jackpot type is Probable Variable Jackpot C, select and set the special winning variation pattern determination table. (Step 193SGS137) and proceeds to Step 193SGS138.

After executing any of the processes in step 193SGS127, step 193SGS130, step 193SGS131, step 193SGS135, step 193SGS136, and step 193SGS137, each fluctuation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are Using the numerical data indicating the random number MR3, a fluctuation category is determined according to the range of determination values including the random value MR3 (step 193SGS138). In this feature section 193SG, as shown in FIG. 16-13(B), at least when the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode is "non-reach" regardless of the total number of pending memories. A variable category that is a variable display mode of "Super Reach", a variable category of "Other" that is a variable display mode other than "Non-reach" and "Super Reach" (for example, normal reach), It is sufficient if it can be determined based on the random value MR3 whether or not such a fluctuation category is determined.

Thereafter, a setting is made to transmit a fluctuation category designation command according to the determination result of the process of step 193SGS138 to the production control board 12 (step 193SGS132), and then the winning random number value determination process is ended.

FIG. 16-14 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 16-14, the CPU 103 first determines whether the second special symbol pending storage number is "0" (step 193SGS141). The second special symbol pending memory number is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 193SGS141, the second pending storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting section may be read out, and it may be determined whether or not the read value is "0".

When the second special figure reservation storage number is other than "0" in step 193SGS141 (step 193SGS141; N), reservation data stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit corresponding to reservation number "1" Then, numerical data indicating a random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, and a random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (step 193SGS142). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation.

Following the process of step 193SGS142, the second special figure pending memory number and total pending memory number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting and updating the second special figure pending memory number count value and the total pending memory number count value. At the same time, the data in the second special figure reservation storage section is updated. Specifically, it indicates the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure reservation storage unit. The pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 193SGS143).

Thereafter, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer, to "2" (step 193SGS144), the process moves to step 193SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special figure pending memory number is "0" in step 193SGS141 (step 193SGS141; Y), it is determined whether the first special figure pending memory number is "0" (step 193SGS145) . The number of first special symbol pending memories is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 193SGS145, the game control counter setting section reads out the first pending memory count value stored in the first pending memory counter, and determines whether the read value is "0" or not. good. In this way, the process of step 193SGS145 is executed when it is determined in step 193SGS141 that the second special figure pending memory number is "0", and the first special figure pending memory number is "0". Determine whether or not. As a result, the special pattern game using the second special pattern starts to be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern.

Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern is not limited to being executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern, for example, the first starting prize opening or the second starting winning opening The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) and a starting prize occurs. In this case, a table is provided that stores data that can specify the order in which the starting winnings occur, and the execution of the special pattern game using either the first special pattern or the second special pattern is started from the stored data. It would be good if we could decide which.

When the first special figure reservation storage number is other than "0" in step 193SGS145 (step 193SGS145; N), reservation data stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit corresponding to reservation number "1" Then, numerical data indicating random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are read out (step 193SGS146). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation.

Following the process of step 193SGS146, the first special figure pending memory number and total pending memory number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting and updating the first special figure pending memory number count value and the total pending memory number count value. At the same time, the data in the first special figure reservation storage section is updated. Specifically, it indicates the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the first special figure reservation storage unit. The pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 193SGS147).

Thereafter, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer, to "1" (step 193SGS148), the process moves to step 193SGS149.

In step 193SGS149, the special symbol display result judgment shown in FIG. Select and set table 1. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special figure display result of "jackpot" and "miss". , it is determined whether the special figure display result is a "jackpot" or a "miss" (step 193 SGS 150a). In addition, in this step 193SGS150a, if the gaming state at that time is a high probability state (probability variation state) in which the probability variation flag is on, the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is set to a high probability state (probability variation state). ), it is determined that it is a "jackpot", and if it is not, it is determined that it is a "miss". In addition, if the probability change flag is off and the probability is low, if the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result falls within the range of 1 to 219, it will be judged as a "jackpot", and if it does not, it will be judged as a "miss". judge.

In this way, in the special figure display result determination table 1 selected in step 193SGS149, different determination values are assigned to "jackpot" depending on the gaming state at that time (high probability, low probability). , In the process of step 193 SGS 150a, the special figure display result is determined using different judgment data (judgment value) depending on whether the gaming state when variable display such as a special figure game is started is a high certainty state or not. By determining whether or not to be considered a "jackpot", when the gaming state is a high probability state, it is determined (determined) to be a "jackpot" with a higher probability than when the gaming state is a low probability state.

If it is determined in step 193SGS150a that it is a "jackpot" (step 193SGS150a; Y), the jackpot flag is turned on in the game control flag setting section (step 193SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 16-8(A) is selected and set as the table to be used for determining the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types (step 193SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the fluctuation random number buffer and the "non-probable variable jackpot" and "probable variable jackpot" are determined in the jackpot type determination table. Depending on which of the judgment values assigned to each of the jackpot types "A", "probable variable jackpot B", and "probable variable jackpot C" matches, it is determined which of the plurality of jackpot types is to be used (step 193 SGS 154 ).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step 193SGS154, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state can be set to either a time-saving state or a variable probability state that is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state. Whether to control or not is determined before the fixed special symbol as a variable display result is derived. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, the determined jackpot type is set, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value, which is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section (step 193SGS155). Remember. As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-probable variable jackpot" corresponding to a non-probable variable jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", and if the jackpot type is "probable variable A" corresponding to probability variable jackpot A, it is set to "1"; If it is "probable variable B" corresponding to B, it may be set as "2", and if it is "probable variable C" corresponding to probability variable jackpot C, it may be set as "3".

On the other hand, if it is determined in step 193SGS150a that it is not a "jackpot" (step 193SGS150a; N), the process proceeds to S150b, where the special figure display result determination table 2 shown in FIG. 16-7 is selected and set. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for variation is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special figure display result of "small hit", and the special figure It is determined whether or not the display result is a "small win" (step 193 SGS 150c). In addition, in step 193SGS150c, when the variable special figure is the first special figure, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is to be a "small hit" using the judgment value corresponding to the first special figure. If the variable special figure is the second special figure, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result should be a "small hit" using the determination value corresponding to the second special figure.

If it is determined in step 193SGS150c that the special figure display result is a "small win" (step 193SGS150c; Y), the small win flag provided in the game control flag setting section is turned on (step 193SGS151).

On the other hand, if it is not determined in step 193SGS150c that the special figure display result is a "small win" (step 193SGS150c; N), the process proceeds to step 193SGS156.

In step 193SGS156, the predetermined result of whether or not to control to the jackpot gaming state (whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on), and whether to control to the small winning gaming state (whether the small winning flag is turned on or not). A confirmed special symbol is set in accordance with the pre-determined result of whether or not the jackpot is played or not, and further, the determined result of the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot game state. As an example, in response to a pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is a "miss", a special symbol indicating a "-" symbol, which is a missed symbol, is set as a confirmed special symbol. In addition, if it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" in step 193SGS150a, and if the jackpot type in step 193SGS154 is "probable variable jackpot A", a special symbol indicating the number "7" is displayed. Set as a confirmed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B", a special symbol showing the number "5" is set as a confirmed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "non-probable variable jackpot", a special symbol showing the number "3" is set as a confirmed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C", a special symbol indicating the number "1" is set as a confirmed special symbol. In addition, in response to the pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is a "small win", a special symbol indicating the symbol "2", which is a small prize symbol, is set as a confirmed special symbol. Note that these confirmed special symbols are just examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or multiple types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After the confirmed special symbol is set in step 193SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", which corresponds to the variable pattern setting process (step 193SGS157), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated.

In addition, if the number of pending memories of the special pattern game using the first special pattern is "0" in step 193SGS145 (step 193SGS145; Y), after performing predetermined demo display settings (step 193SGS158), Special symbol normal processing ends. In this demonstration display setting, a production control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that specifies a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined production image on the image display device 5, for example, is sent from the main board 11 to the production control command. It is determined whether the transmission to the board 12 has been completed. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated. On the other hand, if it has not yet been sent, settings are made to send the customer waiting demo designation command, and then the demo display settings are ended.

FIG. 16-15 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 6 as the variation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 16-15, the CPU 103 first determines whether the jackpot flag is turned on (step 193SGS161). If the jackpot flag is turned on (step 193SGS161; Y), the jackpot type is specified from the jackpot type buffer value (step 193SGS162).

Then, it is determined whether the identified jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C" (step 193SGS163), and if it is not "probable variable jackpot C", that is, "probable variable jackpot A", "probable variable jackpot B", "non-probable variable jackpot B", If it is either "probable variable jackpot" (step 193SGS163; N), jackpot variation pattern determination table A or jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected and set according to the specified jackpot type. Specifically, when the specified jackpot type is "non-probable variable jackpot", select and set the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, and select and set the jackpot type to determine whether the specified jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A" or "probable variable jackpot B. ”, the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected and set.

On the other hand, if the identified jackpot type is a "C-type jackpot" (step 193SGS163; Y), a special jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table is selected and set (step 193SGS165).

In the determination at step 193SGS161, if the jackpot flag is not turned on (step 193SGS161; N), it is further determined whether the small hit flag is turned on (step 193SGS166). If the small hit flag is turned on (step 193SGS166; Y), a special win variation pattern determination table is selected and set (step 193SGS167), and the process proceeds to step 193SGS175.

On the other hand, if the small hit flag is off (step 193SGS166; N), the game state is changed to a variable probability state or a time saving state by determining whether or not the time saving flag is turned on in the game control flag setting section. It is determined whether or not time saving control is being performed (step 193SGS168). Then, if the time saving flag is turned on (step 193SGS168; Y), the failure variation pattern determination table D is selected and set as the table to be used for determining one of the plurality of variation patterns ( Step 193SGS169).

On the other hand, when the time-saving control is not in progress, that is, when the time-saving flag is not turned on (step 193SGS168; N), for example, the stored value of the pending storage number counter for variable special symbols provided in the game control counter setting section By reading, etc., the number of pending memories of the variable special symbols is specified, and it is determined whether the specified number of pending memories of the variable special symbols is 1 or 2 (step 193SGS170).

If the number of pending memories of the specified variable special symbol is 1 or 2 (step 193SGS170; N), the variation pattern determination table A for failure is used as a table to be used for determining one of the plurality of variation patterns. Select and set (step 193SGS171).

In addition, if the number of pending memories of the specified variable special figure is not 1 or 2 (step 193SGS170; N), it is further determined whether the number of pending memories of the specified variable special figure is 3 (step 193SGS172). ).

If the number of reserved memories for the identified special variable chart is 3 (step 193SGS172; Y), the loss variable pattern determination table B is selected and set as the table to be used for determining one of multiple types of variable patterns (step 193SGS173).

In addition, if the number of pending memories of the specified variable special pattern is not 3, that is, if the number of pending memories of the specified variable special pattern is 4 (step 193SGS172; N), select one of the multiple types of variable patterns. The error variation pattern determination table C is selected and set as the table to be used for determining the error pattern (step 193SGS174), and the process proceeds to step 193SGS175.

After executing any of the processes in step 193SGS164, step 193SGS165, step 193SGS167, step 193SGS169, step 193SGS171, step 193SGS173, and step 193SGS174, the random number MR3 for determining a variation pattern stored in a random number buffer for variation, etc. Based on the numerical data indicating is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step 193 SGS 175).

Incidentally, when the jackpot flag is off, by determining the variation pattern in the process of step 193SGS175, it is determined whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is set to "reach". That is, the process of step 193SGS170 includes a process of determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol should be set to the reach state when the variable display result is "miss".

After determining the fluctuation pattern in step 193SGS175, a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A and a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B are performed according to the variable special symbol designation buffer value. Settings are made to start the variation of the special symbols so as to start one of the special symbol games using the second special symbol (step 193SGS176). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1", settings are made to transmit a drive signal that updates the display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "2", settings are made to transmit a drive signal that updates the display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B.

Following the processing of step 193SGS176, settings are made to send various commands for when the special symbol starts to change (step 193SGS177). For example, when the special symbol change designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 sequentially sends the game state designation command, the first variable display start command, the change pattern designation command, the variable display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number notification command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The CPU 103 stores the setting data indicating the storage address (first address) in the ROM 101 of the first variable start command table prepared in advance in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section. On the other hand, when the variable special chart designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 stores setting data indicating the storage address in ROM 101 of the second variable start command table prepared in advance in a buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section in order to sequentially transmit the game state designation command, second variable display start command, variable pattern designation command, variable display result designation command, and second reserved memory number notification command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

After executing the process of step 193SGS177, the special symbol fluctuation time which is the variable display time of the special symbol according to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern is set (step 193SGS178). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from when the variable display of the special symbol starts in the special symbol game until the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result (special symbol display result) is stopped and displayed. It's time. Thereafter, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "2" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step 193SGS179), the variation pattern setting process is ended.

Based on the command transmission setting in step 193SGS177, every time the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. The designation command, the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command, the fluctuation pattern designation command, the variable display result designation command, the first pending storage number notification command or the second pending storage number notification command are sent in sequence. It turns out. The order in which these production control commands are sent can be changed arbitrarily, for example, the variable display result specification command is sent first, and then the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command, and the variable pattern are sent. The designation command, the game state designation command, the first pending storage number notification command, or the second pending storage number notification command may be transmitted in this order.

FIG. 16-16 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 turns on the end flag referred to in the special symbol variation process in step S112 to end the variation of the special symbol, and causes the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to Control is performed to stop and display the stop symbols (step 193SGS180). In addition, when the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special symbol, the fluctuation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is ended, and the fluctuation special symbol designation buffer value is If it is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is ended. In addition, control is performed to send a symbol confirmation command to the production control board 12 (step 193SGS181). Then, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is turned on (step 193SGS182), and if the jackpot flag is turned off (step 193SGS182; N), the small hit flag is also turned on. It is determined whether or not there is one (step 193 SGS 183).

If the small hit flag is in the on state, settings are made to the performance control board 12 to transmit a winning start 5 designation command corresponding to the small win (step 193SGS190a). Then, a value corresponding to the small winning display time is set in the small winning display time timer (step 193SGS190b). Further, the number of openings (for example, two times) is set in the number of openings counter for the big winning opening (step 193SGS190c). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "8" (step 193SGS190d), which is the value corresponding to the small hit release pre-process (step S118), and the special symbol stop process is ended.

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is in the ON state (step 193SGS182; Y), if the special probability flag or the time-saving flag is in the ON state, the CPU 103 clears the special probability flag and the time-saving flag to turn them OFF (step 193SGS184), and sets the performance control board 12 to send a hit start 1 designation command (special probability jackpot A), a hit start 2 designation command (special probability jackpot B), a hit start 3 designation command (special probability jackpot C), or a hit start 4 designation command (non-special probability jackpot) according to the type of jackpot stored (step 193SGS185).

Further, the CPU 103 performs settings for transmitting a gaming state designation command indicating the normal state to the production control board 12 (step 193SGS186).

Then, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (for example, the time for notifying the occurrence of a jackpot on the image display device 5) is set in the jackpot display time timer (step 193SGS187). Also, set the number of openings (for example, 10 times in the case of a non-probable variable jackpot or a variable variable jackpot A, 5 times in the case of a variable variable jackpot B, and 2 times in the case of a variable variable jackpot C) in the number of openings counter. (Step 193SGS188). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" (step 193SGS189), which is the value corresponding to the jackpot release preprocessing (step S114).

On the other hand, when the small hit flag is off (step 193SGS183; N), in step 193SGS190, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the time saving number counter is "0". If the value of the time saving number counter is "0" (step 193SGS190; Y), the process advances to step 193SGS196.

On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving counter is not "0" (step 193SGS190; N), that is, if the time-saving counter is in a high base state with remaining time-saving times, the value of the time-saving counter is decremented by 1 (step 193SGS191). Then, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter after subtraction is "0" or not (step 193SGS193). If it is not "0" (step 193SGS193; N), the process proceeds to step 193SGS196. If the value of the time-saving counter is "0" (step 193SGS193; Y), the process clears the time-saving flag to turn it off in order to end the time-saving control (step 193SGS194), sets the transmission of a game state designation command corresponding to the game state (specifically, low probability low base) corresponding to the state of the probability flag or the time-saving flag (step 193SGS195), and then proceeds to step 193SGS196.

In step 193SGS196, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process, and then the special symbol stop process is ended.

16-17 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S117 of FIG. 6 as the jackpot end process.

In the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot end display timer is operating, that is, the timer is counting (step 193SGS201). If the jackpot end display timer is not operating (step 193SGS201; N), a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time to display the jackpot end display on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time) is set in the jackpot end display timer. is set (step 193SGS202), and the process ends.

On the other hand, if the jackpot end display timer is in operation (step 193SGS201; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 193SGS203). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 193SGS204). If the time has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 193SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored jackpot type is a variable jackpot (step 193SGS205).

If the stored jackpot type is not a non-probable variable jackpot (step 193SGS205; N), it is further determined whether the stored jackpot type is a variable probability jackpot C (step 193SGS206).

If the stored jackpot type is variable probability jackpot C (step 193SGS206; Y), after turning on the probability variation flag (step 193SGS210), the process proceeds to step 193SGS213.

On the other hand, if the stored jackpot type is not probability variable jackpot C, that is, if the jackpot type is probability variable jackpot A or probability variable jackpot B (step 193SGS206; N), the probability variation flag is turned on (step 193SGS207), After turning on the time saving flag (step 193SGS208) and setting the time saving number counter to "0" (step 193SGS209), the process proceeds to step 193SGS213.

On the other hand, if the jackpot type is a variable jackpot (step 193SGS205; Y), step 193SGS211 and step 193SGS212 are executed to turn on the time saving flag and set "100" to the time saving counter. After that, the process proceeds to step 193SGS213.

In step 193SGS213, the jackpot flag is turned off, and settings are made to send a jackpot end designation command according to the jackpot type (step 193SGS214). Then, after setting the transmission of a gaming state designation command to notify the production control board 12 of the gaming state based on the probability change flag and time saving flag that have been turned on (step 193SGS215), the value of the special figure process flag is specially set. It is updated to "0" which is a value corresponding to the symbol normal processing (step 193SGS216).

Next, the operation of the production control board 12 will be explained. FIGS. 16-18 are flowcharts illustrating an example of the process executed in step S75 in FIG. 6 as the command analysis process. In the command analysis process shown in FIGS. 16-18, the production control CPU 120 first confirms the storage contents of the production control command reception buffer and receives the reception from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. It is determined whether there is a command (step 193SGS221). At this time, if there is no received command (step 193SGS221; N), it is determined whether the first or second pending storage number notification waiting time set in step 193SGS223 or step 193SGS225, which will be described later, has elapsed. (Step 193SGS237), if the first or second pending storage number notification waiting time has not elapsed (Step 193SGS2375; N), the command analysis process ends. On the other hand, if the first or second pending memory number notification waiting time has elapsed, that is, by the time the set first or second pending memory number notification waiting time elapses, the first or second pending memory number notification command or the second If the pending storage number notification command is not received (Step 193SGS237; Y), the display undetermined flag of the entry in which the first pending storage number notification command or the second pending storage number notification command is not yet stored is turned on. At the same time, the effect restriction flag of the entry whose storage has not been completed is turned on (step 193SGS238), and the command analysis process is ended.

If there is a received command in step 193SGS221 (step 193SGS221; Y), it is determined whether or not the received command is the first starting opening prize designation command, for example by checking the MODE data of the received command. (Step 193SGS222). When it is the first starting slot winning designation command (step 193SGS222; Y), the first pending storage number notification waiting time is set (step 193SGS223). For example, in the process of step 193SGS223, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the reception waiting time of the first pending storage number notification command is set in the command reception control timer provided in the production control timer setting section 193SG192. Bye.

If the received command is not the first starting slot winning designation command at step 193SGS222 (step 193SGS222; N), it is determined whether the received command is the second starting slot winning designation command (step 193SGS224). When it is the second starting opening winning designation command (step 193SGS224; Y), a second pending storage number notification waiting time is set (step 193SGS225). For example, in the process of step 193SGS225, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the reception waiting time of the second pending storage number notification command may be set in the command reception control timer.

If the received command is not the second starting opening winning designation command at step 193SGS224 (step 193SGS224; N), it is determined whether the received command is a symbol designation command (step 193SGS226). If the received command is not a symbol designation command at step 193SGS226 (step 193SGS226; N), it is determined whether the received command is a variable category command (step 193SGS227). If the received command is not a variable category command in step 193SGS227 (step 193SGS227; N), it is determined whether the received command is a first pending storage number notification command (step 193SGS228). If it is the first pending storage number notification command (Step 193SGS228; Y), the first pending storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the time measurement operation by the command reception control timer (Step 193SGS229). .

If the received command is not the first pending storage number notification command at step 193SGS228 (step 193SGS228; N), it is determined whether the received command is the second pending storage number notification command (step 193SGS230). If it is the second pending storage number notification command (step 193SGS230; Y), the second pending storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the time measurement operation by the command reception control timer (step 193SGS231). .

After executing either step 193SGS229 or step 193SGS231, the display pending flag of the stored entry is set to ON, and if there is an unreceived command, the performance restriction flag is set to ON (step 193SGS232).

If the received command at step 193SGS226 is a symbol designation command (step 193SGS226; Y), or if the received command at step 193SGS227 is a variable category command (step 193SGS227; Y), or at step 193SGS223, step 193SGS225, step 193SGS232 After executing any of the processes, the received command is stored at the beginning of the free area in the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A shown in FIG. 16-11 (step 193SGS233), and the process returns to step 193SGS221.

In addition, when a pending memory number notification command (first pending memory number notification command or second pending memory number notification command) is received together with a variable display start command (first variable display start command or second variable display start command), the pending memory number notification command may not be stored in the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A. In other words, it is sufficient if the performance control commands received in response to the occurrence of a start winning can be stored sequentially from the beginning of the free area in the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A.

If the received command is not the second pending storage number notification command in step 193SGS230 (step 193SGS230; N), settings are made in accordance with other received commands (step 193SGS234). Then, it is determined whether the first or second pending storage number notification waiting time set in step 193SGS223 or step 193SGS225 has elapsed (step 193SGS235), and the first or second pending storage number notification waiting time has elapsed. If not (step 193SGS235; N), the process returns to step 193SGS221. On the other hand, if the first or second pending memory number notification waiting time has elapsed, that is, by the time the set first or second pending memory number notification waiting time elapses, the first or second pending memory number notification command or the second If the pending storage number notification command is not received (Step 193SGS235; Y), the display undetermined flag of the stored entry is turned on, and the performance restriction flag of the corresponding storage incomplete entry is turned on. After that (step 193SGS236), the process returns to step 193SGS221.

FIGS. 16-19 are part of a flowchart showing an example of the production control process. In the performance control process processing, the performance control CPU 120 first determines the presence or absence of a prefetched preview performance and the performance pattern of the prefetched preview performance (the display pattern of the reserved memory display) in the prefetched preview setting process (S161); Next, a pending display update process is performed to update the pending memory display in the first pending storage display area 193SG005D and the second pending storage display area 193SG005U of the image display device 5 to a display according to the storage content of the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A. Execute (step 193SGS162).

FIG. 16-20 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of FIG. 5 as the prefetch notice setting process. In the advance notice setting process shown in FIG. 16-20, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not variable display is being executed (step 193SGS240a). Whether or not the variable display is being executed may be determined based on whether the value of the production control process flag is one of 1 to 3.

If the variable display is not being executed (step 193SGS240a; N), the process advances to step 193SGS241, and if the variable display is being executed (step 193SGS240a; Y), the first variable display start number notification effect is being executed. It is determined whether or not (step 193SGS240b). In addition, the first variable display start number notification effect is the start of the variable display again as a pseudo continuous effect, as shown in Figure 16-29 (E), Figure 16-30 (L), and Figure 16-31 (S). This is an effect for notifying the number of times that the variable display of the decorative pattern including the re-variable display is started during one variable display after the display is displayed. Further, in step 193SGS240a, it may be determined whether or not the first variable display start number notification effect is being executed by referring to the process data of the variable display being executed.

If it is not during the execution period of the first variable display start number notification effect (step 193SGS240b; N), the process proceeds to step 193SGS241, and if it is during the execution period of the first variable display start count notification effect (step 193SGS240b; Y), step By proceeding to 193SGS250, "0" corresponding to the normal display mode is set in the pending display flag, as will be described later. In other words, during the execution period of the first variable display start number notification effect, the pre-read preview effect is not executed.

In step 193SGS241, the performance control CPU 120 checks the reception command buffer 193SG194A at the time of starting winning. Then, it is determined whether or not there is a new storage of the command at the time of starting winnings based on whether there is an entry whose display undetermined flag is on (set to "1") (step 193SGS242) .

If there is no entry whose display undetermined flag is on (step 193SGS242; N), the prefetch notice setting process is ended, and if there is an entry whose display undetermined flag is on (step 193SGS242; Y). , Determine whether the symbol designation command of the entry is the fourth symbol designation command or the sixth symbol designation command, that is, whether the symbol designation command is the symbol designation command indicating a probability variable jackpot C or a small hit ( Step 193SGS243a). If the symbol designation command is a symbol designation command indicating a probability variable jackpot C or a small win (step 193SGS243a; Y), by proceeding to step 193SGS250, "0" corresponding to the normal display mode is , is set in the pending display flag. In other words, the pre-read preview performance is not executed for the pending memory that will result in a probability variable jackpot C or a small win.

On the other hand, if the symbol designation command is not a symbol designation command indicating a probability variable jackpot C or a small hit, check whether the symbol designation command of the entry is the first symbol designation command, that is, the symbol designation command is a command indicating a loss. It is determined whether or not (step 193SGS243b). If the symbol designation command of the entry is not the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a command indicating a jackpot (any of the variable probability jackpot A, variable probability jackpot B, or non-probable variable jackpot) (step 193SGS243b; N), the entry The jackpot type is specified from the symbol designation command (step 193SGS244).

Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the look-ahead preview performance extracted, for example, from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the performance control counter setting unit, and the type of jackpot identified in step 193SGS244, a look-ahead preview performance judgment table at the time of the jackpot (not shown) is referenced to determine whether or not to execute the look-ahead preview performance and the display pattern when the look-ahead preview performance is executed (step 193SGS245).

In step 193SGS245, for example, the presence or absence of execution of the pre-read preview performance and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 16-21(A). In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16-21(A), the presence or absence of a pre-read preview effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) are varied depending on the jackpot type specified in the process of step 193SGS244. .

Specifically, there are two types of display patterns (preview types) for the preview performance: display pattern α and display pattern β. When the display pattern for the preview performance is determined to be display pattern α, the reserved memory display is displayed in a white rectangle (◇) in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D or the second reserved memory display area 193SG5U, and when the display pattern (preview type) for the preview performance is determined to be display pattern β, the reserved memory display is displayed in a white star (☆) in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D or the second reserved memory display area 193SG5U.

In addition, if the variable display result is a jackpot other than guaranteed variable jackpot C, the pre-read preview effect will not be determined to be non-executable, and the pre-read preview effect will always be decided to be executed and the display pattern (notice type) Either the display pattern α or the display pattern β (notice type) is determined.

Also, as shown in Figure 16-21 (A), when the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A", the proportion of display patterns β determined as display patterns (notice types) is determined by display pattern α. The percentage is set higher than the On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B" or "non-probable variable jackpot", the proportion at which display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (notice type) is higher than the proportion at which display pattern α is determined. It is set low.

With these settings, if the variable display result is a "jackpot" and the display pattern β is displayed as the display pattern (notice type), the jackpot type will be lower than the case where the display pattern α is displayed. The percentage of probability-variable jackpots A increases, and the player's expectations for the probability-variable jackpot A can be increased.

In addition, in this feature section 193SG, if the variable display result is a "jackpot" other than the probability-variable jackpot C, the reserved memory display is always displayed in a white square (◇) by deciding to execute the pre-read preview performance. Either the display pattern α or the display pattern β, which is displayed in a white star shape (☆), is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display result may be a variable jackpot C Even if it is a "jackpot" other than the above, a case may be provided in which it is determined not to perform the pre-read preview effect, as in the case where the variable display result is a "miss".

In addition, in step 193SGS243b, if the symbol designation command of the entry whose display undetermined flag is on is the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a command indicating a miss (step 193SGS243b; Y), display undetermined The fluctuation category indicated by the fluctuation category designation command of the entry whose flag is on is identified (step 193SGS247). Specifically, if the variation category designation command for the entry is C600H, it is specified as a category with a "non-reach" variation pattern, and if it is C601H, it is identified as a category with a "super reach" variation pattern. If it is C602H, it may be specified that it is in the "other" variation pattern category including normal reach.

Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-read preview effect extracted from, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting section, and the category of the fluctuation pattern identified in step 193SGS247, an outlier (not shown) is selected. By referring to the pre-read notice effect determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-read notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) when executing the pre-read notice effect (step 193SGS248).

In step 193SGS248, for example, the presence or absence of execution of the pre-read preview performance and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 16-21(B). In the example of setting the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16-21(B), the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) and whether or not to execute a pre-read preview effect are determined depending on the category of the fluctuation pattern identified in the process of step 193SGS247. It's different.

Specifically, two types of display patterns (notice types) are provided: display pattern α and display pattern β. Among these, when the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be the display pattern α, the pending memory display is a white rectangle (◇) in a specific manner in the first pending memory display area 193SG5D or the second pending memory display area. 193SG5U, and when the display pattern (notice type) is determined to display pattern β, the pending memory display is a specific form of white star (☆) in the first pending memory display area 193SG5D or the second pending memory display area. Displayed in memory display area 193SG5U. Incidentally, when it is determined that the prefetch preview performance is not executed, the pending memory display is displayed in a round shape (◯), which is the normal mode, in the first pending memory display area 193SG5D or the second pending memory display area 193SG5U.

As shown in Figure 16-21 (B), if the variable display result is "miss" and the category of the variation pattern is "other", the variable display result is "miss" and the category of the variation pattern is "other". The rate at which the pre-read preview effect is executed (the rate determined to be other than ``no preview effect'') is set higher than when the is ``non-reach''. In addition, if the variable display result is "Off" and the variation pattern category is "Super Reach", than when the variable display result is "Off" and the variation pattern category is "Other", The rate at which the pre-read preview effect is executed (the rate determined to be other than "no preview effect") is set high.

When it is decided to execute a pre-read preview effect when the variable display result is "miss", if the variable category is "other", it is more important than if the variable pattern category is "non-reach". The rate at which the display pattern α is determined is also set high. Furthermore, when the category of the variation pattern is "super reach", the rate at which the display pattern α is determined is set higher than when the category of the variation pattern is "other". Furthermore, when the variable display result is "miss" and it is decided to execute the advance notice effect, if the category of the variable pattern is "other", the category of the variable pattern is "non-reach". The rate at which the display pattern β is determined is set higher than when the variable pattern category is "Super Reach", and the display pattern The rate at which β is determined is set high.

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss", the percentage of pre-read preview performances determined to be non-executable regardless of whether the variable pattern category is "non-reach", "other", or "super reach". is set to be the highest, and the rate at which the pre-read preview performance is decided to be executed and the display pattern β is determined is set to be the lowest.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 16-21 (A), when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the pre-read preview effect is not determined to be non-executable (no preview effect), and the pre-read preview effect is not determined to be executed (no preview effect). The rate at which the preview performance is decided to be executed and the display pattern α or the display pattern β is determined is that the display pattern α or the display pattern β in any variable pattern category is determined when the variable display result is “miss”. The percentage is set higher than the

Furthermore, when the variable display result is "miss (non-reach)", "miss (super reach)", or "miss (other)", when it is decided to execute the pre-read preview effect, display pattern α The rate at which the display pattern β is determined is set higher than the rate at which the display pattern β is determined. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "Jackpot (Probability Variable A)", when it is decided to execute the pre-read preview effect, the rate at which the display pattern β is determined is the rate at which the display pattern α is determined. is set higher than.

Due to such settings, if display pattern α or display pattern β is executed (displayed) as the display pattern (notice type) of the preview preview effect, if display pattern α or display pattern β is not executed (displayed) There is a higher possibility that the variable display result will be a "jackpot" than the above, and especially when the display pattern β is executed (displayed), the variable display result will be a "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "probable variable jackpot A". Since the percentage becomes higher, it is possible to increase the expectations of the players.

After executing step 193SGS248, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether execution of the pre-read preview performance has been determined in step 193SGS247, that is, whether the display pattern (notice type) has been determined to be either display pattern α or display pattern β. It is determined whether or not (step 193SGS249).

After executing step 193SGS245 or when it is decided to execute a pre-read preview effect (step 193SGS249; Y), the flag value corresponding to the determined display pattern (notice type) is set to the pending display flag of the entry (step 193SGS246). Specifically, if the display pattern (notice type) determined in step 193SGS245 or step 193SGS248 is the display pattern α in which the pending memory display is indicated by "◇", "1" is set in the pending display flag of the entry, and step If the display pattern (notice type) determined in step 193SGS245 or step 193SGS248 is the display pattern β in which the pending storage display is indicated by "☆", the pending display flag of the entry is set to "2", and then the process proceeds to step 193SGS251.

In addition, in step 193SGS249, if it is not decided to execute the advance notice effect (step 193SGS249; N), after setting the pending display flag of the entry to "0" indicating a white "○" (step 193SGS250) and proceeds to step 193SGS251.

In addition, after executing step 193SGS246 or step 193SGS250, the effect control CPU 120 changes the value of the display undetermined flag of the entry to "0" (step 193SGS251). Thereafter, the pending display is updated based on the stored contents of the start winning command buffer 193SG194A (step 193SGS252). As a result, the pending memory newly stored in the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A is displayed in a display mode corresponding to "0", "1", or "2" set in the pending display flag. Ru. Further, even when the variable display is executed and the storage contents of the starting prize-winning reception command buffer 193SG194A are shifted, the image display device 5 is The pending display of the first pending storage display area 193SG5D and the second pending storage display area 193SG5U provided at the lower position is updated.

Specifically, if the first special figure pending memory number is one, one pending memory display is displayed. As for the display mode of this pending memory display, when the flag value of the pending display flag corresponding to the pending memory is "0", it is displayed in the display mode of "○", and the flag value of the pending display flag is When it is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and when the flag value of the hold display flag is "2", it is displayed in the display mode of "☆". In addition, if the number of first special figure pending memories is two, two pending memory displays are displayed, and each pending memory display is in a mode according to the flag value set in the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory. is displayed in the first pending storage display area 193SG5D. In addition, if the number of first special figure pending memories is three, three pending memory displays are displayed, and each pending memory display is in a mode according to the flag value set in the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory. is displayed in the first pending storage display area 193SG5D. In addition, if the number of first special figure pending memories is four, four pending memory displays are displayed, and each pending memory display is in a mode according to the flag value set in the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory. is displayed in the first pending storage display area 193SG5D.

Further, if the second special figure pending storage number is one, one pending storage display is displayed. As with the case of the first special figure, if the flag value of the pending display flag corresponding to the pending memory is "0", the display mode of this pending memory display is "○". If the flag value of the hold display flag is "1", it will be displayed in the display format of "◇", and if the flag value of the hold display flag is "2", it will be displayed as "☆". It is displayed in the following manner. In addition, if the second special figure pending memory number is two, for example, two pending memory displays will be displayed, and each pending memory display will change according to the flag value set in the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory. For example, one pending storage display is displayed in the display mode of "○", and one pending storage display is displayed in the display mode of "☆" in the second pending storage display area 193SG5U. In addition, if the number of second special figure pending memories is three, three pending memory displays are displayed, and each pending memory display is in a mode according to the flag value set in the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory. is displayed in the second pending storage display area 193SG5U. In addition, if the number of second special figure pending memories is four, four pending memory displays are displayed, and each pending memory display is in a mode according to the flag value set in the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory. is displayed in the second pending storage display area 193SG5U.

Then, each time the variable display is executed, the pending memory display is also shifted in a predetermined shift direction (toward the center of the screen in this feature section 193SG) in accordance with the reduction (consumption) of the pending memory.

In other words, if the pending memory is consumed in the variable display start setting process to be described later, which is executed at the start of the variable display, and the pending memory of the starting prize receiving command buffer 193SG194A is shifted, then when starting winning after the shift Based on the pending memory of the reception command buffer 193SG194A, the pending memory displays in the first pending memory display area 193SG5D and the second pending memory display area 193SG5U are also shifted and displayed, and there is a new pending memory due to the start winning. In this case, the display pattern of the pending memory is determined and set in the pending display flag, and the first pending memory display area 193SG5D and the second pending memory display area 193SG5D and the second pending memory display area 193SG5D and It will now be displayed in the memory display area 193SG5U.

In addition, in this feature section 193SG, an example is shown in which the process of step 193SGS252 is executed in the prefetch notice setting process, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these first reservation storage display areas 193SG5D The process for updating the hold display in the second hold storage display area 193SG5U may be executed separately as a process different from the prefetch preview setting process (for example, hold display update process).

In addition, in this feature section 193SG, on the condition that there is a new storage of the command at the time of starting winning in step 193SGS242, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-read preview performance in the reserved memory for the starting winning. Due to the simultaneous occurrence of a starting prize in the first starting winning hole and a starting winning in the second starting winning hole, a new storage of the command at the time of starting winning is performed in both the first special drawing and the second special drawing in step 193SGS242. If it is determined that there is, that is, if an entry whose display undetermined flag is on exists in both the first special figure reservation memory and the second special figure reservation memory, both entries are read in advance and announced. This is used to determine whether or not to perform the performance. Both the reserved memory in which the command at the time of starting prize winning in the first special drawing was newly stored and the reserved memory in which the command at the time of starting winning in the second special drawing were newly stored are used to determine the execution and non-execution of the pre-announcement performance. If it is determined, if there is no entry for the pending display flag of "1" or "2" indicating the execution of the pre-read preview effect, the pending display of the first special figure's pending memory and the pending display of the second special figure will be displayed. Prefetch preview effects may be executed simultaneously on both displays.

In addition, in this feature section 193SG, if a starting prize in the first starting winning hole and a starting winning in the second starting winning hole occur at the same time as described above, the command at the time of starting winning in the first special drawing is Both the newly stored pending memory and the newly stored pending memory in which the command at the time of starting winning in the second special drawing are newly stored are subject to the determination of execution or non-execution of the pre-read preview performance, but the present invention is not limited to this. In such a case, the execution or non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special figure, and the execution or non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the second special figure. It is also possible to decide to execute only one of them.

Specifically, when the gaming state is a normal state in which high opening control is not performed, the decision to execute or non-execute the pre-read preview performance in the suspended memory in the first special figure is suspended in the second special figure. This is done with priority over the decision on whether or not to execute the pre-read preview performance in memory. Then, when it is decided to execute the pre-read preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special figure, the execution of the pre-read preview effect in the reserved memory in the second special figure is uniquely decided not to be executed, and the first special figure If it is decided not to execute the pre-read preview performance in the reserved memory in the figure, it is only necessary to decide whether to execute or not to perform the pre-read preview performance in the reserved memory in the second special figure.

On the other hand, if the gaming state is a time saving state where high opening control is performed (high probability high base state/low probability high base state), execution or non-execution of the pre-read notice performance in the reserved memory in the second special figure This determination is given priority over the determination of execution or non-execution of the pre-read preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special figure. Then, when it is decided to execute the pre-read preview performance in the reserved memory in the second special figure, the execution of the pre-read preview effect in the reserved memory in the first special figure is uniquely decided not to be executed, and the second special figure If it is decided not to execute the pre-read preview performance in the reserved memory in the figure, it is only necessary to decide whether to execute or not to perform the pre-read preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special figure.

FIG. 16-22 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the production control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether the first variable display start command reception flag is in the on state (step 193SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is in the on state (step 193SGS271; Y), the buffer number of the first special figure pending memory in the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A is "1-0" to "1-4". Various command data and various flags stored in association with are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 193SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with buffer number "1-1" in the first special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in correspondence with buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1st special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the 1st special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer numbers "1-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with buffer numbers "1-3".

If the first variable display start command reception flag is off in step 193SGS271 (step 193SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 193SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 193SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is ended, and if the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 193SGS273; Y ), the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure pending memory in the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A are stored in one buffer number. It is shifted upward by minutes (step 193SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer number "2-1" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2nd special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2", and the 2nd special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing Step 193SGS272 or Step 193SGS274, the production control CPU 120 reads the fluctuation pattern designation command from the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area (Step 193SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) and the fluctuation pattern (step 193SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stop symbols of the decorative symbols according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stop symbols of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do.

In addition, in this characteristic part 193SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to probability variable jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120, for example, displays 3 symbols as "7" as the stop symbols. ” to determine the combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to probability variable jackpot B, multiple combinations of odd symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", Decorative pattern combinations such as "333", "555", "999", etc.) are selected. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the 4th variable display result designation command that corresponds to probability variable jackpot C, the stop symbols are "334" and "778", which are the same chances as the small hit. Decide from among them. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probable variable jackpot, the performance control CPU 120, for example, selects a decorative pattern in which three symbols are arranged in an even number as a stop symbol. Determine the combination (jackpot symbol). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the 6th variable display result designation command that corresponds to a small hit, the stop symbols are "334" and "778", which are the same chances as the probability variable jackpot C. Decide from among them. In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command that corresponds to a loss, and the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach fluctuation pattern, a decoration with three irregular symbols as a stop symbol. A combination of symbols other than the above-mentioned chance (lost symbols) is determined. In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command that corresponds to a loss, and the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is a reach fluctuation pattern, the left and right symbols are the same as the stop symbol, but in the middle. Determine the combination of out-of-reach (out-of-reach symbols) with different symbols.

In determining these stop symbols, the production control CPU 120 extracts random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which numerical values are associated with data indicating combinations of decorative symbols. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol can be determined. That is, the stop symbols may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern is a variation pattern that executes a pseudo continuous performance during variable display (step 193SGS277). If the variation pattern is a variation pattern that executes a pseudo continuous effect during variable display (step 193SGS277; Y), a preview effect determination process for variable display that executes a pseudo continuous effect (for when pseudo continuous effect is not executed) is executed to determine whether or not to execute a preview effect during the variable display and the preview effect to be executed (step 193SGS278).

After executing step 193SGS278, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern. If the variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern (193SGS279; Y), it is determined whether or not to perform a special temporary stop notification performance instead of the temporary stop notification performance based on the variable display result (step 193SGS280). . The temporary stop notification performance is a performance that notifies the player that the decorative symbols have temporarily stopped by outputting a temporary stop notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R from the timing when the decorative symbols have temporarily stopped as a pseudo-continuous performance. , the special temporary stop notification effect means that, in addition to outputting a temporary stop notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, the background image displayed on the image display device 5 is temporarily stopped from the timing when the decorative pattern temporarily stops as a pseudo continuous effect. The decorative pattern has been temporarily stopped by updating the background image according to the number of times (the first special background image if the number of temporary stops is the first time, the second special background image if it is the second time, and the third special background image if the number of temporary stops is the third time). This is a performance that informs the player.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the special temporary stop notification performance (step 193SGS281). When it is decided to execute the special temporary stop notification effect (step 193SGS281; Y), a process table corresponding to the execution of the special temporary stop notification effect and the variation pattern is selected, and the process proceeds to step 193SGS287 (step 193SGS282).

If the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach fluctuation pattern (193SGS279; N) or if it is decided not to perform the special temporary stop notification effect (193SGS281; N), the temporary stop notification effect period is set to 2 seconds based on the variable display result. 1.5 seconds (step 193 SGS 283). Then, a process table is selected according to the temporary stop notification effect period and the fluctuation pattern determined in step 193SGS283, and the process proceeds to step 193SGS287 (step 193SGS284).

In addition, if the variation pattern is a variation pattern that does not execute a pseudo continuous effect during variable display (step 193SGS277; N), a preview effect determination process for a variable display that does not execute a pseudo continuous effect is executed, and during variable display. It is determined whether or not to execute a preview performance and the preview performance to be executed (step 193SGS285). After determining whether or not to execute a preview effect and the preview effect to be executed in step 193SGS285, a process table corresponding to the variation pattern is selected and the process proceeds to step 193SGS287 (193SGS286).

In step 193SGS287, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer for process data 1 of the process table selected in either 193SGS282, 193SGS284, or 193SGS286 (step 193SGS287).

The process table includes display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation part control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). There is.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L, 8R as performance components, and operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.)) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1) (step 193SGS288). For example, to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the sound control board 13 to output sound from the speakers 8L, 8R.

In addition, in this feature section 193SG, the performance control CPU 120 controls the variable display of the decorative pattern according to the fluctuation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the fluctuation pattern designation command, but the performance control CPU 120 The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the designated command.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (step 193SGS289). A predetermined time is also set to the variable display control timer (step 193SGS290). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, center, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, the display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written to the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing the variable display (variation) of the decorative patterns. Next, the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable display in progress performance process (step S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (step 193SGS291).

The effect control CPU 120 increments the value of the process timer by 1 every time the variable display effect process is executed, and determines whether the process timer has timed out. If the process timer has not timed out, the production device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer, and if the process timer has timed out, it switches to the next process data and starts the next process again. The variable display of decorative patterns is executed by starting a timer and controlling the presentation device according to the following process data so that there is no next process data. In addition, when the performance control CPU 120 has decided to execute the preview performance in the variable display start setting process, it is possible to execute the preview performance execution process for executing the preview performance in the variable display performance process. .

Next, the flow of variable display for executing the pseudo-continuous effect will be explained. First, as shown in Figure 16-23 (A), if the variation pattern is a normal reach variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous effect is executed once during variable display, first, after reaching reach, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped. A suggested temporary stop suggestion effect is executed. In addition, the temporary stop suggestion effect in this characteristic part 193SG is that after the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, the pseudo continuous pattern is displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C. This is a performance in which variable display is performed at a slower speed than usual. Note that the length of the temporary stop suggestion performance period differs depending on the length of the temporary stop notification performance period determined in step 193SG283 of the variable display start setting process.

If the temporary stop notification performance period is set to temporary stop notification performance period A (2 seconds), the temporary stop suggestion performance ends when the first temporary stop timing A arrives, and the temporary stop notification performance period of the pseudo-continuous pattern is The stop is executed and a temporary stop notification effect is executed for 2 seconds. In addition, if the temporary stop notification performance period is set to temporary stop notification performance period B (1.5 seconds), the temporary stop suggestion performance ends at the first temporary stop timing B, and the pseudo A temporary stop of the series of symbols is executed, and a temporary stop notification effect is executed for 1.5 seconds. As shown in FIG. 16-23 (A), the temporary stop notification performance period A and the temporary stop notification performance period B are at the same timing, that is, the temporary stop notification performance has a performance period of 1.5 seconds and 2 seconds. It is set to always end at a specific timing, regardless of which time is set.

Then, when the temporary stop notification effect is completed, the re-variable display notification effect is executed. The re-variable display notification effect includes outputting a re-variable display notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, and also outputs an image of a character corresponding to the number of re-variable displays to the image display device 5 (if the number of re-variable displays is the first, character A is output). This is an effect that notifies the player that the re-variable display of decorative symbols will be executed by displaying an image of character B for the second time, and an image of character C for the third time.

Note that the first re-variable display is executed during the re-variable display notification effect. When the re-variable display notification performance ends, the first variable display start number notification performance is executed from the end timing of the re-variable display notification performance. The first variable display start count notification effect displays the variable display count of the decorative pattern, including the re-variable display count, on the image display device 5, and displays effect images of colors corresponding to the variable display count at both left and right ends of the image display device 5. This is a performance that displays. In other words, the first variable display start count notification effect corresponding to the first re-variable display displays "x2" on the image display device 5, and displays blue effect images at both left and right ends of the image display device 5. The first variable display start count notification effect corresponding to the second re-variable display displays "x3" on the image display device 5, and green effect images are displayed at both left and right ends of the image display device 5. The first variable display start number notification effect, which corresponds to the third re-variable display, displays "x4" on the image display device 5, and a red color is displayed on both the left and right ends of the image display device 5. This is a production that displays an effect image.

Then, when the first variable display start number notification performance ends, a second variable display start number notification performance is executed from the end timing of the first variable display start number notification performance. The second variable display start number notification performance is a performance that displays the variable display number of decorative symbols including the re-variable display number on the image display device 5 in a smaller size than the first variable display start number notification performance.

After the second variable display start number informing effect is completed, the reach becomes again, and the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed. At this time, the normal reach effect is executed without temporarily stopping the pseudo continuous pattern.

As shown in FIG. 16-23(B), when it is determined that the special temporary stop notification effect will not be executed and the fluctuation pattern is a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a pseudo consecutive performance is executed twice during a variable display, in the same way as when the fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 16-23(A) is a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a pseudo consecutive performance is executed once during a variable display, after a reach is reached, a temporary stop suggestion effect, a temporary stop and re-variable display of the first pseudo consecutive pattern, a temporary stop notification effect, a re-variable display notification effect, a first variable display start count notification effect, a second variable display start count notification effect, and a first temporary stop and re-variable display are executed, and then a reach is reached again and a second temporary stop and re-variable display of the pseudo consecutive pattern, a temporary stop notification effect, a re-variable display notification effect, a first variable display start count notification effect, and a second variable display start count notification effect are executed. Then, after the second second variable display start count notification effect is finished, a reach is reached again and a temporary stop suggestion effect is executed. At this time, the pseudo consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop and the Super Reach reach effect is executed.

In addition, if the first temporary stop notification performance is performed during the temporary stop notification performance period A (2 seconds), the second temporary stop notification performance is also performed during the temporary stop notification performance period A (2 seconds). , If the first temporary stop notification performance is executed during temporary stop notification performance period B (1.5 seconds), the second temporary stop notification performance will also be performed during temporary stop notification performance period B (1.5 seconds). is executed.

Further, as described above, in the second re-variable display notification effect, an image of a character (character B) different from that in the first re-variable display effect is displayed on the image display device 5. In addition, in the second first variable display start number notification performance and the second variable display start number notification performance, the first variable display start number notification performance and the second variable display start number notification performance are performed on the image display device 5. Differently, "x3" (in the second variable display start number notification effect, "x3" of a smaller size than the second first variable display start number notification effect) is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 16-25, if it has been decided not to perform the special temporary stop notification effect and the variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed three times during the variable display, Similar to the case where the variation pattern shown in 23 (B) is a super reach variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous effect is executed twice during variable display, a temporary stop suggestion effect is performed after becoming a reach, and a pseudo continuous pattern is executed up to the second time. Temporary stop and re-variable display, temporary stop notification performance, re-variable display notification performance, first variable display start number notification performance, and second variable display start number notification performance are executed. Then, after the second variable display start number notification performance is finished, the reach is reached again, the third temporary stop of the decorative pattern and re-variable display, temporary stop notification performance, re-variable display notification performance, A first variable display start number notification effect, a second variable display start number notification effect, and a super reach effect are executed.

In addition, if the first and second temporary stop notification performances are executed during temporary stop notification performance period A (2 seconds), the third temporary stop notification performance will also be performed during temporary stop notification performance period A (2 seconds). If the first and second temporary stop notification performances are performed during temporary stop notification performance period B (1.5 seconds), the third temporary stop notification performance will also be performed during temporary stop notification performance period B (1.5 seconds). 1.5 seconds).

Further, as described above, in the third re-variable display notification effect, an image of a character (character C) different from that in the first and second re-variable display effects is displayed on the image display device 5. In addition, in the third first variable display start number notification performance and the second variable display start number notification performance, the second variable display start number notification performance and the second variable display start number notification performance are performed on the image display device 5. Differently, "x4" (in the third second variable display start number notification performance, "x4" of a smaller size than the third first variable display start number notification performance) is displayed.

As shown in Figure 16-26, if it has been decided to execute the special temporary stop notification effect and the variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed twice during the variable display, the temporary stop notification effect is first executed. Suggestive performance is executed.

In addition, in this variable display, when the first temporary stop timing A is reached, the temporary stop notification effect ends, the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, and the special temporary stop notification effect is executed for two seconds. In other words, in a variable display in which the special temporary stop notification effect is executed, unlike a variable display in which the special temporary stop notification effect is not executed (the temporary stop notification effect is executed), the temporary stop suggestion effect period and the special temporary stop notification effect period are constant.

After the special temporary stop notification performance ends, the first re-variable display of decorative symbols is performed without executing the re-variable display notification performance and the first variable display start number notification performance. Further, after a while, the second variable display start number notification effect is executed. In other words, in the variable display, after the first special temporary stop notification effect is executed, the image of the character (character A) is displayed as the first re-variable display notification effect, and the first variable display start number notification effect is displayed. The display of "x2" on the image display device 5 is not executed, and the display of "x2" of a smaller size than the first variable display start number notification effect is displayed on the image display device 5 as the second variable display start number notification effect. ” will only be displayed.

After the first temporary stop and re-variable display of the decorative pattern, special temporary stop notification effect, and second variable display start notification effect are executed, the second temporary stop and variable display of the decorative pattern, special After the temporary stop notification performance and the second variable display start number notification performance are executed, a super reach performance is further performed.

Furthermore, as the second variable display start number notification effect, a smaller size "x3" is displayed on the image display device 5 as in FIG. 16-23(B), which is smaller than the first variable display start number notification effect. is executed.

As shown in FIG. 16-27, if execution of the special temporary stop notification effect has been decided and the variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed three times during the variable display, Similarly, after the temporary stop suggestion performance, the temporary stop and re-variable display of the decorative pattern up to the second time, the special temporary stop notification performance, and the second variable display start number notification performance, the third temporary stop of the decorative pattern is executed. A stop and re-variable display, a special temporary stop notification effect, a second variable display start number notification effect are executed, and a super reach effect is also executed.

Note that as the third variable display start number notification effect, a "x4" smaller in size than the first variable display start number notification effect is displayed on the image display device 5 as in FIG. 16-23(B). is executed.

Although some of the details have been described above, as shown in FIG. 16-28, the temporary stop notification effect in the feature section 193SG is a pseudo continuous effect in which a temporary stop notification sound is emitted from the speaker 8L from the timing when the decorative pattern temporarily stops. This is an effect that notifies the player that the decorative symbols have temporarily stopped by outputting from , 8R, and is an effect that is executed for 2 seconds or 1.5 seconds.

The special temporary stop notification effect refers to the temporary stop notification sound being output from the speakers 8L and 8R, as well as the number of times the background image displayed on the image display device 5 is temporarily stopped, starting from the timing when the decorative pattern temporarily stops as a pseudo continuous effect. By updating the background image according to the number of temporary stops (the first special background image if the number of temporary stops is the first, the second special background image if the second, and the third special background image if the third) This is a performance that informs the players. The special background image displayed on the image display device 5 as a special temporary stop notification effect is an image that is displayed until the next special background image is updated or the variable display ends. The sound output period (special temporary stop notification performance period) is 2 seconds, which is the same as a part of the temporary stop notification performance.

The re-variable display notification effect means that in addition to outputting the re-variable display notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, the image display device 5 displays an image of the character according to the number of re-variable displays (if the number of re-variable displays is the first time, the character This is an effect that notifies the player that the variable display of decorative symbols will be executed again by displaying the image of character A, the image of character B if the second time, and the image of character C if the third time. Note that the performance period of the re-variable display notification performance (the display period of the character image on the image display device 5 and the output period of the re-variable display notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R) is 3 regardless of the number of times the re-variable display is executed. seconds. As mentioned above, in the variable display that executes the pseudo continuous effect, the higher the number of times the pseudo continuous effect is executed (the number of times the temporary stop/re-variable display is executed), the higher the jackpot expectation level is set. Regarding the display notification performance, the expectation of a jackpot is set highest when the image of character C is finally displayed, and the lowest expectation of jackpot is when the image of character A is finally displayed.

The first variable display start count notification effect is a process for notifying the number of times the variable display of decorative symbols including the re-variable display is started during the first variable display after the re-variable display is started as a pseudo continuous effect. This is a performance, and the number of times the variable display of decorative patterns including these re-variable displays has been started on the image display device 5 ("x2" in the first variable display start count notification performance, the second first variable display This is an effect that displays "x3" in the start count notification effect and "x4" in the first variable display start count notification effect for the third time as well. Incidentally, the performance period of these first variable display start number notification performances is one second regardless of the variable display number of decorative symbols including re-variable display.

The second variable display start number notification performance is a performance for notifying the number of times variable display of decorative symbols including re-variable display has been started during the first variable display after the first variable display start number notification performance. , the number of times variable display of decorative patterns including these re-variable displays has been started on the image display device 5 ("x2" in the first variable display start number notification effect, and "x2" in the second first variable display start number notification effect) This is a performance that displays "x3" in the performance and "x4" in the first variable display start number notification performance for the third time) in a smaller size than the first variable display start number notification performance. Incidentally, the performance period of these second variable display start number notification performances is 2 seconds regardless of the variable display number of decorative symbols including re-variable display.

Figure 16-29 (A) is a flowchart showing the preview performance determination process (for when pseudo consecutive performance is executed) of the variable display start setting process in Figure 16-22. In the preview performance determination process (for when pseudo consecutive performance is executed), the performance control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern (step 193SGS301). Then, a random number value for preview performance execution determination is extracted, and using the random number value and a preview performance determination table (not shown), it determines whether or not to execute a preview performance in the variable display that executes the pseudo consecutive performance, and which preview performance to execute (step 193SGS302).

Specifically, as shown in Figure 16-29 (B), if the variable display result is a jackpot, it is determined that the preview effect will not be executed at a rate of 5%, and the cut-in preview effect will be executed at a rate of 20%. The execution of the group preview effect is determined at a rate of 45%, and the execution of the cut-in preview effect and the group preview effect is determined at a rate of 30%.

Note that the cut-in preview performance is a performance in which a cut-in image is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in Figure 16-29 (F), and the group preview performance is a performance in which a cut-in image is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in Figure 16-29 (G). As shown, a large number of characters are displayed across the display area of the image display device 5.

If the variable display result is off and the super reach variation pattern (super reach is off), the non-execution of the preview effect is determined at a rate of 40%, the execution of the cut-in preview effect is determined at a rate of 30%, and the group The execution of the preview performance is determined at a rate of 25%, and the execution of the cut-in preview performance and the group preview performance is determined at a rate of 5%. In addition, if the variable display result is off and the normal reach variation pattern (normal reach is off), the non-execution of the preview effect is determined at a rate of 90%, the execution of the cut-in notice effect is determined at a rate of 8%, and the group The execution of the preview performance is determined at a rate of 2%, and the execution of the cut-in preview performance and the group preview performance is determined at a rate of 0%.

In other words, in the variable display that executes the pseudo continuous effect in the feature section 193SG, the expectation level of jackpot is set to be the lowest when neither the cut-in preview effect nor the group preview effect is executed, and the cut-in preview effect is used as the preview effect. If only the cut-in preview performance and the group preview performance are executed, the expectation level of the jackpot is set higher than if neither the cut-in preview performance nor the group preview performance is performed, and if only the group preview performance is performed as the preview performance, the cut-in preview performance The expectation level of a jackpot is set higher than when only a cut-in preview performance and a group preview performance are performed, and the expectation level of a jackpot is set highest when both a cut-in preview performance and a group preview performance are performed as a preview performance (pseudo continuous). Jackpot expectation regarding the preview performance in the variable display that executes the performance: cut-in preview performance + group preview performance > group preview performance > cut-in performance > non-execution).

After executing step 193SGS302, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the preview performance (determined to execute at least one of the cut-in preview performance and the group preview performance) (step 193SGS303). If execution of any preview performance has not been decided (Step 193SGS303; N), the preview performance determination process (for execution of pseudo-sequential performance) is ended, and if execution of any preview performance has been decided (Step 193SGS303; Y) stores the determined preview performance, sets a timer for waiting for the start of the preview performance, and ends the preview performance determination process (for execution of pseudo-continuous performance) (step 193SGS304, step 193SGS305).

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 16-32, the executable period of these preview performances overlaps with the re-variable display notification performance period and the first variable display start number notification performance period. In particular, if it is decided to execute both a cut-in preview performance and a group preview performance as a preview performance, these cut-in preview performances and group preview performance will be performed during the re-variable display notification performance period and the first variable display start number notification performance period. The production is executed in duplicate.

In addition, in this feature section 193SG, if execution of any of the preview performances is determined in the preview performance determination process (for execution of pseudo-continuous performance), the same preview performance is executed during all re-variable display notification performance periods. (See Figures 16-29 to 16-31).

FIG. 16-30(A) is a flowchart showing the preview performance determination process (for when pseudo continuous performance is not executed) of the variable display start setting process in FIG. 16-22. In the preview performance determination process (for when pseudo continuous performance is not executed), the performance control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern (step 193SGS311). Then, a random number value for determining the execution of a preview performance is extracted, and the random number value and a table for determining a preview performance (not shown) are used to determine whether or not the preview performance will be executed in the variable display where the pseudo continuous performance is not executed, and the notice to be executed. The performance is determined (step 193SGS312).

Specifically, as shown in Figure 16-30 (B), if the variable display result is a jackpot, it is determined that the preview effect will not be executed at a rate of 5%, and the cut-in preview effect will be executed at a rate of 30%. The execution of the group preview effect is determined at a rate of 65%.

If the variable display result is off and the super reach variation pattern (super reach is off), the non-execution of the preview effect is determined at a rate of 40%, the execution of the cut-in preview effect is determined at a rate of 35%, and the group The execution of the preview performance is decided at a rate of 25%. In addition, if the variable display result is off and the normal reach variation pattern (normal reach is off), the non-execution of the preview effect is determined at a rate of 90%, the execution of the cut-in notice effect is determined at a rate of 8%, and the group The execution of the preview performance is determined at a rate of 2%.

In other words, in the variable display in which the pseudo continuous effect is not executed in the feature section 193SG, the expectation level of jackpot is set to be the lowest when neither the cut-in preview effect nor the group preview effect is executed, and the cut-in preview effect is used as the preview effect. If only the cut-in preview performance and the group preview performance are executed, the expectation level of the jackpot is set higher than if neither the cut-in preview performance nor the group preview performance is performed, and if only the group preview performance is performed as the preview performance, the cut-in preview performance The jackpot expectation level is set higher than the case where only one is executed (jackpot expectation level regarding the preview performance in the variable display that executes the pseudo continuous performance: group preview performance > cut-in performance > non-execution).

After executing step 193SGS312, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the preview performance (step 193SGS313). If the execution of the preview performance has not been decided (Step 193SGS313; N), the preview performance determination process (for when the pseudo continuous performance is not executed) is terminated, and if the execution of the preview performance has been decided (Step 193SGS313; Y), The determined preview performance is stored, a timer for waiting for the start of the preview performance is set, and the preview performance determination process (for when pseudo continuous performance is not executed) is ended (step 193SGS314, step 193SGS315).

In addition, when performing a preview performance in the variable display where the pseudo continuous performance is not performed, the preview performance may be performed in any period from the start timing of the variable display to the reach timing.

FIG. 16-31(A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio when the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the special temporary stop notification performance in step 193SG280 in FIG. 16-22. In step 193SG280 in FIG. 16-22, if the variable display result is a jackpot (super reach jackpot), the performance control CPU 120 controls the non-execution of the special temporary stop notification performance (execution of the temporary stop notification performance) at a rate of 20%. Then, execution of the special temporary stop notification effect (non-execution of the temporary stop notification effect) is determined at a rate of 80%. On the other hand, if the variable display result is off (super reach off), non-execution of the special temporary stop notification performance (execution of the temporary stop notification performance) is determined at a rate of 80%, and execution of the special temporary stop notification performance (execution of the temporary stop notification performance) is determined. (non-execution of temporary stop notification effect) is determined at a rate of 20%.

In other words, in this feature section 193SG, when performing a special temporary stop notification effect in a variable display that executes a pseudo continuous effect (according to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern, a temporary stop notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and an image When the special background image is displayed on the display device 5), when the special temporary stop notification effect is not executed (when the temporary stop notification sound is only output from the speakers 8L and 8R in response to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern; (When the temporary stop notification effect is executed), the jackpot expectation level is set higher than the case (when the temporary stop notification effect is executed) (Jackpot expectation level in the variable display that executes the pseudo continuous effect: Special temporary stop notification effect execution > Special temporary stop notification effect non-execution) .

In addition, as mentioned above, if we pay attention to the case where the special temporary stop notification effect is executed, if the pseudo continuous effect is executed once during the variable display, the image Only the first special background image is displayed on the display device 5, but if the pseudo continuous effect is executed twice during the variable display, the image display device 5 After the first special background image is displayed, a second special background image is displayed in place of the first special background image on the image display device 5 in response to the second temporary stop of the decorative pattern (the first special background image (updated to the second special background image), and in response to the third temporary stop of the decorative pattern, the third special background image is displayed on the image display device 5 in place of the second special background image (updated from the second special background image). (updated to the third special background image).

In other words, regarding the variable display that executes the pseudo continuous effect, the greater the number of times the pseudo continuous effect is executed during the variable display, the higher the jackpot expectation level is set, so the background image that is finally displayed on the image display device 5 The expectation of a jackpot is set to be the highest when is the third special background image, and the expectation of a jackpot is the lowest when the background image finally displayed on the image display device 5 is the first special background image. (Jackpot expectation regarding the special background image that is finally displayed on the image display device 5 in the variable display that executes the pseudo continuous effect: 3rd special background image > 2nd special background image > 1st special background image) ).

FIG. 16-31(B) is a diagram showing the determination ratio when the performance control CPU 120 determines the temporary stop notification performance period based on the variable display result in step 193SG283 in FIG. 16-22. In step 193SG283 in FIG. 16-22, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 determines the temporary stop notification performance period to be temporary stop notification performance period A (2 seconds) at a rate of 60% and 40%. Temporary stop notification performance period B (1.5 seconds) is determined at the ratio of . On the other hand, if the variable display result is incorrect, the temporary stop notification performance period is determined to be temporary stop notification performance period A (2 seconds) at a rate of 40%, and the temporary stop notification performance period B (1 second) is determined at a rate of 60%. .5 seconds). In other words, in the case where the special temporary stop notification effect is not executed in a variable display that performs a pseudo continuous effect, if the temporary stop notification effect is set to 2 seconds, the temporary stop notification effect is set to 1 second. The jackpot expectation level is set higher than when it is set to 5 seconds (Jackpot expectation level regarding the performance period of the temporary stop notification performance when the special temporary stop notification performance is not executed in the variable display that executes the pseudo continuous performance) :Temporary stop notification performance period A (2 seconds)>Temporary stop notification performance period B (1.5 seconds)).

In addition, in this feature section 193SG, an example is given of a form in which the temporary stop notification display period can be determined from 2 seconds and 1.5 seconds, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the temporary stop notification display period may be uniquely determined to be one period, or may be determined from three or more periods.

Furthermore, although this feature section 193SG exemplifies a form in which the longer the temporary stop notification effect period is, the higher the jackpot expectation is than the shorter temporary stop notification effect period, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the expectation level of jackpot may be higher when the temporary stop notification performance period is shorter than when the temporary stop notification performance period is longer.

Next, the output mode of sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R during variable display will be described. As shown in FIG. 16-32, first, the speakers 8L and 8R are enabled to output BGM (music) based on the progress of the variable display. The BGM is output during the variable display except for the re-variable display notification performance period. Further, the speakers 8L and 8R are capable of outputting a temporary stop suggestion sound, a temporary stop notification sound, a re-variable display notification sound, and a first variable display start number notification sound. Among these, the temporary stop suggestion sound is output only during the temporary stop suggestion performance period, the temporary stop notification sound is output only during the temporary stop notification performance period, the re-variable display notification sound is output only during the re-variable display notification performance period, and the temporary stop notification sound is output only during the re-variable display notification performance period. The first variable display start number notification sound is output only during the first variable display start number notification presentation period.

Furthermore, the speakers 8L and 8R are capable of outputting a cut-in notice performance sound and a group notice performance sound. Among these, the cut-in notice performance sound is output only during the cut-in notice performance execution period when the execution of the cut-in notice performance is decided, and the group notice performance sound is output when the execution of the group notice performance is decided. If there is, it will be output only during the group preview performance execution period.

In other words, as shown in FIG. 16-32, during the variable display in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed, the re-variable display notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. While the BGM output from the speakers 8L and 8R is limited, the BGM output from the speakers 8L and 8R is not limited during the variable display except for the re-variable display notification performance period. Furthermore, during the temporary stop suggestion production period, two types of sounds, BGM and temporary stop suggestion sound, are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, while during the first variable display start number notification production period, the speakers 8L and 8R output In addition to the first variable display start number notification sound, up to four types of sounds are output including BGM, cut-in notice effect sound, and group notice effect sound.

Next, the display mode of each image on the image display device 5 during the temporary stop suggestion effect period will be explained. First, as shown in FIG. 16-33, during the temporary stop suggestion effect period when the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the image display device 5 displays images from the top to the bottom on the image display device 5 by drawing with image data 2. A moving display of the pseudo-continuous pattern toward the target is executed. The moving display of the pseudo-continuous symbol is executed at a speed V1 during the period from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect period to the display image data switching timing. Note that from the display image data switching timing, the pseudo continuous pattern is not drawn as the image data 2. In other words, from the display image data switching timing, the pseudo continuous pattern as the image data 2 is not displayed.

In addition, from the middle of the moving display of the pseudo continuous pattern at the speed V1, a temporary stop suggestion image is displayed on the image display device 5 by drawing with the image data 1. The temporary stop suggestion image is displayed from the middle of the moving display of the above-mentioned pseudo-continuous symbol at the speed V1 to the display image data switching timing period, and is not displayed (hidden) during other periods.

Immediately before the display image data switching timing, display of the pseudo-continuous pattern at the center of the image display device 5 is started by drawing with the image data 3. The pseudo continuous pattern drawn by the image data 3 does not move (speed 0) until the display image data switching timing, but from the display image data switching timing, it moves downward from the center of the image display device 5 at the above-mentioned speed V1. The moving display is performed at speed V3, which is faster than the above. Note that the display of the pseudo-continuous pattern moving at the speed V3 by drawing the image data 3 becomes non-display as the pseudo-continuous pattern moves out of the display area of the image display device 5.

Furthermore, from the display image data switching timing, the moving display (variable display) of the decorative pattern from the top to the bottom on the image display device 5 is executed by drawing with the image data 2. The moving display (variable display) of the decorative pattern is executed at a speed V2 (speed: V3>V2>V1) which is faster than the speed V1 and slower than the speed V3 from the display image data switching timing. Note that the moving display (variable display) of the decorative symbol continues until the start timing of the ready-to-win effect.

Then, from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the display of saturated lines is executed on the image display device 5 by drawing with the image data 4. The concentrated lines are displayed at a density (display density) of D1 for a certain period of time from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect, and then are displayed at D2, which is higher in density than D1. That is, the number of concentrated lines displayed increases as a certain period of time passes from the start of display on the image display device 5. Then, from the display image data switching timing, the saturated line is displayed again at the density D1 and then becomes hidden.

For this reason, during the temporary stop suggestion performance period in which the pseudo continuous pattern does not stop, from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion performance to the display image data switching timing, the concentrated lines are displayed at the density D1, so that the left and right decorations are displayed. The visibility of the symbols (decorative symbols displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R) is lower than the state (visibility: high) before execution of the temporary stop suggestion performance. (Visibility: medium). Furthermore, as the concentration line density changes from D1 to D2, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R) becomes lower. (Visibility: Low).

In addition, from the display image data switching timing to the display end timing of the concentrated lines, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is improved by displaying the concentrated lines at the density D1, compared to when the concentrated lines are displayed at the density D2. becomes high (visibility: medium). Then, after the display end timing of the saturated lines, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is the highest (visibility: high) because the saturated lines are no longer displayed (not displayed).

As shown in FIG. 16-34, during the temporary stop suggestion effect period when the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops, the image display device 5 displays images from the top to the bottom on the image display device 5 by drawing with the image data 2. A moving display of the pseudo-continuous pattern is executed. The moving display of the pseudo-continuous symbols is executed at a speed V1 during the period from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion performance period to the end timing of the temporary stop suggestion performance (temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous symbols). The period required from the start timing of the variable display to the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous pattern is the same as the period required from the start timing of the variable display to the display image data switching timing when the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop as shown in FIG. 16-33. They are the same. Further, after the execution of the temporary stop suggestion performance, a temporary stop notification performance is executed, but during the execution period of the temporary stop notification performance, the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped (speed V0) in the "medium" decorative pattern display area 5C. It will be hidden after that.

Furthermore, from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect, a saturated line is displayed on the image display device 5 by drawing using the image data 4. The display of the concentration line is such that the density of the concentration line (display density) is displayed at D2 from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion performance to the end timing of the temporary stop suggestion performance (temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous pattern). , it will not be displayed from the end timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect.

Then, from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the display of saturated lines is executed on the image display device 5 by drawing with the image data 4. The concentrated lines are displayed at a density (display density) of D1 for a certain period of time from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect, and then are displayed at D2, which is higher in density than D1. That is, the number of concentrated lines displayed increases as a certain period of time passes from the start of display on the image display device 5. Then, the concentrated line becomes hidden from the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous pattern.

For this reason, during the temporary stop suggestion performance period in which the pseudo continuous pattern does not stop, from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion performance to the display image data switching timing, the concentrated lines are displayed at the density D1, so that the left and right decorations are displayed. The visibility of the symbols (decorative symbols displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R) is lower than the state (visibility: high) before execution of the temporary stop suggestion performance. (Visibility: medium). Furthermore, as the concentration line density changes from D1 to D2, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R) becomes lower. (Visibility: Low). In addition, from the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous pattern, the display of concentrated lines has ended (it is not displayed), so that the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is the highest (visibility: high).

Although not shown in FIG. 16-34, after the end timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect, that is, during the temporary stop notification effect period, the pseudo continuous pattern temporarily stops and the decorative pattern is created by drawing image data 1. An effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed around the pseudo continuous pattern. The temporary stop notification effect image of the decorative pattern is then switched to display in the entire display area of the image display device 5 (see FIG. 16-35). Note that the effect image for temporary stop notification in the feature section 193SG is an image whose transmittance is set to 0%.

In other words, during the temporary stop notification performance period, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is higher (visibility: medium) than during the temporary stop suggestion performance execution period because the concentrated lines are once hidden, but the image display device Due to the display of the temporary stop notification effect image in the entire display area of No. 5, the left and right decorative patterns become invisible (visibility: invisible).

However, from the timing when the display of the temporary stop of the pseudo continuous pattern in image data 2 ends, the speed V2 of the pseudo continuous pattern toward the player side (this side of the pachinko gaming machine 1) is also increased by the drawing of image data 2. The moving display is executed. At this time, since the pseudo continuous pattern is moved and displayed (enlarged display) in the entire display area of the image display device 5, the left and right pseudo continuous patterns become invisible again.

In addition, when the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops in the temporary stop suggestion performance, the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed moving on the image display device 5 by drawing the image data 3, and the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed in the image display device 5 by drawing the image data 2. The moving display (variable display) of decorative patterns is not executed.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 in the variable display that executes the temporary stop suggestion effect in the main feature section 193SG will be explained based on FIGS. 16-35 to 16-47.

First, if it is decided not to perform the special temporary stop notification effect at the start of the variable display, a certain period of time has elapsed since the start of the variable display, as shown in Figures 16-35 (A) to 16-35 (C). After the elapse of time, the decorative symbols stop (swinging stops) in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C, and become a reach. Thereafter, as a first temporary stop suggestion performance, the pseudo-continuous pattern moves from the top to the bottom at the speed V1 in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C. At this time, on the image display device 5, a concentrated line is displayed from the peripheral portion of the image display device 5 toward the center portion (“middle” decorative pattern display area 5C) of the image display device 5. Note that the concentrated line is displayed at the density D1 at the start of display, but the density changes to D2 as a certain period of time passes.

If the variable display is based on the normal reach variation pattern PA2-1 that does not perform a pseudo-continuous effect, the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, as shown in FIG. 16-35 (D). It moves below the image display device at a speed of V2 and becomes non-display. At this time, the density of concentrated lines displayed on the image display device 5 changes from D2 to D1. On the other hand, if the variable display is a variation pattern (any of PA2-2 to PA2-4, PB1-2 to PB1-4) that executes a pseudo-continuous effect, as shown in Figure 16-35 (E). At this time, the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, and an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed around the temporarily stopped pseudo continuous pattern. Also, the saturated line is hidden. At this time, a temporary stop notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a temporary stop notification effect. Further, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retreat position to the first presentation position, and the built-in second movable body LED 193SG034 emits blue light.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 16-35 (F) and 16-35 (G), the effect image for temporary stop notification is switched to be displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5, and the left and right decorative patterns are changed. The state becomes invisible to the player, and the second movable body 193SG033 stops emitting blue light. At this time, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first presentation position to the retreat position.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 16-35 (G) and 16-35 (H), as the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first production position to the retreat position, a plurality of pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped. A crack is displayed. After that, an image in which a pseudo-continuous pattern in which a plurality of holes are displayed explodes is displayed, and the pseudo-continuous pattern is constructed as shown in FIGS. 16-36 (I) and 16-36 (J). An image is displayed in which the characters (in the case of the main feature section 193SG, the alphabets of "NEXT" indicating that a pseudo-continuous effect is to be executed) are moving toward the player while being diffused.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 16-37 (K) to 16-37 (P), the first variable display of the decorative symbols is started again. Further, an image of the character A is displayed on the image display device 5 as a re-variable display notification effect, and a re-variable display notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, if it is decided to execute a cut-in notice performance or a group notice performance at the start of the variable display, these cut-in notice performances are overlapped with the re-variable display notification performance and the first variable display start count notification performance. A group preview performance is executed.

Then, when the re-variable display notification performance is completed, an image of "x2" is displayed on the image display device 5 as the first first variable display start number notification performance, and the left and right ends of the image display device 5 are Display of the blue effect image starts at . Also, at this time, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retreat position to the first presentation position again and emits blue light.

Note that the "x2" image displayed on the image display device 5 as the first variable display start number notification effect is once displayed on the image display device 5, and then displayed in a larger size and then hidden. (See Figure 16-37 (O) and Figure 16-37 (P)).

When the first variable display start count notification performance ends, the second movable body 193SG033 stops emitting blue light and moves from the first performance position to the retreat position. In addition, as the first second variable display start count notification performance, an image of "x2" smaller than the first variable display start count notification performance is displayed in the upper left corner of the image display device 5.

After a while after the first second variable display start count notification effect ends, the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas will be displayed, as shown in Figures 16-38 (R) to 16-38 (T). After the decorative pattern stops (swinging stops) in 5L and 5R and becomes a reach, as a second provisional stop suggestion effect, the pseudo continuous pattern moves from the top to the bottom in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C. It is moving at a speed of V1. At this time, on the image display device 5, a concentrated line is displayed from the peripheral portion of the image display device 5 toward the center portion (“middle” decorative pattern display area 5C) of the image display device 5. Note that the concentrated line is displayed at the density D1 at the start of display, but the density changes to D2 as a certain period of time passes.

If the variable display is a normal reach miss variation pattern PA2-2 that executes the pseudo consecutive performance only once or a normal reach big win variation pattern PB1-2, the pseudo consecutive pattern does not temporarily stop but moves downward on the image display device at a speed V2 and becomes invisible, as shown in FIG. 16-38 (U). At this time, the density of the convergence lines displayed on the image display device 5 changes from D2 to D1. On the other hand, if the variable display is a variation pattern that executes the pseudo consecutive performance two or more times (any of PA2-3, PA2-4, PB1-3, and PB1-4), the pseudo consecutive pattern temporarily stops and an effect image for a temporary stop notification is displayed around the temporarily stopped pseudo consecutive pattern, as shown in FIG. 16-38 (V). In addition, the convergence lines become invisible. At this time, a temporary stop notification sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R as a temporary stop notification performance. Furthermore, as the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first performance position, the built-in second movable body LED 193SG034 emits green light.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 16-38 (W) and 16-38 (X), the effect image for temporary stop notification is switched to be displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5, so that the left and right decorative patterns are The state becomes invisible to the player, and the second movable body 193SG033 stops emitting green light. At this time, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first presentation position to the retreat position.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 16-38 (X) and 16-38 (Y), as the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first presentation position to the retreat position, a plurality of A crack is displayed. After that, an image in which the pseudo-continuous pattern in which these multiple holes are displayed explodes is displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 16-39 (Z) and 16-39 (a), the pseudo-continuous pattern is constructed. An image is displayed in which the characters (in the case of the main feature section 193SG, the alphabets of "NEXT" indicating that a pseudo-continuous effect is to be executed) are moving toward the player while being diffused.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 16-40(b) to 16-40(h), the second variable display of the decorative symbols is started. Further, an image of the character B is displayed on the image display device 5 as a re-variable display notification effect, and a re-variable display notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, if it is decided to execute a cut-in notice performance or a group notice performance at the start of the variable display, these cut-in notice performances or group notice performances overlap with the re-variable display notification performance and the first variable display start count notification performance. A preview performance is performed.

Then, when the re-variable display notification performance is completed, an image of "x3" is displayed on the image display device 5 as a second first variable display start notification performance, and the left and right ends of the image display device 5 are Display of the green effect image starts at . Also, at this time, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retreat position to the first presentation position again and emits green light.

Note that the "x3" image displayed on the image display device 5 as the second first variable display start count notification effect is once displayed on the image display device 5, and then displayed in a larger size and then hidden. (See Figure 16-40(f) and Figure 16-40(g)).

When the first variable display start number notification effect is completed, a second variable display start number notification effect is displayed with "x3" in the upper left corner of the image display device 5, which is smaller in size than the first variable display start number notification effect. image is displayed.

After a while after the second variable display start count notification effect ends, the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas are displayed as shown in Figures 16-41(e) to 16-41(g). After the decorative pattern stops (swinging stops) in 5L and 5R and becomes a reach, as a third temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo-continuous pattern is directed downward from the top in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C. It is moving at a speed of V1. At this time, on the image display device 5, a concentrated line is displayed from the peripheral portion of the image display device 5 toward the center portion (“middle” decorative pattern display area 5C) of the image display device 5. Note that the concentrated line is displayed at the density D1 at the start of display, but the density changes to D2 as a certain period of time passes.

If the variable display is a super reach miss variation pattern PA2-3 in which pseudo-continuous performance is executed only twice or a super reach jackpot variation pattern PB1-3, as shown in Figure 16-41 (h). Then, the pseudo-continuous pattern moves downward on the image display device at a speed of V2 without temporarily stopping and becomes hidden. At this time, the density of concentrated lines displayed on the image display device 5 changes from D2 to D1. On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable pattern (any of PA2-3, PA2-4, PB1-3, PB1-4) that executes a pseudo continuous effect twice or more, then the display shown in FIG. 16-41 (i) As shown in , the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, and an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed around the temporarily stopped pseudo continuous pattern. Also, the saturated line is hidden. At this time, a temporary stop notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a temporary stop notification effect. Further, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retreat position to the first presentation position, and the built-in second movable body LED 193SG034 emits red light.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 16-41(j) and 16-41(k), the effect image for temporary stop notification is switched to display in the entire display area of the image display device 5, and the left and right decorative patterns are changed. The state becomes invisible to the player, and the second movable body 193SG033 stops emitting red light. At this time, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first presentation position to the retreat position.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 16-41(k) and 16-41(l), as the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first production position to the retracted position, a plurality of pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped. A crack is displayed. After that, an image in which a pseudo-continuous pattern in which a plurality of holes are displayed explodes is displayed, and the pseudo-continuous pattern is constructed as shown in FIGS. 16-42 (m) and 16-42 (n). An image is displayed in which the characters (in the case of the main feature section 193SG, the alphabets of "NEXT" indicating that a pseudo-continuous effect is to be executed) are moving toward the player while being diffused.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 16-43(o) to 16-43(u), the third variable display of the decorative pattern is started. Further, an image of the character C is displayed on the image display device 5 as a re-variable display notification effect, and a re-variable display notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, if it is decided to execute a cut-in notice performance or a group notice performance at the start of the variable display, these cut-in notice performances or group notice performances overlap with the re-variable display notification performance and the first variable display start count notification performance. A preview performance is performed.

Then, when the re-variable display notification performance is completed, an image of "x4" is displayed on the image display device 5 as the third first variable display start count notification performance, and the left and right ends of the image display device 5 are The display of the red effect image starts at . Also, at this time, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retreat position to the first presentation position again and emits red light.

Note that the "x4" image displayed on the image display device 5 as the third first variable display start number notification effect is displayed in an even larger size after being displayed on the image display device 5 once. (See Figure 16-43(s) and Figure 16-43(t)).

When the first variable display start number notification effect is completed, as the third second variable display start number notification effect, "x4" of a size smaller than the first variable display start number notification effect is displayed at the upper left of the image display device 5. image is displayed.

Here, the execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect will be explained. As shown in FIGS. 16-44 (A) and 16-44 (B), when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed, the pseudo-continuous pattern is directed downward from above at the speed V1 on the image display device 5 as described above. At the same time, concentrated lines are displayed at a density of D2. As the temporary stop suggestion effect progresses and the pseudo-continuous symbol approaches the temporary stop position, the velocity V1 increases from the top to the bottom at the center of the image display device 5 (temporary stop position of the decorative pattern). A pseudo-continuous pattern (pseudo-continuous pattern drawn in image data 3) that is different from the moving pseudo-continuous pattern (pseudo-continuous pattern drawn in image data 2) is displayed, suggesting a temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous pattern. Ru.

If the decorative pattern temporarily stops as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo continuous pattern temporarily stops as shown in Figure 16-44 (C), and a temporary stop notification is sent to the surroundings of the pseudo continuous pattern. At the same time, the second movable body 193SG033 that has moved from the retreat position to the first production position is displayed in a color corresponding to the number of temporary stops (pseudo continuous number) (blue for the first temporary stop, blue for the second It emits green light if it is temporarily stopped, and red if it is the third temporary stop. Further, at this time, the concentrated lines displayed on the image display device 5 are no longer displayed.

On the other hand, if the decorative pattern does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo continuous pattern in the center of the image display device 5 is (Pseudo-continuous pattern drawn in image data 3) is hidden, and the pseudo-continuous pattern (pseudo-continuous pattern drawn in image data 2), which had been moving from top to bottom at speed V1, is now hidden. It passes through the temporary stop position at a speed of V2, moves directly below the image display device 5, and is no longer displayed. At the same time, a normal moving display of decorative symbols is executed from the top to the bottom of the image display device 5 (variable display is executed).

The density of the concentrated lines displayed on the image display device 5 changes from D2 to D1 from the timing when the pseudo-continuous pattern starts moving at the speed V2 (the number of concentrated lines displayed decreases). Then, the concentrated line after the density changes to D1 is hidden after a certain period of time after the pseudo continuous pattern is hidden from the image display device 5.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 16-44 (F) and 16-44 (G), after the saturated line is hidden, the decorations excluding the pseudo-continuous symbols will be displayed for a while in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. After the variable display is executed with the symbol, a reach effect is executed according to the variation pattern, and finally a decorative symbol indicating a jackpot or loss is derived and displayed (in the case of this feature part 193SG, the "medium" Decorative symbols with numbers other than "1", which is a winning combination, or "1", which is a losing combination, are stopped in the decorative symbol display area 5C). In other words, if the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop during the temporary stop suggestion performance, the display of concentrated lines will continue even after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden from the image display device 5, but the concentration line will continue to be displayed. The display is hidden before the decorative symbols stop at a jackpot or miss combination (more precisely, before the ready-to-win effect starts).

As described above, regarding the variable display when the special temporary stop notification effect is not executed, as shown in Figure 16-45, the left and right decorative symbols ("right" and "left" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R) During the temporary stop suggestion production period, the displayed decorative pattern) has lower visibility than before the execution of the temporary stop suggestion production (visibility: low) due to the concentrated lines being displayed at a density of D1. . In addition, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in the "right" and "left" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R) is further reduced by changing the concentration line density D2 (visibility Gender: Medium).

In addition, for the left and right decorative symbols during the temporary stop notification performance period, an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed around the pseudo continuous pattern from the start timing of the temporary stop notification performance (temporary stop timing of the pseudo continuous pattern). During the period, visibility is higher than during the temporary stop suggestion period (visibility: medium).

In addition, after the temporary stop notification effect image is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5 during the temporary stop notification performance period, during the remaining temporary stop notification performance period (on the player's side of the pseudo-series pattern) The display becomes invisible to the player during the re-variable display notification effect period.

Then, from the start timing of the variable display start number notification effect, the left and right decorative patterns are displayed again on the image display device. At this time, these left and right decorative patterns are created by partially overlapping displays such as "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. displayed at the center of the image display device 5, thereby creating a temporary stop notification effect. Visibility is the same as immediately after the start of (Visibility: Medium).

After that, the left and right decorative symbols are enlarged and displayed (moved and displayed toward the player) such as "x2", "x3", "x4", etc., so that they are no longer visible to the player. After that, the display of "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. is switched to a small display at the upper left of the image display device 5, resulting in the highest visibility state (visibility: high) becomes.

In addition, in this characteristic part 193SG, as shown in Fig. 16-36 to Fig. 16-37, Fig. 16-39 to Fig. 16-40, Fig. 16-42 to Fig. 16-43, the execution period of the temporary stop notification effect and the execution period of the re-variable display notification effect are different (the re-variable display notification effect is executed after the execution of the temporary stop notification effect), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the execution period of the temporary stop notification effect and the execution period of the re-variable display notification effect may overlap in part. For example, as shown in Fig. 16-36 to Fig. 16-37, when the pseudo-sequence pattern explodes and moves forward as a temporary stop notification effect on the image display device 5, a part of the pseudo-sequence pattern (for example, the letter "E") is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5 and then erased, while the display of the image of the character as the re-variable display notification effect is started on the rear side of the part of the pseudo-sequence pattern. By doing this, the image of the character becomes gradually visible to the player as the pseudo consecutive patterns are erased, improving the presentation effect, and further enabling the transition of the image displayed on the image display device 5 to occur without any sense of incongruity.

In addition, in this feature section 193SG, as shown in FIG. 16-35 (H) etc., as a temporary stop notification effect, an image in which the pseudo continuous pattern is cracked is displayed on the image display device 5, and the image itself explodes. Although the display format is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image with cracks and the image with explosion may be different images. For example, as a temporary stop notification effect, after displaying on the image display device 5 an image in which holes appear in the pseudo-continuous pattern, an image in which smoke and light are generated from these holes is displayed. Then, the image of smoke and light may make the pseudo continuous pattern difficult for the player to see, and an exploding image may be displayed instead of the pseudo continuous pattern. By doing so as well, it becomes possible to transition the images displayed on the image display device 5 without causing any discomfort.

Next, if it is decided to execute the special temporary stop notification effect at the start of the variable display, as shown in Figures 16-46 (A) to 16-46 (C), after a while after the variable display starts, It becomes a reach. Then, as the first temporary stop suggestion performance, a moving display of a pseudo-continuous pattern indicating execution of a pseudo-continuous pattern is executed at a slower speed (velocity V1) than usual in the "medium" decorative pattern display area 5C. Then, at the same time as the temporary stop re-presentation period ends, the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped. At this time, a temporary stop notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a temporary stop notification effect.

As shown in FIGS. 16-46 (D) to 16-46 (H), when the output of the temporary stop notification sound is finished, the display of the first special background image is started on the image display device 5, and the first The variable display of the decorative design starts again. At this time, if it is decided to execute a cut-in notice performance or a group notice performance at the start of the variable display, the cut-in notice performance or group notice performance is executed overlapping with the re-variable display notification performance.

Then, when the cut-in performance and the group preview performance are finished, the first variable display start number notification performance is executed for the first time without executing the first variable display start number notification performance.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 16-47 (I) to 16-47 (N), the first special background displayed on the image display device 5 is displayed by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern for the second time. At the same time as the image is displayed on the second special background image, the re-variable display of the decorative pattern, the cut-in notice effect, the group notice effect, the second second variable display start count notification effect are executed, and the third time the decorative pattern is displayed. By executing the temporary stop, the second special background image displayed on the image display device 5 is displayed as the third special background image, as well as variable display of decorative patterns, cut-in preview performance, group preview performance, The third time the second variable display start number notification effect is executed. Then, a reach effect is executed and decorative symbols are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot or a loss.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature section 193SG, as shown in FIGS. 16-33 and 16-34, concentrated lines are displayed at the density D1 on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggestion effect. After lowering the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns by this, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced by displaying concentrated lines at a density of D2, and the pseudo-continuous pattern is created by the temporary stop suggestion performance. It is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the temporary stop. Then, as a temporary stop notification effect, by displaying an effect image for temporary stop notification in the entire display area of the image display device 5 to make the left and right decorative patterns invisible, the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped. It can increase the feeling of elation.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 16-44, in the case where the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the concentrated line continues even after the pseudo-continuous pattern is hidden on the image display device 5. Therefore, if the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the concentrated line continues to be displayed even after the timing when the pseudo-continuous pattern is supposed to temporarily stop, so that the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the pseudo consecutive symbols did not temporarily stop, and it also alleviates the player's sense of disappointment that the pseudo consecutive symbols did not temporarily stop, thereby improving the game's interest.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 16-33, when the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, concentrated lines are displayed at a density of D2 before the switching timing of the display image data. Since the concentrated lines are displayed at the density D1 afterwards, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is higher after the display image data switching timing than before the display image data switching timing. In other words, by increasing the transparency of the saturated line after the display image data is switched, the player is made aware that the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, and the attention to the background image is increased through the saturated line. By doing so, it is possible to alleviate the player's feeling of disappointment that the pseudo-continuous symbols are not temporarily stopped.

In addition, if the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion performance, the combination of decorative symbols that will result in a jackpot or miss in combination with the left and right decorative symbols in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C will be displayed before it stops. Since the concentrated line is hidden, it is possible to prevent the player from misperceiving that the stop of the decorative pattern after the pseudo-continuous pattern is not temporarily stopped is a temporary stop.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 16-35 (G) to 16-35 (H), when the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first production position, Since the image display device 5 displays an image in which the pseudo-continuous pattern cracks and explodes (an image in which the pseudo-continuous pattern moves toward the player), the operation of the second movable body 193SG033 and the pseudo-continuous pattern are By displaying the explosion, it is possible to further impress upon the player that the pseudo-continuous pattern has been temporarily stopped.

In particular, in this feature part 193SG, when the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retreat position to the first production position as a temporary stop notification effect, so that the pseudo-continuous pattern and the pseudo-continuous pattern appear in front view. Since a part of the second movable body 193SG033 overlaps, the second movable body 193SG033 prevents the pseudo continuous pattern from becoming difficult for the player to see, and also notifies the player that the pseudo continuous pattern has temporarily stopped. can make an impression.

In addition, in this characteristic part 193SG, as an example in which the pseudo-continuous pattern deforms, a form in which the pseudo-continuous pattern explodes is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as an example in which the pseudo-continuous pattern deforms, , the pseudo continuous pattern may change to a specific shape (for example, circular or triangular), or the size of the pseudo continuous pattern may be different from before the temporary stop.

In addition, in this feature section 193SG, when the pseudo pattern is temporarily stopped, the second movable body 193SG033 is moved from the retracted position to the first production position. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In addition to or in place of the second movable body 193SG033, if the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, the movable body 32 is moved to the first production position or a position different from the first production position, and when viewed from the front. It may be moved to a position overlapping with at least a part of the pseudo-continuous pattern.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 16-35 (F) and 16-35 (G), in the temporary stop notification effect, the second movable body 193SG033 is Since the second movable body 193SG033 is moved from the first production position to the retracted position, the player can easily recognize that the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden from the image display device 5 due to the movement of the second movable body 193SG033.

In addition, in the variable display of this characteristic part 193SG, it is possible to perform a pseudo continuous effect up to three times, and each time the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped and the variable display is executed again as a pseudo continuous effect, the second pseudo continuous effect is executed. The image display device 5 displays "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. in accordance with the re-variable display number of times as a one-variable display start number notification effect. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 16-37(O), when performing the first variable display start number notification effect, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first effect position, and the second movable body 193SG033 and Some of the displays such as "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. overlap when viewed from the front, so "x2", "x3", etc. It is possible to attract attention to the display such as "x4" and improve the presentation effect.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 16-37 (O), Figure 16-40 (f), and Figure 16-43 (s), when displaying "x2" as the variable display start number notification effect, the second movable The number of times the first variable display starts is determined by making the body 193SG033 emit light in blue, the second movable body 193SG033 in green to display "x3", and the second movable body 193SG033 in red to display "x4". It is possible to attract the player's attention to the display of the notification performance, and the performance effect can be improved.

In addition, in this characteristic part 193SG, when the first variable display start count notification performance is executed, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first performance position, and the second movable body 193SG033 and the display of "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. are partially overlapped when viewed from the front, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the first variable display start count notification performance is executed, the second movable body 193SG033 and the display of "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. may be completely overlapped.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 16-33, 16-35, and 16-44, as a temporary stop suggestion performance, a pseudo continuous pattern is displayed as a temporary stop suggestion image in the center of the image display device 5, and a concentrated line is displayed. This makes it easier for the performance control CPU 120 to control the display of the temporary stop suggestion performance, and when the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the image data is switched at the display image data switching timing (as shown in FIG. 16-3). This can prevent the switching from image data to the image data shown in FIG. 16-4 from becoming unnatural. In particular, after the display image data switching timing, the pseudo continuous pattern moves downward from the center of the image display device 5, so the pseudo continuous pattern is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 in advance as a temporary stop suggestion image. By doing so, it is possible to switch the image data at the display image data switching timing in a different and natural manner that makes the player feel even more strange.

In addition, in the gaming machine of the present feature section 193SG, the performance control CPU 120 is configured to perform image data drawn as image data 1, image data 2, image data 3, and image data 4, as shown in FIGS. 16-3 and 16-4. The data can be combined to display an image on the image display device 5. In particular, pseudo-continuous patterns that are temporarily stopped as images are drawn as image data 1, which has the highest display priority, and decorative patterns and pseudo-continuous patterns are drawn as image data 2, which has a lower display priority than image data 1. Concentrated lines as a stop suggestion effect are drawn as image data 4 with the lowest display priority, so decorative patterns and pseudo-continuous patterns during moving display (during variable display), pseudo-continuous patterns as temporary stop suggestion images, temporary It is possible to increase the degree of freedom of concentrated lines as a stop suggestion effect.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 193SG, as shown in FIGS. 16-35(H), 16-36(I), and 16-36(J), a pseudo continuous pattern is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification effect. When the display explodes and moves toward the front, the left and right decorative symbols are invisible to the player, while the first variable display start count notification effect is displayed as shown in Figure 16-37 (O). When "x2" or the like is displayed on the image display device 5, the left and right decorative patterns are visible to the player, so the temporary stop notification effect and the first variable display start count notification effect (especially Display of "x2", etc.)) can enhance the production effect, and the decorative symbols on the left and right sides can be seen by the player during the first variable display start count notification production, so that the variable display can be executed again. This makes it easier for players to recognize.

In addition, the portions where the pseudo consecutive symbols explode and move as shown in Figures 16-35 (H), Figures 16-36 (I), Figures 16-36 (J), etc., Figure 16-37 (O), The parts shown in Figure 16-37 (P) etc. in which the displays such as "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. are displayed in a moving manner are all moving displays toward the player (enlarged display). ), the effects of the temporary stop notification performance and the first variable display start number notification performance can be enhanced by these moving displays toward the player.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 16-33, in the case where the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbol before the display image data switching timing is V1, but after the display image data switching timing, the pseudo-continuous symbol moves at a speed of V1. Since the moving speed of the continuous pattern is V3, the player can determine whether the pseudo continuous pattern is before or after the temporary stop timing (before the display image data switching timing) depending on the moving speed of the pseudo continuous pattern. This makes it easier for the player to understand whether it is later or not.

In addition, in this feature section 193SG, when the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous pattern before the display image data switching timing is the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous pattern after the display image data switching timing. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the moving speed of the pseudo-connection pattern before the display image data switching timing is slower than the pseudo-linking pattern after the display image data switching timing. It may be faster than the moving speed of the symbol.

In addition, as shown in Figure 16-34, when the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops, the movement speed of the pseudo-continuous pattern before the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous pattern is V1, but the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops. Since the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbol after the timing is V2, the player has to decide whether to display the pseudo-continuous symbol before or after the temporary stop depending on the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbol. can be easily understood.

In particular, in this feature section 193SG, as shown in FIGS. 16-34 and 16-35, the pseudo-continuous symbols before the temporary stop move from above to the bottom, but the pseudo-continuous symbols after the temporary stop are moved by the player. Since it moves toward the side (front side), it becomes easier for the player to understand whether it is before or after the temporary stop depending on the moving direction of the pseudo-sequenced pattern, and the movement display of the pseudo-sequenced pattern is Misidentification can be prevented.

In addition, in this characteristic part 193SG, although the form in which the moving direction of the pseudo continuous pattern is different before and after the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo continuous pattern is The moving direction of the pseudo continuous pattern may be the same before and after the continuous pattern is temporarily stopped. Furthermore, if the direction of movement of the pseudo-continuous pattern after the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped is different from the direction of movement of the pseudo-continuous pattern before the temporary stop, it does not have to be toward the player (towards the player). good.

In addition, in this characteristic part 193SG, in the case where the pseudo continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the moving speed of the pseudo continuous pattern before the display image data switching timing is the moving speed of the pseudo continuous pattern after the display image data switching timing. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, if the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, an image of the pseudo-continuous pattern before the display image data switching timing is displayed. The number of display frames for displaying the pseudo linked pattern after the display image data switching timing may be different. In addition, if the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the period in which the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed before the display image data switching timing (the performance period in which the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed), and the period in which the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed before the display image data switching timing. The period during which the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed after the timing may be different. In other words, in the present invention, "the moving speeds of the specific performance identification information (pseudo-continuous symbols in this feature section 193SG are different") include the fact that the number of display frames for displaying the pseudo-continuous symbols is different, It also includes the period in which the symbols are displayed (the production period in which the pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed).

Although the characteristic part 193SG of the present invention has been explained above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these, and even if there are changes or additions within the scope of the gist of the present invention, they are included in the present invention. .

For example, in the feature section 193SG, by displaying concentrated lines on the image display device 5 during the temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 ("middle" decorative pattern display area 5C). Although the embodiment has been exemplified to draw the player's attention to whether or not to temporarily stop, the present invention is not limited to this, and FIGS. 16-48(A) to 16-48 are shown as modification 193SG-1 As shown in (D), a concentrated line is displayed on the image display device 5 during the temporary stop suggestion effect, and the progress of the temporary stop suggestion effect (the pseudo continuous pattern is displayed moving toward the center of the image display device 5). ), the concentrated line may be moved and displayed toward the center of the image display device 5. By doing this, the player can specify that there is a possibility that the pseudo-continuous symbol will stop at the center of the image display device 5, so if the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the player can This makes it easier for the operator to recognize that the temporary stop was not made.

In addition, in the feature section 193SG, concentrated lines are displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggestion effect, and when the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, a color corresponding to the number of temporary stops is displayed. Although the embodiment in which the second movable body 193SG033 (second movable body LED 293SG034) is made to emit light is illustrated in FIG. In this case, a concentrated line may be displayed on the image display device 5 in a color corresponding to the number of executions of the temporary stop suggestion effect. For example, when the first temporary stop suggestion effect is executed, the concentrated line is displayed in blue, when the second temporary stop suggestion effect is executed, the concentrated line is displayed in green, and when the third temporary stop suggestion effect is executed, the concentrated line is displayed in red. . By doing this, when the second movable body 193SG033 is made to emit light as a temporary stop notification effect, the second movable body 193SG033 emits light in the same color as the concentrated line displayed as a temporary stop suggestion effect, so the effect The effect can be improved.

In addition, in the feature section 193SG, a mode is exemplified in which a cut-in preview performance and a group preview performance can be executed as a preview performance that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot during the variable display, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, as a modification example 193SG-3, as a preview effect, for example, the display mode of the decorative pattern can be changed or changed from the start timing of the variable display or the re-variable display timing when the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped. It may also be possible to perform effects such as changing the display direction.

In this way, when it is possible to execute a performance that changes the display mode of the decorative pattern or changes the direction of the variable display as a preview performance, "x2" and "x" are used as the first variable display start number notification performance. 3" and "x4" are displayed moving (enlarged) toward the player, execution of the preview effect may be restricted. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming unable to recognize that the re-variable display will be performed due to the execution of the preview effect.

In addition, the feature section 193SG has a mode in which, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, variable display is executed again without displaying an image that impairs the visibility of the pseudo-continuous symbol from the player on the image display device 5. Although shown as an example, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification example 193SG-4, when the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, the visibility of the pseudo continuous pattern temporarily stopped on the image display device 5 is It is also possible to display a visibility inhibiting image to be lowered (for example, an image of a blast wave, etc.), and then execute variable display again after the visibility inhibiting image is hidden. By doing so, the visibility inhibiting image is displayed before the re-variable display is executed, making it easy to understand that the re-variable display is executed.

Furthermore, a light guide plate made of a transparent plate material capable of displaying the above-mentioned visibility-impeding image by shining light from the outer peripheral side may be provided in front of the image display device 5 (at a position between the image display device 5 and the player) in the pachinko gaming machine 1. By doing this, when the pseudo consecutive patterns are temporarily stopped, the visibility-impeding image is displayed on the light guide plate, making it difficult for the player to see the pseudo consecutive patterns displayed on the image display device 5, thereby improving the impression on the player and enhancing the presentation effect of the visibility-impeding image.

In addition, in the feature section 193SG, if the pseudo-continuous pattern is not temporarily stopped at the center of the image display device 5, the pseudo-continuous pattern is always moved downward to the image display device 5 and is not displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification example 193SG-5, even if the pseudo continuous pattern is not temporarily stopped at the center of the image display device 5, the pseudo continuous pattern is A case may be provided in which the consecutive symbols once start moving downward on the image display device 5 and then return to the center of the image display device 5 and temporarily stop. In this case, the movement speed of the pseudo continuous pattern before the display image data switching timing, and the movement of the pseudo continuous pattern when returning to the center of the image display device 5 after passing through the center of the image display device 5 By making the speed different, the player can easily understand whether the pseudo-continuous pattern is before passing through the center of the image display device 5 or after it has once passed through the center of the image display device 5. You may.

Furthermore, when the pseudo-continuous pattern once passes through the center of the image display device 5 and then returns to the center of the image display device 5, the display of concentrated lines may not be executed again. By doing so, it is possible for the player to more easily understand that the pseudo continuous symbol once passes through the center of the image display device 5 and then returns to the center of the image display device 5.

In addition, in the feature section 193SG, pseudo continuous effects can be executed up to three times during variable display, and if pseudo continuous effects are executed three times during variable display, pseudo continuous effects can be executed twice. Although the example shows the form in which the reach effect of super reach is executed in the same way as when the super reach effect is executed, the present invention is not limited to this. 3 times) is executed, the reach effect will be different from the case where the pseudo continuous effect is executed less than the maximum number of times during the variable display (for example, the variable display result will have a higher probability of hitting the jackpot than other super reach reach effects). A high full-rotation reach effect, etc.) may be performed. In addition, if the pseudo continuous effect is executed the maximum number of times during variable display in this way, even if the full rotation reach effect is executed after the temporary stop notification effect without going through the re-variable display notification effect. good.

In addition, in the feature section 193SG, as a pseudo-continuous effect, a pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed in the center (“middle” decorative pattern display area 5C) while the symbols showing the same numerical value are stopped on the left and right decorative symbols (ready-to-reach state). Although the form of temporary stopping has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo-continuous pattern may be temporarily stopped in a state other than the reach state. Furthermore, as described above, as a pseudo-continuous presentation, a decorative pattern different from the pseudo-continuous pattern may be temporarily stopped in the "medium" decorative pattern display area 5C. In addition, regarding the form in which a decorative pattern different from the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped in the "medium" decorative pattern display area 5C as a pseudo continuous effect, combinations of odd and even numbers such as "135" and "246", "112" The decorative pattern may be temporarily stopped with a specific combination, such as a combination of so-called misaligned stitches such as "334" or "334".

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 225SG in the embodiment of the present invention)
Next, the characteristic section 225SG (hereinafter referred to as the main characteristic section 225SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be explained. Note that, in this feature section 225SG, descriptions of portions that have the same configuration as the above-mentioned feature section of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be omitted.

Type 1 gaming machine is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a state advantageous to a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
A display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying a performance image,
Suggestive effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a temporary stop suggestion effect) indicating that control is to be carried out to the advantageous state by displaying a specific image displayed on the display means) (a part that executes the variable display processing shown in FIG. 10);
Equipped with
The suggestive performance execution means is
A pre-stage effect that moves and displays the specific image (for example, a temporary stop suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 17-4(C) to 17-4(E));
The first subsequent stage performance is a success mode in which the specific image is stopped and displayed after the first stage stage performance is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 17-4(G) to 17-4(H), the pseudo-continuous pattern is (stopping part) and
A second later stage effect that is a failure mode in which the moving display of the specific image continues after the first stage effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 17-4 (F), the pseudo continuous pattern continues without temporary stopping) (the parts that are moved and hidden) and can be executed.
This is a characteristic feature.
According to this feature, it becomes easier to understand the success and failure of the suggestive performance, and the interest of the suggestive performance can be improved.

Type 2 gaming machine is
In the first stage effect, a translucent effect display is displayed on the specific image (for example, as shown in Figure 17-1, a concentrated line with a transmittance of 50% is displayed with priority over a decorative pattern or a pseudo-continuous pattern). (the part to be done) is to be done,
In the first latter stage effect, when the specific image is stopped and displayed, an opaque effect display is displayed to temporarily make the specific image difficult to see (for example, as shown in FIG. 17-4 (G) (The part where the effect image for temporary stop notification with 0% transparency is displayed)
In the second latter stage effect, the opaque effect display is not displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 17-4 (F), if the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the effect image for temporary stop notification is not displayed) part),
The gaming machine according to Form 1, wherein the characteristic part is that.
According to this feature, by displaying a translucent effect display, it is possible to improve the interest of the first stage performance in which it is unclear whether or not a specific image that is being moved and displayed will be displayed in a stopped state, and it is also possible to By making it difficult to see when displayed, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort during the stopped display, and also to emphasize that the stopped display has been made, thereby improving the interest of the subsequent performance.

Type 3 gaming machine is
In the first stage effect, an effect display is displayed on the background side of the specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. 17-5 as modification example 225SG-1, a decorative pattern or a pseudo-continuous pattern is given priority over a concentrated line). (displayed part),
When the first later stage effect is executed, an opaque effect display is displayed when the first latter stage effect is executed, so that the specific image is temporarily made difficult to see (for example, in FIG. 17-6 As shown in (G), the part where the effect image for temporary stop notification with transmittance of 0% is displayed),
When the second latter-stage effect is executed, the opaque effect display is not displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 17-6(F), if the pseudo continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the temporary stop notification effect is not displayed) (parts where the image is not displayed),
The gaming machine according to Form 1, wherein the characteristic part is that.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect display on the background side of a specific image, it is possible to improve the interest of the first stage performance in which it is unclear whether or not the specific image that is being moved and displayed will be displayed still. By making it difficult to view the image when it is stopped and displayed, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort when the image is stopped and displayed, and it is also possible to emphasize that the image is stopped and displayed, so that the interest of the subsequent performance can be improved.

Type 4 gaming machine is
In the first stage effect, an effect display is displayed on the background side of the specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. 17-5 as modification example 225SG-1, a decorative pattern or a pseudo-continuous pattern is given priority over a concentrated line). (displayed part),
In the second latter stage effect, an effect display is displayed on the background side of the specific image before the failure mode occurs, and an effect display is displayed for a predetermined period even after the specific image is deleted. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 17-7 (F) to 17-7 (H) as modification example 225SG-2, if the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the image display is performed by moving the pseudo-continuous pattern. The part where the concentrated line continues to be displayed even after it is hidden by device 5),
The gaming machine according to Form 1, wherein the characteristic part is that.
According to this feature, by displaying the effect display on the background side of the specific image, it is possible to improve the interest of the first stage performance in which it is unclear whether or not the specific image that is being moved and displayed will be displayed still. Even in the second stage performance, the effect display is displayed from before the failure mode occurs until a predetermined period after the specific image is deleted, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the second stage performance.

Type 5 gaming machine is
In the first stage effect, a translucent effect display is displayed on the specific image (for example, as shown in Figure 17-1, a concentrated line with a transmittance of 50% is given priority over a decorative pattern or a pseudo-continuous pattern). (displayed part),
In the second latter stage effect, a translucent effect display is displayed on the specific image before the failure mode occurs, and the effect display is displayed for a predetermined period even after the specific image is erased. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 17-8 (F) to 17-8 (H) as modification example 225SG-3, if the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the image is the part where the saturated line continues to be displayed even after it is hidden on the display device 5),
The gaming machine according to Form 1, wherein the characteristic part is that.
According to this feature, by displaying a translucent effect display on a specific image, it is possible to improve the interest of the first stage performance in which it is unclear whether or not the specific image that is being moved and displayed will be displayed still. Also in the second stage performance, the effect display is displayed from before the failure mode occurs until a predetermined period after the specific image is deleted, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the second stage performance.

Form 6 gaming machine is
In the first stage effect, a translucent, highly transparent, and highly transparent effect display is displayed on the specific image (for example, as shown in Figure 17-1, concentrated lines with a transmittance of 50% are displayed as decorative patterns or pseudo-links). (The part that is displayed with priority over the design)
In the first latter-stage effect, when the specific image is stopped and displayed, a low-transmission effect display whose transparency is lower than the high-transmission effect display is displayed, thereby temporarily making the specific image difficult to see. (For example, as shown in FIG. 17-9 as modification example 225SG-4, an effect image for temporary stop notification with a transmittance of 20% is displayed on the image display device 5, so that a decorative pattern or a pseudo continuous pattern is displayed. parts that are difficult for players to see),
In the second latter-stage performance, the low-transmission effect display is not displayed (for example, if the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion performance, the image display device 5 displays an effect image for temporary stop notification). is not displayed),
The gaming machine according to Form 1, wherein the characteristic part is that.
According to this feature, by displaying a highly transparent effect display, it is possible to improve the interest of the first stage performance in which it is unclear whether or not a specific image that is being moved and displayed will be displayed in a stopped state, and it is also possible to By displaying a low-transmission effect display when displayed, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort during the stopped display and to emphasize that the stopped display has been performed, so that the interest of the subsequent performance can be improved.

Type 7 gaming machine is
The first subsequent stage performance includes a performance in which the size of the specific image is enlarged compared to the size in the first stage stage performance (for example, as shown in FIGS. 17-1 and 17-2, the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped). (If you do so, the pseudo-connection pattern after the temporary stop will be displayed in a larger size than the temporary stop),
The gaming machine according to any one of embodiments 2 to 6, wherein the characteristic part is that.
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the visibility of a specific image that is displayed in a stopped state, and to further emphasize that the specific image is displayed in a stopped state.

Type 8 gaming machine is
The degree of emphasis of the effect display in the first stage performance increases as the first stage performance progresses (for example, as shown in FIGS. 17-4(C) to 17-4(E), (the part where the concentrated line is moved toward the center of the image display device 5 according to the display),
The gaming machine according to any one of embodiments 2 to 7, wherein the characteristic part is that.
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the expectation that the specific image will be displayed in a stopped state, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the first stage performance.

Type 9 gaming machine is
Equipped with a preview performance execution means (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance process shown in FIG. 10) capable of executing a preview performance that foretells the occurrence of a specific event,
During the period in which the effect display is displayed in the first latter stage performance and the second latter stage performance, the execution of the preview performance is restricted (for example, as modification 225SG-5, the image display device is used as a temporary stop notification performance) 5, when the effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed, the part that restricts the execution of the preview effect),
The gaming machine according to any one of embodiments 2 to 8, wherein the characteristic part is that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the preview performance from being lowered by the effect and the interest of the preview performance from decreasing.

The gaming machine of form 10 is
The suggestive performance execution means is
As the suggestive effect, a first specific image (for example, an image whose left-right width dimension is L1 as a pseudo-coupled suggestive effect) is displayed on the display means to display the first stage effect and the first second stage effect, or the first stage effect and the first stage effect. A first suggestive effect that performs a second latter stage effect (for example, a pseudo connected suggestive effect shown in FIG. 17-11(C) as modification example 225SG-5), and a display size smaller than the first specific image on the display means. A second specific image (for example, an image of an arrow whose left and right width dimension is L2 (L1>L2) as an active display change suggestion effect) is displayed and the first stage effect and the first second stage effect or the first stage effect and the second second stage effect are displayed. It is possible to execute a second suggestion performance (for example, the active display change suggestion performance shown in FIGS. 17-11 (D) to 17-11 (F) as modification example 225SG-5) that performs the second stage performance, and
When performing the first subsequent stage effect as the first suggestion effect, an opaque effect display or a low-transmission effect display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 17-11(B), the image display device 5 A part that displays an effect image for temporary stop notification with 0% transmittance along with an image as a pseudo-response suggestion effect),
When executing the first subsequent stage effect as the second suggestion effect, the opaque effect display or the low-transmission effect display is not displayed (for example, FIGS. 17-11(D) to 17-11(F)). As shown in , the image display device 5 displays an arrow image as an active display change notice effect, but does not display an effect image for temporary stop notification with a transmittance of 0%),
The gaming machine according to any one of embodiments 2 to 9, wherein the characteristic part is that.
According to this feature, in the second suggestion effect, an opaque effect display or a low-transmission effect display is not displayed when the first subsequent effect is executed, so that the second specific image having a small display size can be understood by the effect display. You can prevent it from becoming difficult.

First, the display control section 123 in the feature section 225SG will be explained. The CGROM in the display control unit 123 stores a plurality of types of image data for displaying images on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 is capable of displaying a predetermined image on the image display device 5 based on one image data stored in the CGROM based on instructions from the performance control CPU 120, and can display multiple types of image data. By arranging the images and displaying the images on the image display device 5, it is possible to display a predetermined effect screen. When not displaying a predetermined image on the image display device 5, depending on the situation, other image data may be placed in front of the image data of the predetermined image with a transmittance of 0%. The predetermined image is not displayed on the production screen by controlling the image based on the data not to be displayed on the production screen, and by displaying the image on the image display device 5 that has created the display data in which the image data of the predetermined image is not arranged. It may be controlled as follows.

As shown in Figure 17-1(A) to Figure 17-1(C), Figure 17-2(A) to Figure 17-2(C), Figure 17-3(A) to Figure 17-3(C). For example, when displaying an image on the image display device 5, the image is displayed on the image display device 5 based on display data created by arranging a plurality of image data including image data 1 to 4. Of these, FIG. 17-1 is the image data immediately before the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped as a temporary stop suggestion effect in the main feature section 225SG, and FIG. 17-2 is the image data when the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped. Yes, and FIG. 17-3 is image data when the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop.

As shown in FIG. 17-2 (A), image data 1 includes an effect image (temporary stop notification This is the data drawn to display the effect image for

As shown in FIG. 17-1(A), the image data 2 is transmitted from the outer periphery of the image display device 5 to the center of the image display device 5 (“middle” decorative pattern display area 5C) as a temporary stop suggestion effect. This is data drawn to display saturated lines toward.

As shown in FIG. 17-1(B), FIG. 17-2(B), and FIG. 17-3(A), image data 3 shows a pseudo continuous pattern on the image display device 5 during execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect. This is data drawn to display a moving display from the top to the bottom. In addition, when a pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, the temporarily stopped pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed in a larger size than during the moving display (as shown in Figure 17-1 (B), the left and right sides of the pseudo-continuous pattern before the temporary stop are The width dimension is a, and the top and bottom width dimensions are b, but as shown in Figure 17-2 (B), the left and right width dimension of the pseudo-continuous pattern at the time of temporary stop is x (x>a), and the top and bottom width dimension is y. (y>b)), and immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect ends without the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stopping, the image display device 5 displays the data in place of the pseudo-continuous pattern. This data is drawn to display a variable display of normal decorative patterns (designs from "1" to "9" in this feature section 225SG) from the top to the bottom.

As shown in FIG. 17-3(B), the image data 4 is a pseudo continuous pattern directed downward from the center of the image display device 5 immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect ends without the pseudo continuous pattern temporarily stopping. This is data drawn to display a moving display of consecutive symbols.

As shown in FIGS. 17-1 to 17-3, display priorities for displaying images on the image display device 5 are set for these image data 1 to 4. Image data 1 is set to have the highest display priority. Further, the display priority of image data 2 is set lower than that of image data 1, and the display priority of image data 3 is set lower than that of image data 2. The display priority of image data 4 is set to be the lowest (display priority of images in image display device 5: image data 1>image data 2>image data 3>image data 4). That is, in the image display device 5, the image based on image data 1 is displayed as the uppermost image, the image based on image data 2 is displayed as the lower image than the image based on image data 1, and the image based on image data 3 is displayed as the image on the lower layer. An image is displayed as a lower layer image than an image based on image data 1 and an image based on image data 2, and an image based on image data 4 is displayed as an image based on image data 1, an image based on image data 2, and an image based on image data 3. It is displayed as a lower layer image than the image.

Therefore, when executing the temporary stop suggestion effect, as shown in Figure 17-1 (C), the image based on image data 2 (concentrated line) changes from the image based on image data 3 (from the top to the bottom of the pseudo-continuous pattern). It is now displayed with priority over the movement display). Furthermore, since the concentrated lines in this feature section 225SG are set to have a high transmittance (for example, 50%), while the temporary stop suggestion performance is being executed, the player cannot insert decorative symbols or pseudo-continuous symbols through the concentrated lines. It is visible.

Immediately after the pseudo continuous pattern temporarily stops, as shown in FIGS. 17-2(C) and 17-2(D), the image based on image data 1 (effect image for temporary stop notification) is changed to image data 3. The image is displayed with priority over the image based on the image (the pseudo-continuous pattern whose size is larger than that during the moving display due to the temporary stop). Note that the effect image for temporary stop notification becomes non-displayed when a predetermined period of time elapses before the re-variable display starts.

Note that the transmittance of the effect image for temporary stop notification in the main feature section 225SG is set to 0%. In other words, when the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5, as shown in FIGS. 17-2(C) and 17-2(D). As a result, the decorative symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols become invisible to the player, but after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, these decorative symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols become visible to the player.

Immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect ends without the pseudo continuous pattern temporarily stopping, an image based on image data 3 (a variable display of a decorative pattern different from the pseudo continuous pattern) is displayed, as shown in Figure 17-3 (C). ) is displayed with priority over the image based on the image data 4 (the moving display of the pseudo-continuous pattern downward from the center of the image display device 5).

In particular, in this feature section 225SG, during execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) displays the image data shown in FIG. The player is made to pay attention to whether or not the symbols temporarily stop.

In addition, in the variable display that executes the temporary stop suggestion performance, the performance control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) controls whether the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped at the start timing of the variable display or not. The image data to be stopped is set and variable display is executed. Then, the performance control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) controls the image display device 5 at the display image data switching timing (see FIG. 16-33 of the above-mentioned feature section 193) for the temporary stop suggestion performance in which the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop. The image data to be displayed is switched from the image data in which the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped (FIGS. 17-1 and 17-2) to the image data in which the pseudo continuous pattern is not temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 17-3.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 in the variable display that executes the temporary stop suggestion effect in this characteristic section 225SG will be explained based on FIG. 17-4.

First, as shown in FIGS. 17-4(A) to 17-4(C), when a certain period of time has elapsed from the start of variable display, decorations are displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5C. The symbol stops (swinging stops) and becomes a reach. Thereafter, as a first temporary stop suggestion performance, the pseudo-continuous pattern moves from the top to the bottom in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C. At this time, as shown in FIGS. 17-4(C) to 17-4(E), the image display device 5 responds to the movement of the pseudo-continuous pattern toward the center of the image display device 5. Then, the concentrated line is displayed moving toward the center of the image display device 5.

Then, if the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) switches the image data, as shown in FIG. 17-4(F). At the same time that the saturated line is hidden, the pseudo-continuous pattern continues to move downward on the image display device without temporarily stopping and becomes hidden.

On the other hand, if the pseudo continuous pattern temporarily stops as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, as shown in FIGS. 17-4 (G) and 17-4 (H), the pseudo continuous pattern temporarily stops, An effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5. Furthermore, since the transparency of the temporary stop notification effect image is set to 0% as mentioned above, the player cannot use the temporary stop notification effect until a predetermined period has elapsed from the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous pattern. The image makes the pseudo-continuous pattern invisible. Then, after a predetermined period of time has passed since the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous pattern, the effect image for the temporary stop notification is hidden, so that the player can visually see the pseudo-continuous pattern that is larger in size than during the temporary stop notification effect. It becomes possible.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present feature section 225SG, during the variable display of 1, the pseudo continuous pattern is moved and displayed toward the center of the image display device 5, and the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped. It is possible to perform a stop suggestion effect. Further, when the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggestion presentation, the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped and an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5. The temporarily stopped pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily made invisible, and if the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion performance, the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed as an image without displaying the temporary stop notification effect image. Since the display device 5 continues to move downward and display the display, it disappears, so that the player can confirm whether the temporary stop suggestion performance is successful (temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol) or failed (the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop). ), which makes it easier to understand and improves the interest of the temporary stop suggestion performance.

Furthermore, during the temporary stop suggestion performance, concentrated lines with high transmittance are displayed on the image display device 5, thereby drawing the player's attention to whether or not the moving and displayed pseudo-continuous symbol will temporarily stop. You can improve your interest. Furthermore, when the pseudo-continuous symbols temporarily stop, an effect image for notifying the temporary stop with a transmittance of 0 is displayed on the image display device 5, thereby reducing the player's discomfort at the temporary stop. At the same time, it is possible to emphasize that the pseudo continuous pattern has temporarily stopped, so that the interest of the temporary stop of the pseudo continuous pattern can be improved.

In addition, when the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops, the pseudo-continuous pattern at the time of temporary stop is displayed in a larger size than before the temporary stop (the horizontal width dimension before the temporary stop is a, and the vertical width dimension is b) On the other hand, when temporarily stopped, the left and right width dimensions are x (x>a) and the vertical width dimensions are y (y>b)), so it is possible to improve the visibility of the temporarily stopped pseudo-continuous pattern, and also to improve the visibility of the pseudo-continuous pattern. Temporary stops can be emphasized more.

In addition, in this feature part 225SG, a form is exemplified in which the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed in a larger size than before the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped from the timing when the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, but the present invention is limited to this. The timing to display the size of the pseudo-pseudo continuous pattern larger than before the temporary stop is the timing immediately before the temporary stop, or the timing after the temporary stop, such as the timing when the effect image for temporary stop notification is hidden. It may be timing.

In addition, in this feature section 225SG, from the timing when the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops, the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed in a larger size than before the pseudo-continuous pattern was temporarily stopped, thereby emphasizing that the pseudo-continuous pattern has temporarily stopped. Although the present invention is not limited to this, for example, it is possible to emphasize that the pseudo-continuous pattern has temporarily stopped by changing the shape or color of the pseudo-continuous pattern from the timing when the pseudo-continuous pattern has temporarily stopped. You may.

In addition, in this feature section 225SG, as shown in Figures 17-4 (C) to 17-4 (E), converging lines are displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggestion effect, and the converging lines are moved toward the center of the image display device 5 as the temporary stop suggestion effect progresses, thereby increasing the degree of emphasis on whether the pseudo consecutive patterns will temporarily stop, thereby increasing the sense of anticipation that the pseudo consecutive patterns will temporarily stop and improving the interest of the temporary stop suggestion effect.

In addition, in this feature section 225SG, the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo-continuous pattern will be temporarily stopped is increased by moving and displaying the concentrated line toward the center of the image display device 5 in accordance with the progress of the temporary stop suggestion effect. Although the present invention is not limited to this, it is possible to change the color of the concentrated lines or increase the number of concentrated lines to be displayed (increase the density of concentrated lines) as the temporary stop suggestion progresses. ), the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo continuous pattern temporarily stops may be increased.

Although the characteristic portion 225SG of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these, and any changes or additions that do not depart from the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. .

For example, in the characteristic portion 225SG, as shown in FIG. 17-1, a form is exemplified in which a convergent line is drawn as image data 2, and a decorative pattern or pseudo-repeated pattern is drawn as image data 3, thereby displaying the convergent line in priority over the decorative pattern or pseudo-repeated pattern on the image display device 5; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 225SG-1, as shown in FIG. 17-5(A) to FIG. 17-5(C), a convergent line may be drawn as image data 4, thereby displaying the decorative pattern or pseudo-repeated pattern in priority over the convergent line on the image display device 5 (displaying the convergent line as an image behind the decorative pattern or pseudo-repeated pattern).

By doing this, as shown in FIGS. 17-6(A) to 17-6(H), during the temporary stop suggestion performance, the concentrated line is placed at the center of the image display device 5. By displaying them moving toward the area, it is possible to increase the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops, and the concentrated lines make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative pattern and the pseudo-continuous pattern. This can be prevented.

In addition, if the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) switches the image data, so that the converging lines are hidden, as shown in Figure 17-6 (F), and the pseudo consecutive symbols continue to move toward the bottom of the image display device without temporarily stopping, and are no longer displayed.

On the other hand, if the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, as shown in FIGS. 17-6 (G) and 17-6 (H), the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops, An effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5. Furthermore, since the transparency of the temporary stop notification effect image is set to 0% as described above, the player cannot use the temporary stop notification effect image until a predetermined period has elapsed after the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol. The image makes the pseudo-continuous pattern invisible. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous pattern, the effect image for the temporary stop notification is hidden, so that the player can visually see the pseudo-continuous pattern that is larger in size than during the temporary stop notification effect. It becomes possible.

As described above, by displaying the convergence lines as an image behind the decorative pattern and pseudo consecutive patterns, it is possible to increase the interest of the temporary stop suggestion effect that suggests that the pseudo consecutive patterns will temporarily stop. Furthermore, when the pseudo consecutive patterns temporarily stop, an effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed over the entire display area of the image display device 5, which reduces the player's sense of discomfort at the time of the temporary stop and emphasizes that the pattern has temporarily stopped, thereby increasing the interest of the temporary stop of the pseudo consecutive patterns.

In addition, in the modified example 225SG-1, if the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion production, after hiding the concentrated line, the image display device displays the pseudo-continuous symbol without temporarily stopping the pseudo-continuous symbol. Although a mode in which the display is continuously moved downward and hidden is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 225SG-2, FIGS. 17-7(A) to 17-7( As shown in H), if the pseudo continuous pattern does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo continuous pattern continues to move downward on the image display device without temporarily stopping and becomes hidden. On the other hand, the concentrated lines may continue to be displayed for a predetermined period of time even after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden, up to the timing at which the variable display stops.

By doing this, similar to Modification Example 225SG-1, by displaying the concentrated line as an image on the rear side of the decorative pattern or the pseudo-continuous pattern, a temporary stop suggestion that suggests that the pseudo-continuous pattern will temporarily stop. It can improve the interest of the performance. If the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the pseudo-continuous pattern can also be caused by continuous display of concentrated lines for a predetermined period of time after the pseudo-continuous pattern is hidden on the image display device 5. It is possible to increase the interest in determining whether or not to make a temporary stop. Although not particularly shown in the drawings, when the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops as a result of the temporary stop suggestion presentation, the entire display area of the image display device 5 temporarily stops when the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops, similar to the feature section 225SG. By displaying an effect image for informing of a stop, it is possible to reduce the player's discomfort during the temporary stop.

In addition, in the modified example 225SG-2, decorative symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed with priority over concentrated lines during the temporary stop suggestion production, and when the pseudo-continuation symbol does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion production. Regarding the above, an example has been given in which concentrated lines are continuously displayed for a predetermined period after the pseudo-continuous pattern is hidden on the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIGS. 17-8(A) to 17-8(H) as modification example 225SG-3, concentrated lines are displayed with priority over decorative patterns and pseudo-continuous patterns during the temporary stop suggestion performance, and If the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion presentation, even if the concentrated line is continuously displayed for a predetermined period after the pseudo-continuous pattern is hidden on the image display device 5. good.

By doing this, similar to the feature section 225SG, by displaying the decorative pattern or the pseudo-continuous pattern as an image on the rear side of the concentrated line, a temporary stop suggestion effect that suggests that the pseudo-continuous pattern will temporarily stop. You can improve your interest. If the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the pseudo-continuous pattern can also be caused by continuous display of concentrated lines for a predetermined period of time after the pseudo-continuous pattern is hidden on the image display device 5. It is possible to increase the interest in determining whether or not to make a temporary stop. Although not particularly shown in the drawings, when the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops as a result of the temporary stop suggestion presentation, the entire display area of the image display device 5 temporarily stops when the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops, similar to the feature section 225SG. By displaying an effect image for informing the player of a stop, it is possible to reduce the player's discomfort during the temporary stop.

In addition, in the feature section 225SG, when the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, an effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed as an image with a transmittance of 0% on the image display device 5, and the stopped pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily visually recognized. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, as shown in FIGS. 17-9(A) to 17-9(C) as a modified example 225SG-4, pseudo-continuous pattern When the vehicle has temporarily stopped, the image display device 5 may display an effect image for temporary stop notification as an image having a lower transmittance (for example, 20%, etc.) than the concentrated line.

In other words, as shown in Figure 17-10, during the period in which the concentrated line is displayed as a temporary stop suggestion effect (the period until the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous pattern), the transmittance of the concentrated line is high (for example, , the aforementioned 50%), the player can easily see the decorative symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols over the concentrated line, while the period during which the temporary stop notification effect image is displayed as the temporary stop notification effect ( During the period after the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous symbols), the transmittance is lower than that of the concentrated lines (for example, 20% as mentioned above), so the player is more likely to see the decorative symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols than during the period when the concentrated lines are displayed The continuous pattern may be difficult to visually recognize.

By doing this, similar to the feature section 225SG, by displaying concentrated lines with relatively high transmittance during the temporary stop suggestion effect, a temporary stop suggestion effect that suggests that the pseudo-continuous pattern will make a temporary stop. You can improve your interest. When the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops as a result of the temporary stop suggestion presentation (when the temporary stop notification presentation is executed), the image display device 5 By displaying the effect image for notifying a temporary stop in the entire display area, it is possible to reduce the player's sense of discomfort at the time of the temporary stop, and also to notify that the pseudo continuous symbol has temporarily stopped through the effect image for notifying the temporary stop. Since it can be emphasized, it is possible to improve the interest of the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous pattern.

Furthermore, in the feature section 225SG, a mode is exemplified in which a temporary stop suggestion performance and a temporary stop notification performance can be executed as performances related to the pseudo continuous performance during variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this. During the variable display, it may be possible to perform a preview effect that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot (see FIG. 16-29 in the feature section 193SG) as a different effect from the temporary stop suggestion effect and the temporary stop notification effect. . It should be noted that these preview effects can be executed when a concentrated line is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggestion effect, while an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification effect. When is displayed, execution of the preview effect may be restricted. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the variable display result will be a jackpot by executing the preview effect, and the effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed on the image display device 5. By restricting the execution of the preview performance, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the preview performance from being lowered by the temporary stop notification effect image and the interest of the preview performance to decrease.

In addition, as a preview effect that can be executed during variable display, as shown in FIG. 17-11 as modification example 225SG-5, for example, when a pseudo continuous symbol temporarily stops as a result of a temporary stop suggestion effect, the next As a result of the pseudo-coupling suggestion production, a pseudo-coupling suggestion production that further suggests that the pseudo-coupling pattern temporarily stops, and a variable display being executed at a predetermined position of the image display device 5 (for example, at the lower center of the image display device) An active display area 225SG005F is provided that displays a pending memory display corresponding to the active display as an active display, and by changing the display mode of the active display, an active display preview effect that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot, and an active display It may also be possible to execute an active display change preview effect that suggests that the display mode will change.

In this way, when performing a pseudo-continuous suggestion performance as a preview performance, for example, as shown in FIGS. Based on the temporary stop of the image display device 5, an image with a left-right width dimension of L1 is displayed as a pseudo-connection suggestion effect on the upper part of the image display device 5, and a temporary stop notification with a transmittance of 0% is displayed on the image display device 5. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the temporary stop, the effect image for the temporary stop notification is hidden. In other words, the display of the image as a pseudo-continuation suggestion effect starts from the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuation symbol, but the image as a pseudo-continuation suggestion effect becomes visible to the player only when the effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed. This is from the time when it was hidden.

On the other hand, when executing an active display change preview performance as a preview performance, the pseudo-continuous pattern is From the timing of the stop, the effect image for temporary stop notification is not displayed on the image display device 5, and the image of the active display change notice effect (in this modification 225SG-5, the image display device 5 displays an effect image from the right side of the image display device 5 to the active display area 225SG005F). An image of an arrow whose left and right width dimension is L2 (L1>L2) is displayed.

When the display mode of the active display changes as a result of the active display change preview performance, an arrow flying from the right side of the image display device 5 pierces the active display, as shown in FIG. 17-11(E). As a result, the display mode of the active display changes, and if the display mode of the active display does not change as a result of the active display change notice effect, the image display device 5 changes as shown in FIG. 17-11(F). It is only necessary that the arrow flying from the right side pass toward the left side of the image display device 5 without piercing the active display and then disappear.

In this way, in this modified example 225SG-5, when a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect is executed as a preview effect, an effect image for a temporary stop notification is displayed on the image display device 5 along with an image as a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect, making the image as a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect temporarily invisible to the player, whereas when an active display change preview effect is executed as a preview effect, an effect image for a temporary stop notification is not displayed on the image display device 5, and an image (arrow image) with a shorter display dimension than the image as a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect is displayed as the image for the active display change preview effect, thereby preventing the active display change preview effect from being obscured by the effect image for the temporary stop notification and becoming difficult to understand.

In addition, in this modification example 225SG-5, when performing a pseudo-connection suggestion effect as a preview effect, a pseudo-continuation suggestion effect is displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5 based on the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuation symbol as a result of the temporary stop notice effect. Although an example has been exemplified in which an image whose left and right width dimension is L1 is displayed as a continuous effect, and an effect image for temporary stop notification whose transmittance is 0% is displayed on the image display device 5, the present invention The present invention is not limited to this, and when performing a pseudo-connection suggestion effect as a preview effect, the transmittance is not 0% at the top of the image display device 5 together with the image as the pseudo-connection suggestion effect (for example, the transmittance is An effect image for temporary stop notification (20% or 50%) may be displayed.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 225SG in the embodiment of the present invention)
Next, the characteristic section 225SG (hereinafter referred to as the main characteristic section 225SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be explained. Note that, in this feature section 225SG, descriptions of portions that have the same configuration as the above-mentioned feature section of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be omitted.

First, the display control section 123 in the feature section 225SG will be explained. The CGROM in the display control unit 123 stores a plurality of types of image data for displaying images on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 is capable of displaying a predetermined image on the image display device 5 based on one image data stored in the CGROM based on instructions from the performance control CPU 120, and can display multiple types of image data. By arranging the images and displaying the images on the image display device 5, it is possible to display a predetermined effect screen. When not displaying a predetermined image on the image display device 5, depending on the situation, other image data may be placed in front of the image data of the predetermined image with a transmittance of 0%. The predetermined image is not displayed on the production screen by controlling the image based on the data not to be displayed on the production screen, and by displaying the image on the image display device 5 that has created the display data in which the image data of the predetermined image is not arranged. It may be controlled as follows.

As shown in Figure 17-1(A) to Figure 17-1(C), Figure 17-2(A) to Figure 17-2(C), Figure 17-3(A) to Figure 17-3(C). For example, when displaying an image on the image display device 5, the image is displayed on the image display device 5 based on display data created by arranging a plurality of image data including image data 1 to 4. Of these, FIG. 17-1 is the image data immediately before the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped as a temporary stop suggestion effect in the main feature section 225SG, and FIG. 17-2 is the image data when the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped. Yes, and FIG. 17-3 is image data when the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop.

As shown in FIG. 17-2 (A), image data 1 includes an effect image (temporary stop notification This is the data drawn to display the effect image for

As shown in FIG. 17-1(A), the image data 2 is transmitted from the outer periphery of the image display device 5 to the center of the image display device 5 (“middle” decorative pattern display area 5C) as a temporary stop suggestion effect. This is data drawn to display saturated lines toward.

As shown in FIG. 17-1(B), FIG. 17-2(B), and FIG. 17-3(A), image data 3 shows a pseudo continuous pattern on the image display device 5 during execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect. This is data drawn to display a moving display from the top to the bottom. In addition, when a pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, the temporarily stopped pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed in a larger size than during the moving display (as shown in Figure 17-1 (B), the left and right sides of the pseudo-continuous pattern before the temporary stop are The width dimension is a, and the top and bottom width dimensions are b, but as shown in Figure 17-2 (B), the left and right width dimension of the pseudo-continuous pattern at the time of temporary stop is x (x>a), and the top and bottom width dimension is y. (y>b)), and immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect ends without the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stopping, the image display device 5 displays the data in place of the pseudo-continuous pattern. This data is drawn to display a variable display of normal decorative patterns (designs from "1" to "9" in this feature section 225SG) from the top to the bottom.

As shown in FIG. 17-3(B), the image data 4 is a pseudo continuous pattern directed downward from the center of the image display device 5 immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect ends without the pseudo continuous pattern temporarily stopping. This is data drawn to display a moving display of consecutive symbols.

As shown in FIGS. 17-1 to 17-3, display priorities for displaying images on the image display device 5 are set for these image data 1 to 4. Image data 1 is set to have the highest display priority. Further, the display priority of image data 2 is set lower than that of image data 1, and the display priority of image data 3 is set lower than that of image data 2. The display priority of image data 4 is set to be the lowest (display priority of images in image display device 5: image data 1>image data 2>image data 3>image data 4). That is, in the image display device 5, an image based on image data 1 is displayed as the uppermost image, an image based on image data 2 is displayed as a lower layer image than an image based on image data 1, and an image based on image data 3 is displayed as a lower layer image. An image is displayed as a lower layer image than an image based on image data 1 and an image based on image data 2, and an image based on image data 4 is displayed as an image based on image data 1, an image based on image data 2, and an image based on image data 3. It is displayed as a lower layer image than the image.

Therefore, when executing the temporary stop suggestion effect, as shown in Figure 17-1 (C), the image based on image data 2 (concentrated line) changes from the image based on image data 3 (from the top to the bottom of the pseudo-continuous pattern). It is now displayed with priority over the movement display). Furthermore, since the concentrated line in the main characteristic section 225SG has a high transmittance (for example, 50%), the player cannot draw decorative symbols or pseudo-continuous symbols through the concentrated line during execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect. It is visible.

Immediately after the pseudo continuous pattern temporarily stops, as shown in FIGS. 17-2(C) and 17-2(D), the image based on image data 1 (effect image for temporary stop notification) is changed to image data 3. The image is displayed with priority over the image based on the image (the pseudo-continuous pattern whose size is larger than that during the moving display due to the temporary stop). Note that the effect image for temporary stop notification becomes non-displayed when a predetermined period of time elapses before the re-variable display starts.

Note that the transmittance of the effect image for temporary stop notification in the main feature section 225SG is set to 0%. In other words, when the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5, as shown in FIGS. 17-2(C) and 17-2(D). As a result, the decorative symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols become invisible to the player, but after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, these decorative symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols become visible to the player.

Immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect ends without the pseudo continuous pattern temporarily stopping, an image based on image data 3 (a variable display of a decorative pattern different from the pseudo continuous pattern) is displayed, as shown in Figure 17-3 (C). ) is displayed with priority over the image based on the image data 4 (the moving display of the pseudo-continuous pattern downward from the center of the image display device 5).

In particular, in this feature section 225SG, during execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) displays the image data shown in FIG. The player is made to pay attention to whether or not the symbols temporarily stop.

In addition, in the variable display that executes the temporary stop suggestion performance, the performance control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) controls whether the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped at the start timing of the variable display or not. The image data to be stopped is set and variable display is performed. Then, the performance control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) controls the image display device 5 at the display image data switching timing (see FIG. 16-33 of the above-mentioned feature section 193) for the temporary stop suggestion performance in which the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop. The image data to be displayed is switched from the image data in which the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped (FIGS. 17-1 and 17-2) to the image data in which the pseudo continuous pattern is not temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 17-3.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 in the variable display in which the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed in the main feature section 225SG will be explained based on FIG. 17-4.

First, as shown in FIGS. 17-4(A) to 17-4(C), when a certain period of time has elapsed from the start of variable display, decorations are displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5C. The symbol stops (swinging stops) and becomes a reach. Thereafter, as a first temporary stop suggestion performance, the pseudo-continuous pattern moves from the top to the bottom in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C. At this time, as shown in FIGS. 17-4(C) to 17-4(E), the image display device 5 responds to the movement of the pseudo-continuous pattern toward the center of the image display device 5. Then, the concentrated line is displayed moving toward the center of the image display device 5.

Then, if the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) switches the image data, as shown in FIG. 17-4(F). At the same time that the saturated line is hidden, the pseudo-continuous pattern continues to move downward on the image display device without temporarily stopping and becomes hidden.

On the other hand, if the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, as shown in Figures 17-4 (G) and 17-4 (H), the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop and an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed across the entire display area of the image display device 5. Note that, as described above, the transparency of the effect image for temporary stop notification is set to 0%, so the player cannot see the pseudo consecutive symbols due to the effect image for temporary stop notification until a predetermined period has passed since the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stopped. Then, after the predetermined period has passed since the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stopped, the effect image for temporary stop notification is hidden, allowing the player to see the pseudo consecutive symbols that are larger than those during the temporary stop notification effect.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present feature section 225SG, during the variable display of 1, the pseudo continuous pattern is moved and displayed toward the center of the image display device 5, and the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped. It is possible to perform a stop suggestion effect. Further, when the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggestion presentation, the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped and an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5. The temporarily stopped pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily made invisible, and if the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion performance, the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed as an image without displaying the temporary stop notification effect image. Since the display device 5 continues to move downward and display the display, it disappears, so that the player can confirm whether the temporary stop suggestion performance is successful (temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol) or failed (the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop). ), which makes it easier to understand and improves the interest of the temporary stop suggestion performance.

Furthermore, during the temporary stop suggestion performance, concentrated lines with high transmittance are displayed on the image display device 5, thereby drawing the player's attention to whether or not the moving and displayed pseudo-continuous symbol will temporarily stop. You can improve your interest. Furthermore, when the pseudo-continuous symbols temporarily stop, an effect image for notifying the temporary stop with a transmittance of 0 is displayed on the image display device 5, thereby reducing the player's discomfort at the temporary stop. At the same time, it is possible to emphasize that the pseudo continuous pattern has temporarily stopped, so that the interest of the temporary stop of the pseudo continuous pattern can be improved.

In addition, when the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops, the pseudo-continuous pattern at the time of temporary stop is displayed in a larger size than before the temporary stop (the horizontal width dimension before the temporary stop is a, and the vertical width dimension is b) On the other hand, when temporarily stopped, the left and right width dimensions are x (x>a) and the vertical width dimensions are y (y>b)), so it is possible to improve the visibility of the temporarily stopped pseudo-continuous pattern, and also to improve the visibility of the pseudo-continuous pattern. Temporary stops can be emphasized more.

In addition, in this feature part 225SG, a form is exemplified in which the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed in a larger size than before the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped from the timing when the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, but the present invention is limited to this. The timing to display the size of the pseudo-pseudo continuous pattern larger than before the temporary stop is the timing immediately before the temporary stop, or the timing after the temporary stop, such as the timing when the effect image for temporary stop notification is hidden. It may be timing.

In addition, in this feature section 225SG, from the timing when the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops, the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed in a larger size than before the pseudo-continuous pattern was temporarily stopped, thereby emphasizing that the pseudo-continuous pattern has temporarily stopped. Although the present invention is not limited to this, for example, it is possible to emphasize that the pseudo-continuous pattern has temporarily stopped by changing the shape or color of the pseudo-continuous pattern from the timing when the pseudo-continuous pattern has temporarily stopped. You may.

In addition, in this feature section 225SG, as shown in FIGS. 17-4(C) to 17-4(E), concentrated lines are displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggestion effect, and the temporary stop suggestion effect is displayed on the image display device 5. The pseudo continuous pattern can be temporarily stopped by increasing the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo continuous pattern will temporarily stop by moving and displaying the concentrated line toward the center of the image display device 5 according to the progress. It is possible to increase expectations for the temporary stop, and improve the interest of the temporary stop suggestion performance.

In addition, in this feature section 225SG, the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo-continuous pattern will be temporarily stopped is increased by moving and displaying the concentrated line toward the center of the image display device 5 in accordance with the progress of the temporary stop suggestion effect. Although the present invention is not limited to this, it is possible to change the color of the concentrated lines or increase the number of concentrated lines to be displayed (increase the density of concentrated lines) as the temporary stop suggestion progresses. ), the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo continuous pattern temporarily stops may be increased.

Although the characteristic part 225SG of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these, and even if there are changes or additions within the scope of the gist of the present invention, they are included in the present invention. .

For example, in the characteristic portion 225SG, as shown in FIG. 17-1, a form is exemplified in which a convergent line is drawn as image data 2, and a decorative pattern or pseudo-repeated pattern is drawn as image data 3, thereby displaying the convergent line in priority over the decorative pattern or pseudo-repeated pattern on the image display device 5; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 225SG-1, as shown in FIG. 17-5(A) to FIG. 17-5(C), a convergent line may be drawn as image data 4, thereby displaying the decorative pattern or pseudo-repeated pattern in priority over the convergent line on the image display device 5 (displaying the convergent line as an image behind the decorative pattern or pseudo-repeated pattern).

By doing this, as shown in FIGS. 17-6(A) to 17-6(H), during the temporary stop suggestion performance, the concentrated line is placed at the center of the image display device 5. By displaying them moving toward the area, it is possible to increase the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops, and the concentrated lines make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative pattern and the pseudo-continuous pattern. This can be prevented.

In addition, if the pseudo continuous pattern does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion performance, the performance control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) switches the image data, as shown in FIG. 17-6 (F), At the same time that the saturated line is hidden, the pseudo-continuous pattern continues to move downward on the image display device without temporarily stopping and becomes hidden.

On the other hand, if the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 17-6 (G) and FIG. 17-6 (H), the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop and an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed over the entire display area of the image display device 5. Note that, as described above, the transparency of the effect image for temporary stop notification is set to 0%, so the player cannot see the pseudo consecutive symbols due to the effect image for temporary stop notification until a predetermined period has passed since the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stopped. Then, after the predetermined period has passed since the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stopped, the effect image for temporary stop notification is hidden, allowing the player to see the pseudo consecutive symbols that are larger than those during the temporary stop notification effect.

As described above, by displaying the concentrated line as an image on the rear side of the decorative pattern or the pseudo-continuous pattern, it is possible to improve the interest of the temporary stop suggestion effect that suggests that the pseudo-continuous pattern will temporarily stop. Furthermore, when the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped, an effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5, so that it is possible to reduce the player's discomfort at the time of the temporary stop, and also to prevent the temporary stop from occurring. It is possible to emphasize what has been done, and it is possible to improve the interest of the temporary stop of the pseudo continuous pattern.

In addition, in the modified example 225SG-1, if the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion production, after hiding the concentrated line, the image display device displays the pseudo-continuous symbol without temporarily stopping the pseudo-continuous symbol. Although a mode in which the display is continuously moved downward and hidden is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 225SG-2, FIGS. 17-7(A) to 17-7( As shown in H), if the pseudo continuous pattern does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo continuous pattern continues to move downward on the image display device without temporarily stopping and becomes hidden. On the other hand, the concentrated lines may continue to be displayed for a predetermined period of time even after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden, up to the timing at which the variable display stops.

By doing this, similar to Modification Example 225SG-1, by displaying the concentrated line as an image on the rear side of the decorative pattern or the pseudo-continuous pattern, a temporary stop suggestion that suggests that the pseudo-continuous pattern will temporarily stop. It can improve the interest of the performance. If the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the pseudo-continuous pattern can also be caused by continuous display of concentrated lines for a predetermined period of time after the pseudo-continuous pattern is hidden on the image display device 5. It is possible to increase the interest in determining whether or not to make a temporary stop. Although not particularly shown in the drawings, when the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops as a result of the temporary stop suggestion presentation, the entire display area of the image display device 5 temporarily stops when the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops, similar to the feature section 225SG. By displaying an effect image for informing the player of a stop, it is possible to reduce the player's discomfort during the temporary stop.

In addition, in the modified example 225SG-2, during the temporary stop suggestion performance, the decorative pattern and pseudo consecutive pattern are displayed in priority over the convergence lines, and when the pseudo consecutive pattern does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion performance, the convergence lines are continuously displayed for a predetermined period of time after the pseudo consecutive pattern is no longer displayed on the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figs. 17-8(A) to 17-8(H) as modified example 225SG-3, during the temporary stop suggestion performance, the convergence lines are displayed in priority over the decorative pattern and pseudo consecutive pattern, and when the pseudo consecutive pattern does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion performance, the convergence lines may be continuously displayed for a predetermined period of time after the pseudo consecutive pattern is no longer displayed on the image display device 5.

By doing this, similar to the feature section 225SG, by displaying the decorative pattern or the pseudo-continuous pattern as an image on the rear side of the concentrated line, a temporary stop suggestion effect that suggests that the pseudo-continuous pattern will temporarily stop. You can improve your interest. If the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the pseudo-continuous pattern can also be caused by continuous display of concentrated lines for a predetermined period of time after the pseudo-continuous pattern is hidden on the image display device 5. It is possible to increase the interest in determining whether or not to make a temporary stop. Although not particularly shown in the drawings, when the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops as a result of the temporary stop suggestion presentation, the entire display area of the image display device 5 temporarily stops when the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops, similar to the feature section 225SG. By displaying an effect image for informing the player of a stop, it is possible to reduce the player's discomfort during the temporary stop.

In addition, in the feature section 225SG, when the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, an effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed as an image with a transmittance of 0% on the image display device 5, and the stopped pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily visually recognized. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, as shown in FIGS. 17-9(A) to 17-9(C) as a modified example 225SG-4, pseudo-continuous pattern When the vehicle has temporarily stopped, the image display device 5 may display an effect image for temporary stop notification as an image having a lower transmittance (for example, 20%, etc.) than the concentrated line.

In other words, as shown in Figure 17-10, during the period in which the concentrated line is displayed as a temporary stop suggestion effect (the period until the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous pattern), the transmittance of the concentrated line is high (for example, , the aforementioned 50%), the player can easily see the decorative symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols over the concentrated line, while the period during which the temporary stop notification effect image is displayed as the temporary stop notification effect ( During the period after the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous symbols), the transmittance is lower than that of the concentrated lines (for example, 20% as mentioned above), so the player is more likely to see the decorative symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols than during the period when the concentrated lines are displayed The continuous pattern may be difficult to visually recognize. Although not particularly shown in this modification example 225SG-4, if the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion performance, a temporary stop notification is displayed on the image display device 5 as in other characteristic parts and modifications. The effect image for is not displayed.

In this way, as with the feature portion 225SG, a converging line with a relatively high transparency is displayed during the temporary stop suggestion effect, thereby increasing the interest of the temporary stop suggestion effect that suggests that the pseudo-consecutive patterns will temporarily stop. Then, when the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect (when the temporary stop notification effect is executed), as with the feature portion 225SG, an effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed over the entire display area of the image display device 5 when the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop, thereby reducing the player's sense of discomfort at the time of the temporary stop, and the effect image for the temporary stop notification can be used to emphasize that the pseudo-consecutive patterns have temporarily stopped, thereby increasing the interest of the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stopping.

Furthermore, in the feature section 225SG, a mode is exemplified in which a temporary stop suggestion performance and a temporary stop notification performance can be executed as performances related to the pseudo continuous performance during variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this. As modification example 225SG-5, during the variable display, a preview effect that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot is used as a different effect from the temporary stop suggestion effect and the temporary stop notification effect (see Figure 16-29 in feature section 193SG) ) may be executable. It should be noted that these preview effects can be executed when a concentrated line is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggestion effect, while an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification effect. When is displayed, execution of the preview effect may be restricted. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the variable display result will be a jackpot by executing the preview effect, and the effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed on the image display device 5. By restricting the execution of the preview performance, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the preview performance from being lowered by the temporary stop notification effect image and the interest of the preview performance to decrease.

In addition, as a preview effect that can be executed during variable display, as shown in FIG. 17-11 as modification example 225SG-5, for example, when a pseudo continuous symbol temporarily stops as a result of a temporary stop suggestion effect, the next As a result of the pseudo-coupling suggestion production, a pseudo-coupling suggestion production that further suggests that the pseudo-coupling pattern temporarily stops, and a variable display being executed at a predetermined position of the image display device 5 (for example, at the lower center of the image display device) An active display area 225SG005F is provided that displays a pending memory display corresponding to the active display as an active display, and by changing the display mode of the active display, an active display preview effect that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot, and an active display It may also be possible to execute an active display change preview effect that suggests that the display mode will change.

In this way, when performing a pseudo-continuous suggestion performance as a preview performance, for example, as shown in FIGS. Based on the temporary stop of the image display device 5, an image with a left-right width dimension of L1 is displayed as a pseudo-connection suggestion effect on the upper part of the image display device 5, and a temporary stop notification with a transmittance of 0% is displayed on the image display device 5. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the temporary stop, the effect image for the temporary stop notification is hidden. In other words, the display of the image as a pseudo-continuation suggestion effect starts from the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuation symbol, but the image as a pseudo-continuation suggestion effect becomes visible to the player only when the effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed. This is from the time when it was hidden.

On the other hand, when executing an active display change preview performance as a preview performance, the pseudo-continuous pattern is From the timing of the stop, the effect image for temporary stop notification is not displayed on the image display device 5, and the image of the active display change notice effect (in this modification 225SG-5, the image display device 5 displays an effect image from the right side of the image display device 5 to the active display area 225SG005F). An image of an arrow whose left and right width dimension is L2 (L1>L2) is displayed.

When the display mode of the active display changes as a result of the active display change preview performance, an arrow flying from the right side of the image display device 5 pierces the active display, as shown in FIG. 17-11(E). As a result, the display mode of the active display changes, and if the display mode of the active display does not change as a result of the active display change notice effect, as shown in FIG. 17-11(F), the display mode of the image display device 5 It is only necessary that the arrow flying from the right side pass toward the left side of the image display device 5 without piercing the active display and then disappear.

In this way, in this modified example 225SG-5, when performing a pseudo-coupling suggestion production as a preview production, by displaying an effect image for temporary stop notification along with an image as a pseudo-coupling suggestion production on the image display device 5, While once making the image as a pseudo-coupled suggestion effect invisible to the player, when executing an active display change notice effect as a notice effect, the effect image for temporary stop notification is not displayed on the image display device 5. By displaying an image (arrow image) with a shorter display size than the image for the pseudo-link suggestion effect as the image for the active display change notice effect, the active display change notice effect can be blocked by the temporary stop notification effect image. This can prevent things from becoming difficult to understand.

In addition, in this modified example 225SG-5, when a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect is executed as a preview effect, an image with a left-right width dimension of L1 is displayed as a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect on the upper part of the image display device 5 based on the pseudo consecutive pattern being temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop preview effect, and an effect image for temporary stop notification with a transparency of 0% is displayed on the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect is executed as a preview effect, an effect image for temporary stop notification with a transparency other than 0% (for example, a transparency of 20% or 50%) may be displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5 together with the image as a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 193SG and the characteristic portion 225SG, a pattern (pseudo-series effect) that notifies that a pseudo-sequence effect will be executed is used as one of the plurality of decorative patterns or as a pattern different from the decorative pattern. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, by changing the display mode such as the pending memory display at the end timing of the variable display, the display device 5 temporarily stops the symbol. The variable display result corresponding to the suspended memory display can be executed as a variable display result that suggests a jackpot, and can be displayed as one of a plurality of decorative symbols or as a symbol different from the decorative symbol. , a case may be provided in which the symbol indicating that the pending memory display changes (the pending memory display change notification symbol) stops on the image display device 5. In this way, when the pending memory display change notification pattern stops on the image display device 5, the temporary stop suggestion in the feature section 193SG or the feature section 225SG is made based on whether or not the pending memory display change notification pattern stops. It may also be possible to perform a performance equivalent to the performance (suggestive performance in the present invention).

In addition, in the characteristic portion 193SG and the characteristic portion 225SG, a pattern (pseudo-series effect) that notifies that a pseudo-sequence effect will be executed is used as one of the plurality of decorative patterns or as a pattern different from the decorative pattern. Although the present invention is not limited to this, for example, it is possible to display a plurality of images as background images on the image display device 5, It is possible to suggest the ratio of the variable display result being executed to a jackpot depending on the background image, and the background image changes as one of a plurality of decorative patterns or as a pattern different from the decorative pattern. A case may be provided in which the symbol indicating that the background image change is to be performed (background image change notification symbol) stops on the image display device 5. In this way, when the background image change notification pattern stops on the image display device 5, the provisional stop suggestion effect in the feature section 193SG or the feature section 225SG is made based on whether or not the background image change notification pattern stops. A corresponding effect (suggestion effect in the present invention) may be made executable.

Further, in the feature section 193SG, the pachinko game machine 1 is illustrated as a game machine that performs a predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a game machine that performs a predetermined game is defined as a game machine that performs at least a predetermined game. In addition to the pachinko game machine 1, it may be a slot machine or a general game machine as long as it performs the following.

Further, in this specification, a plurality of characteristic parts and modifications are illustrated as examples of the form of the gaming machine of the present invention, but the gaming machine of the present invention may also be implemented by combining these plurality of characteristic parts and modification examples. Alternatively, only one feature or modification may be implemented.

For example, in the characteristic section 193SG or the characteristic section 225SG, a symbol (pseudo-continuous effect) that notifies that a pseudo-continuous performance will be executed may be used as one symbol among a plurality of decorative symbols, or as a symbol different from the decorative symbol. Although the embodiment in which the symbols (symbols) are temporarily stopped on the image display device 5 has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. A performance corresponding to a temporary stop suggestion performance in the feature section 193SG or the feature section 225SG (suggestion performance in the present invention) is executed for the stop of a pattern that is suggestible and that suggests that a specific setting value is set. It may be possible.

1 Pachinko game machine 2 Game board 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 11 Main board 12 Performance control board 103 CPU
120 CPU for production control
75SG001 Pachinko gaming machine 300 First presentation unit 301 Base member 302 Cover member 303 LED board 331 Decorative pattern 400 Second presentation unit 401 Base member 402 Cover member 403 LED board 420 Decoration section 600 Third presentation unit 800 Fourth presentation unit 801 Base Member 802 Cover member 803 LED board

Claims (2)

A gaming machine that variably displays a plurality of types of performance identification information including specific performance identification information, derives and displays display results, and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
As a variable display, the specific performance identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the performance identification information to the derivation and display of the display result, and then the variable display is resumed after the specific performance can be executed. A performance execution means,
Suggestion performance execution means capable of executing a suggestion performance in which the specific performance identification information suggests that the specific performance identification information is temporarily stopped;
Notification performance execution means capable of executing a notification performance for notifying that the specific performance identification information has been temporarily stopped;
A special performance execution means capable of executing a special performance after the execution of the notification performance,
As the suggested performance, the suggestive performance execution means increases the visibility of the specific performance identification information and performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information by displaying an effect display. Once the performance identification information different from the information is lowered to a first low visibility state in which visibility is visible, the specific performance identification information and the specific performance identification are lowered to a first low visibility state in which visibility is lower than the first low visibility state. It is possible to perform a performance that lowers the performance identification information different from the information to a second low visibility state that is a visibility state where the performance identification information is visible,
The notification performance execution means is capable of executing a performance that makes performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information invisible as the notification performance,
In the case where the specific performance identification information does not temporarily stop after the suggested performance is executed, the movement speed of the specific performance identification information before the predetermined timing is different from the movement speed of the specific performance identification information after the predetermined timing. ,
The special performance execution means displays a specific display corresponding to the resumption of the variable display, which is a performance different from the suggestion performance and the notification performance, and which is different from a predetermined display that was displayed before the variable display was restarted. The performance can be performed as the special performance,
The suggestive effect execution means is capable of continuously displaying the effect display for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing if the specific effect identification information does not temporarily stop ;
The display area of the effect display in the second low visibility state is larger than the display area of the effect display in the first low visibility state.
A gaming machine characterized by: A gaming machine that variably displays a plurality of types of performance identification information, derives and displays display results, and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
As a variable display, special identification information different from the performance identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the performance identification information until the display result is derived and displayed, and then the variable display is resumed. a specific performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance;
Suggestion performance execution means capable of executing a suggestion performance that suggests that the special identification information temporarily stops;
a notification effect execution means capable of executing a notification effect to notify that the special identification information has temporarily stopped;
Special performance execution means capable of executing a special performance after execution of the notification performance,
The suggestive effect execution means is in a visual state in which the special identification information and the effect identification information are visible by displaying an effect display as the suggestive effect, and the special identification information and the effect identification information are visible. After the first low visibility state is lowered, the visibility is lowered to a second low visibility state, which is a visibility state that is even lower in visibility than the first low visibility state, but in which the special identification information and the production identification information can be seen. It is possible to perform a production that
The notification performance execution means is capable of executing a performance that makes the performance identification information invisible as the notification performance,
In the case where the special identification information does not temporarily stop after the suggestive effect is executed, the moving speed of the special identification information before the predetermined timing is different from the moving speed of the special identification information after the predetermined timing,
The special performance execution means displays a specific display corresponding to the resumption of the variable display, which is a performance different from the suggestion performance and the notification performance, and which is different from a predetermined display that was displayed before the variable display was restarted. The production can be performed as the special production,
The suggestive effect execution means is capable of continuously displaying the effect display for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing if the special identification information does not temporarily stop ;
The display area of the effect display in the second low visibility state is larger than the display area of the effect display in the first low visibility state.
A gaming machine characterized by: